32 USONICsd

FACTORY AUTOMATION
ULTRASONIC
SENSORS
Courtesy of Steven Engineering, Inc. 230 Ryan Way, South San Francisco, CA 94080-6370 General Inquiries: (800) 670-4183 www.stevenengineering.com
Table of contents
Ultrasonic sensors
Contents Page
Type code _____________________________________________________________________________ 7
Selection table__________________________________________________________________________ 8
Operating principles and technology of ultrasonic sensors ___________________________________ 10
Selecting the correct sensor _____________________________________________________________ 12
Sensor principle ____________________________________________________________________ 12
Output functions ____________________________________________________________________ 14
Types/housing shapes _______________________________________________________________ 16
Electrical connections________________________________________________________________ 19
Parameterisation____________________________________________________________________ 21
General information__________________________________________________________________ 23
Notes for installation and operation______________________________________________________ 24
Cylindrical form ________________________________________________________________________ 27
Series -12GM ______________________________________________________________________ 27
Series -18GK and -18GM _____________________________________________________________ 33
Series -30GM ______________________________________________________________________ 65
Block type ____________________________________________________________________________ 99
Series VariKont ___________________________________________________________________ 99
Series -FP________________________________________________________________________ 115
Series -F12 _______________________________________________________________________ 129
Series -F42 _______________________________________________________________________ 133
Series -F43 _______________________________________________________________________ 155
Series -F54 _______________________________________________________________________ 161
Series -F64 _______________________________________________________________________ 171
Series -D1________________________________________________________________________ 175
Series -LUC_______________________________________________________________________ 181
Sensors for double-sheet monitoring _____________________________________________________ 185
Evaluation units and power supplies _____________________________________________________ 201
UH3 ____________________________________________________________________________ 202
DA5... ___________________________________________________________________________ 208
WE77.. __________________________________________________________________________ 212
KFA6... __________________________________________________________________________ 214
Accessories _________________________________________________________________________ 217
Mating connectors _________________________________________________________________ 218
Mounting aids _____________________________________________________________________ 223
Programming units UB-PROG 2/UB PROG 3_____________________________________________ 233
Service software ULTRA 2001 ________________________________________________________ 234
Additional information _________________________________________________________________ 236
Standards ________________________________________________________________________ 236
Resistance of our housing materials to chemical substances_________________________________ 237
Protective enclosures _______________________________________________________________ 239
Glossary _________________________________________________________________________ 240
Alphabetical type index ________________________________________________________________ 244
1 3.09.20 05
Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH worldwide ________________________________________________________ 246

Notes _______________________________________________________________________________ 254
Da te o f issu e
Subject to reasonable modifications due to technical advances. Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs, Printed in Germany
6 Pepperl+Fuchs Group Tel.: Germany +49 621 776-0 USA +1 330 4253555 Singapore +65 67799091 Internet http://www.pepperl-fuchs.com
Type code
Type code (without series LUC...)*
U Ultrasonic sensor
Design
B Basic series
BE Basic series through-beam sensors
C Advanced series
CC Advanced series, chemical-resistant sensors
J Initiator
DB Double sheet control (DBL: for label detection, DBK: splice detection)
Upper limit of sensing range
300 300 mm (example)
6000 6000 mm (example)
Type of housing
12 cylindrical housing, diameter 12 mm
U square housing VariKont (U1, U9)
FP square housing FP (FP1, FP...P1, FP...P5)
F42 square housing F42
Threaded bushing (cylindrical type only)
with specification of length in mm (example: GM75, length = 75 mm)
GM Metal
GK Plastic
Electrical output
E0 1 x 3-wire, npn switching output, normally open
E2 1 x 3-wire, pnp switching output, normally open
E4 1 x 3-wire, npn switching output, normally open/normally closed
E5 1 x 3-wire, pnp switching output, normally open/normally closed
A2 2 x 3-wire, pnp switching output, antivalent
H1 for external evaluation, transmitter
H2 for external evaluation, receiver
H3 for external evaluation, transmitter/receiver
I Analogue output, 4 mA ... 20 mA
U Analogue output, 0/2 V ... 10 V
IU Analogue output 4 mA ... 20 mA + 0/ V2 ... 10 V or load-controlled
IUE2 Analogue output, load-controlled I/U and 1 switching output E2
IUE0 Analogue output, load-controlled I/U and 1 switching output E0
8B 8 bit data output, parallel
K Relay output (2K = 2 relay outputs)
R2 (RS) RS 232 interface (old designation)
Design (optional)
K Transducer separate from evaluation unit
for use in restricted spaces
Connections
- cable version
V1 plug connector, 4-pin, M12 x 1
V7 plug connector, 7-pin, PG13,5
V95 plug connector, 5 pin, M18 x 1,5
1 3.09.20 05
U - - - -
Da te o f issu e
* The type codes for the LUC series can be found on page 181.
Pepperl+Fuchs Group Tel.: Germany +49 621 776-0 USA +1 330 4253555 Singapore +65 67799091 Internet http://www.pepperl-fuchs.com 7
Overview
Selection table
Connec-
Output tion
bersicht
Klemmen
Push-pull
Stecker
Analog
Detection
Relais
Kabel
NPN
PNP
range
(max.)
Sensors for separate

evaluation units
Object
Series -30GM 6000 mm
Series VariKont
3000 mm
Ul ce
ni
c Series -FP 6000 mm
tra iv e
re
so
so r
tra tte r Series -F54 2000 mm

ni
l
c
U m i
e
Switch
output
Through beam sensors

Ultrasonic Ultrasonic Switch
emitter receiver output
Series -18GK 500 mm
Series -18GM40 1000 mm
Object
Series VariKont 6000 mm

Series -F64 1500 mm
Detection and reflection

sensors
Ultrasonic
emitter

Object
Switch Ultrasonic
Series -12GM 400 mm
output receiver Series -18GM40 300 mm
Series -18GM75 1000 mm
Ultrasonic
emitter
Series VariKont 3000 mm
Fixed reflector
Switch Ultrasonic Series -FP 6000 mm

output receiver
Series -F12 800 mm
Series -F42 4000 mm
Series -F43 2000 mm
Series -F54 2000 mm
Object
Series -D1 550 mm

Series -LUC 4000 mm
Double sheet monitoring
Ultrasonic Ultrasonic Switch
emitter receiver output
Series UD C-18GM 60 mm
Series UD B-18GM 80 mm
Object
Control / evaluation units
UH3-KHD2-4E5
UH3-KHD2-4I
UH3-T1-KT
DA5-IU...
Da te o f ed ition 0 8/18/20 05
1) on request
2) 10 ... 30 V DC without function of the current output
3) 10 ... 252 V DC / 20 ... 252 V AC
4) DC-Types: 10 ... 30 V DC,
DC/AC-Types: 20 ... 253 V DC
15 ... 253 V AC
5) only DC-T ypes
Overview
Supply voltage range
Pulse prolongation
adjustable sound
Parameterisation
Synchronisation
selectable m ode
Timer-function/
Error indicator
angled head
Page
TEACH-IN/
lobe width
N.C./N.O./
interface
interface
Window
Parallel
(8 Bit)
Ser ial
input
10 ... 30 V DC 65
10 ... 30 V DC 99
10 ... 60 V DC 115
10 ... 30 V DC 161
18 ... 30 V DC 33
10 ... 30 V DC 1) 33
18 ... 30 V DC 65
20 ... 30 V DC 99
7,5 ... 30 V DC 171
10 ... 30 V DC 27
10 ... 30 V DC ! 33
18 ... 30 V DC !1) ! 33
10 ... 30 V DC 65
15 ... 30 V DC 99
15 ... 30 V DC 115
10 ... 30 V DC ! ! 129
D C/AC 4) 5) ! 133
15 ... 30 V DC 2) 155
10 ... 30 V DC 161
D C/AC 3) 175
10 ... 30 V DC 181
20 ... 30 V DC 185
24 V DC 185
20 ... 30 V DC 201
20 ... 30 V DC 201
20 ... 30 V DC 201
10 ... 30 V DC 201
90 ... 260 V AC
1) on request
2) 10 ... 30 V DC without function of the current output
3) 10 ... 252 V DC / 20 ... 252 V AC
4) DC -Types: 10 ... 30 V DC,
DC /AC-Types: 20 ... 253 V DC
15 ... 253 V AC
5) only DC-Types
Operating principles and technology of ultrasonic sensors
Operating principles and technology of The active range of the ultrasonic sensor is referred to as the
sensing range sd. This range is bounded by the lowest and
ultrasonic sensors highest sensing distances, whose values depend on the char-
Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors operate with a piezoelectric acteristics of the transducer. The highest sensing distance is
transducer as the sound emitter and receiver. A patented de- given in the type code.
coupling layer in special material is used to decouple the ultra-
The ultrasonic sensor detects objects within its sensing range,
sonics to the air - an acoustically thin medium.
regardless of whether these objects approach the sensor axi-
This ultrasonic transducer is embedded, watertight, into the ally or move through the sound cone laterally.
sensor housing, in polyurethane foam.
.
Ultrasonic sensors are available with switching outputs and/or
analogue outputs, various output functions are available ac-
cording to type.
unusable
area sensing range sd
Transducer object
Decoupling
aperture angle
layer
Integral skin foam

Piezoceramic
The transducer transmits a packet of sonic pulses and con- S

verts the echo pulse into a voltage. The integrated controller
computes the distance from the echo time and the velocity of minimum actual maximum
switching switching distance switching
sound. The transmitted pulse duration t and the decay time distance distance
of the sonic transducer result in an unusable area in which the switching interval
ultrasonic sensor cannot detect an object. The ultrasonic fre- or
quency lies between 65 kHz and 400 kHz, depending on the measuring interval
sensor type; the pulse repetition frequency is between 14 Hz switching distance 1 switching distance 2
and 140 Hz. or or
lower limit upper limit
U
The ultrasonic beam has an opening angle of around 5. The

sound pressure level outside of this cone is less than half
Emitter pulse (-6 dB) that of the value on the sensor axis.
The opening angle defines the spatially dimension of the

sound cone. The diameter of the sound cone D for a certain
distance from the sensor S can be calculated by
Echo
t0 t1 D = 2 tan S
t
in a good approach.
In the formula obove, only the angle between the curve
and the centre-line (0) has to be inserted (half opening
angle).
For a simple evaluation of the sound cone diameter D, you can

use the list below, which shows the tan-values for angles be-
tween = 2 and = 20 in 2 intervals.
Attenuation
t time angle tan angle tan
2 0.035 12 0.213
Echo propagation time 2 4 0.07 14 0.249
6 0.105 16 0.287
8 0.141 18 0.325
10 0.176 20 0.364
Operating principles and technology of ultrasonic sensors
The figure shows the response ranges of typical objects, rath- heat is that the sensor has an additional temperature error of
er than the intensity distribution of the ultrasonic beam. Within 2 % in the heating phase from 0.5 h ... 1 h.
these ranges, the sensor detects the specified object A or B.
As a result of the lag of the internal temperature sensor in re-
Example: UC6000-FP... flecting the true current temperature, greater short-term fluctu-
ations may occur than are specified on the data sheet due to
a sudden change in the ambient temperature.
Max. object offset [m]
2 The relationships between the range of ultrasonic sensors and
the air temperature, as well as that between the range and the
1.5
B A relative humidity are shown in the following charts. The rela-
1 tionships shown here apply to sensors of the UC4000-30GM...
0.5 and UC500-30GM... series, but with regard to the specific
0
sensing range, apply in principle to all ultrasonic sensors.
0.5 Range [m] Relative humidity

1 14
1.5 12
2 0%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10
5%
Distance [m]
8
20 %
60 %
6
Where A = flat plate, 100mm x 100 mm 100 %
B = round rod, diameter 25 mm 4
The details given in the type code relate to a flat standard
2
plate, 100 mm x 100 mm. This plate must be placed at right an-
gles to the axis of the beam. The packet of sound pulses is re- 0
flected away if the object is inclined to this axis and -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
consequently the echo does not reach the sensor. Temperature [C]
Due to the physical properties of sound propagation, the de-

Range [m] Relative humidity
cay (range) and velocity of the ultrasonic beam is dependent 1,0
on the:
- Air temperature 0,8

0%
- Relative humidity 5%
- Barometric pressure 20 %
0,6
60 %
100 %
The following chart shows the theoretical relationship between
the air temperature and pressure and the velocity of sound. 0,4
Sonic speed [m/s] Pressure [hPa]

0,2
370 1060
1013
960
360 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature [C]
350
The substantially increased sensor range at low temperatures

340
is apparent, virtually independent of the relative humidity. The
reduction in range at high temperatures, however, is subject to
330
a strong influence by the relative humidity.
320
The sensing ranges stated in the data sheets for our ultra-
sonic sensors are based on an ambient temperature of
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 +20 C and a relative humidity of 50 %.
Temperature [C]
As the signal echo time is evaluated in our ultrasonic sensors,

most sensors are temperature-compensated. This eliminates
most temperature effects on the sensor output.
This temperature compensation is performed by an electrical

temperature sensor that is integrated into the sensor.
The sensor gives off a certain intrinsic heat that depends on

the operating mode and the design. The result of this intrinsic
Sensor principle
Selecting the correct sensor Ultrasonic sensors for double-sheet monitoring are suitable for
distinguishing between:
The range of ultrasonic sensor products is a large one due to
their wide range of deployment. Important selection criteria are - no sheet, a single sheet, a double sheet.
described in detail on the next five pages to assist you in se- - Base material
lecting the correct sensor type for your specific applications: - Base material with labels
1. Sensor principle Ultrasonic double-sheet monitoring is deployed in all situa-

2. Output functions tions in which the automatic, high-speed distinction between
3. Series base material, labels, single and double sheets is required in
4. Electrical connections order to protect machines or avoid waste production.
5. Parameterisation A complete system consists of an ultrasonic emitter, an ultra-
sonic receiver and an evaluation unit. These units have been
optimally tuned to one another at the factory and may not be
1. Sensor principle used separately.
The principle by which ultrasonic sensors yield measurements
is that of evaluating the time taken for the sound to travel be- Properties:
tween transmission and reception (direct detection), or a pro- - The sensing range covers 10 g/m paper to 2000 g/m carton.
cess of checking whether the transmitted signal has been - Thin plastic or metal foils can also be detected.
received (detection by beam interruption). The following dis- - TEACH-IN of various materials
tinctions are made between types of sensor function: - Suitable for use with glossy or transparent materials
- Automatic adaptation of the operation point to slow changes
Detection by beam interruption in ambient conditions
- Very high processing speed
- Insensitive to dust and dirt
Through-beam sensor
The emitter and receiver are mounted facing each other. If the Reflex sensor mode
ultrasonic beam is broken by an object, then the switch output
The emitter and receiver are mounted in the same housing.
becomes active.
The ultrasonic beam is reflected back to the receiver by a fixed
reflector plate. Objects entering the sensing range are detect-
ed by:
- changes to the measured distances

- lack of signal from the reflector due to absorption or diffuse
reflection
Properties:
- High range, as the ultrasonic beam only travels the signal
distance once.
- Less susceptible to interference, thus suitable for difficult op-
erating conditions.
- Greater installation complexity, as two separate units must
be wired.
Double-sheet monitoring
Properties:
Double-sheet monitoring is a special application involving - Only one measuring head
through-beam sensors designed especially for this purpose. - High detection reliability of problematic objects (sound-ab-
This application originated in the printing industry and uses an sorbent objects or objects with angled surfaces)
ultrasonic beam to monitor the thickness of paper or foils. - Less susceptible to interference, thus suitable for difficult op-
erating conditions.
Sensor principle
Direct detection Analogue distance measurement
Reflection sensor The time of travel of the sound pulse is the means of measur-
ing the distance of the object. The sensors operate in direct
The emitter and receiver are mounted in the same housing (re- detection mode and have various analogue outputs, depend-
flection sensor). ing on the type:
The object acts as a sound reflector.
- Analogue voltage output: 0 V ...10 V
- Analogue current output: 4 mA ... 20 mA
- 8-bit parallel output
- Serial output, RS 232
Absolute: distance as a series of digits in [mm]
Relative: type ...RS: three-digit sequence (0 ... 254)
type ...R2: four-digit sequence (0 ... 4095)
An arbitrary measuring window can be set within the near and

far evaluation limits (lower/upper limit) of the sensor. The rela-
Properties: tive data determines the position of the object in the measuring
- The sensing range depends on the reflectance of the object, window.
i.e. the surface properties and the angle of incidence. Within
limits, these influences can be compensated by adjusting the
sensitivity. Absolute Analogue output
- Simple installation, as the sensor consists of a single unit. Distance [mA] [V] [digit] [Mz]
- Sensitive with regard to changes in the reflection properties
of objects Absolute
Relative
Reflection sensor with twin-head 4 ... 20 mA / 0 ... 10 V
0 ... 4095 digit
Emitter and receiver are separate, the axes of the emitter and
Machine cycles
receiver transducers intersect each other (reflex/direct detec-

tion). The use of separate units for the emitter and receiver re-
duces the unusable area considerably, as this arrangement is
not subject to delays while waiting for oscillations of the emitter
Relative
to die out. Range selected via
DIP switches or
commands NDE, FDE
Sensing range according to data sheet
0 300 3000
Unusable A1 or A2 or Object
area Lower limit Upper limit distance [mm]
Properties:
- It is possible to detect very small objects.
- Three-dimensional sensing range
- Insensitive with regard to unwanted reflections from objects
outside the sensing range (background suppression)
Output functions
2. Output functions Large Inclined

Sensor object object
Reference-
Switching output Small reflector
object
Presence of object E
Switching distance mode
Normally open,
On sensors with two independent switch points, each output n.o. Absence of object
becomes active when the object passes the related switch Unusable area A1
point A1, A2. These switch points can be arbitrarily taught-in
to the sensing range.
Reflex sensor mode is possible with each of our ul-

trasonic sensors, which support the window mode.
Normally open, Therefore by means of the switch points A1 and A2
n.o. Switching hysteresis Note a small window area is defined. Inside this area, the
and fixed reference reflector must be placed. An object
Normally closed, outside of this defined window will cause reliably an output sta-
n. c. tus change, independent of its reflection properties. The wis-
Unusable area A1 Object distance hed output function (normally open/normally closed) can be
set, when adjusting a window operation in the opposite output
function.
Window mode
Example: to detect an object with normally open output func-
In window mode the ultrasonic sensor changes its output state tion, a window mode with normally closed output function has
when the first detected echo, and thus the object, is within the to be set.
switching window. The window limits A1 and A2 can be taught-
in as required. If multiple echoes arrive at different times and Double switching point mode (hysteresis mode)
one of these is before A1, the output will not switch, even if a
later echo is within the switching window. The sensor only The ultrasonic sensor maintains its previous switching state in
evaluates the first echo detected. Multiple echoes thus cannot the selected area of the evaluation window. The output switch-
be evaluated. es when the object approaches the near switching point A1. It
then does not switch back until the object passes the far
switching point A2. The two switching points form a large
range hysteresis.
Double switching point mode can be used in many applica-
Switching hysteresis tions (such as monitoring filling levels to perform tasks with a
Normally open, single output that would otherwise require two outputs in nor-
n.o. mal switching-distance mode.
Unusable area A1 A2 Object distance
With our ultrasonic sensors, which support the window mode,

the reflex sensor mode can be realised in an easy way (see re- Normally open,
flex sensor mode). n.o.
Reflex sensor mode

Unusable area A1 A2 Object distance
The output of the ultrasonic sensor switches in the following
cases:
Area monitoring
- The sensor receives an echo from a small object in the sound
The ultrasonic sensor monitors the evaluation window. The
cone and from the reference reflector.
output switches only if an object is detected in the window.
- The sensor detects a large object and no longer receives the
Echoes other than those from the evaluation window are ig-
echo from the reference reflector.
nored by the sensor software. Thanks to this active masking of
- The sensor does not receive an echo, for example in the
the foreground in the area monitoring mode, echoes from are-
event that an object is positioned at an angle that reflects the
as outside of the switching window (foreground) do not cause
sound away.
interference.
The position of the reference reflector may not be changed.
The set or taught-in switching distance A1 must be shorter
than the distance to the reflector by the distance E .
Example: Normally open,

n.o.
UC3000... E > 2 % of 3000 mm = 60 mm Unusable area A1 A2 Object distance
UC6000... E > 2 % of 6000 mm = 120 mm
The area monitoring mode is supported by our UC... sensors.
Output functions
npn/pnp output Digital, parallel
The outputs of the ultrasonic sensors can be realised in npn or The distance is issued in the form of an 8-bit data word in par-
in pnp technology. The sensors in this catalogue are mainly allel on three lines.
pnp types. In this case the load is connected to -L, at the
switching output of the sensor +L is connected to the load. Digital, serial
These ultrasonic sensors can be parameterised via a bi-direc-

L+ L+
tional RS 232 interface, or issue the measured distance in se-
rial form.
Load
Outputs:
Load
- Absolute/relative distance in 8- or 12-bit resolution
- Switching states
L- L-
- Object in measuring window (A1, A2 or NDE* , FDE *)
- Object in sensing range
pnp npn - etc.
* NDE = Near Distance of Evaluation

Relay output
FDE = Far Distance of Evaluation
A number of ultrasonic sensors feature relay outputs. Please
Parameterisation
refer to the individual data sheets for the maximum switching
loads and electrical design of the sensors. Information related - Switching distances A1, A2
to the mechanical service life refers to the number of switching - Measuring window (NDE, FDE)
actions of the relay contacts in a no-load condition. This value - Rising/falling ramp of analogue output
can also be reached with low electrical contact loads. At the - Normally open/normally closed function
rated load for the electrical contacts, the service life is reduced - Filter (for adaptation to application)
to the value indicated for the electrical service life. The life time - etc.
data stated are MTBF values.
The parameterisation can be performed with the Ultra 2001
Analogue output: 4 mA ... 20 mA/0 V ... 10 V service program or a terminal program and individual com-
mands. A list of valid commands is contained in the individual
This issues a current/voltage signal proportional to the dis- sensor data sheets.
tance. The limits of the analogue measuring window can be
parameterised as required within the sensing range. Depend- Digital, serial/parallel
ing on the type, this can be realised by:
These ultrasonic sensor function in the same way as those
- TEACH-IN with programming wire or programming plug with the serial interface, but also feature an 8-bit parallel out-
- DIP switch put for the measured distance. The parallel interface is param-
- RS 232 interface eterisable via RS 232 using the Ultra 2001 application.
- Two potentiometers
External evaluation
On these sensors an external synchronising pulse triggers the

measuring cycle. The sensor transmits the ultrasonic pulse
and, on receipt of the time-delayed echo, outputs a voltage
pulse. The echo time evaluation is performed by the evalua-
tion unit.
The following evaluation units are available:
- UH3-KHD2-4I (4 analogue outputs)

- UH3-KHD2-4E5 (4 switching outputs)
- UH3-T1-KT (1 relay output)
With the types UH3-KHD2..., 4 sensors can be used in syn-

chronous or multiplex mode, thus permitting special applica-
tions such as the spatial detection of objects, increased
sound-cone coverage, and multiple measuring ranges.
The type UH3-T1-KT features a clock-pulse output and 3 sig-
nal inputs. It has a relay output with adjustable pick-up and re-
lease delay.
Power is also supplied to the connected sensors by the evalu-

ation unit.
Series
3. Types/housing shapes Design: 30GM... -K-...
Cylindrical form
Design: 12GM...
18GK...
18GM40... / 18GM40A...
18GM75...
30GM...
Properties:
- Sensor head and evaluation unit are separate. The unit can
therefore be installed in tight spaces.
- Material: Stainless steel.
Thread: M30 x 1.5 (amplifier electronics)
M18 x 1 or M30 x 1,5 (transducer head).
- Active area on the axial face
- Installation: In an existing threaded hole or using
Pepperl+Fuchs mounting aids (see Accessories section)
Design: LUC...
Properties:
- Material: Plastic, nickel-plated brass or stainless steel.
Thread: M12 x 1, M18 x 1 or M30 x 1.5
(18GM40 and 18GM75 also available with angled head)
Pepperl+Fuchs mounting aids (see Accessories section) Properties:
- Material: PBT.
Thread: G1A and 1 NPT in stainless steel or
polypropylene
Design: UC...-30GM... -T-... - Active area on the axial face
- Installation: In existing threaded flange
- Teflon-coated ultrasonic sensor for deployment in chemically
aggressive environments
Design: D1
The D1 type was designed specifically for single-hole mount-

ing in container lids to monitor fill levels. The display and oper-
ating elements are located under the transparent,
permanently attached screw cap.
Properties:
- Material: Plastic, stainless steel.
Thread: M30 x 1,5
- Best suitable for low-temperature applications
Pepperl+Fuchs mounting aids (see Accessories section)
Properties:
- Material (housing): Plastic
- Material (flange): Stainless steel
- Single-hole mounting
- Simple parameterisation via DIP switch

- Large operating voltage range
Series
Cuboid shaped types
VariKont (Designation: U1 and U9) Design: F12
The VariKont housing was developed by Pepperl+Fuchs

and has been proven in millions of applications. It is extremely
flexible due to the adjustability of the head (i.e. the active sec-
tion) in five directions without changes to the mounting of the
sensor. The electronics section can be replaced independent-
ly of the base of the sensor. Changing the wiring or adjustment
is therefore not required.
Properties:
- Robust housing, waterproof and nonbreakable
Material: dy cast zinc, nickel plated, PC, PBT
- Active area on the front face
- Multiple installation possibilities by means of slotted hole and
dove tail mount
Properties: - Best visible indicator LEDs at the front and at the rear side
- Material: PBT
- Active section is adjustable in 5 directions without affecting Connection via 90 turnable connector, M12 x 1
the mounting of the sensor.
- The electronic section can be replaced without changes to
the base of the sensor. The wiring and adjustment remain Design: F42
unaffected.
- Connection through terminal compartment
- Standardised mounting hole pattern as in mechanical roller-
lever limit switches (compliant with EN 60947)
Design: FP
Properties:
- Material: PBT
- Direct surface-installation without additional mounting
bracket
- Easy programming via built in keypad. No external program-
ming tool required
Properties: - LEDs for status indication and for user support through nu-
- Material: PBT merously programming routines
- Active area at right angle to mounting surface - Top-looker und side-looker designs availlable for ideal
- The electronic section can be replaced without changes to matching to the local conditions
the base of the sensor. The wiring and adjustment remain - DC-versions with semiconductor switching outputs or ana-
unaffected. logue outputs
- Connection through terminal compartment - AC/DC-versions with wide volage supply range and relay
output
Electrical connections
Design: F43 Double-sheet monitoring
The ultrasonic double-sheet monitor is a measuring system

consisting of a cylindrical ultrasonic emitter unit and a receiver
unit with built in evaluation electronics in M18 threaded bushes
or cylindrical ultrasonic emitter and receiver units (M18) with a
separate cubical evaluation unit.
Properties:
- Material: PBT
- Direct surface mounting without additional mounting angles
- LEDs on the plug side
- No unusable area in the twin-head version
Design: F54
Properties:
- Material (evaluation unit, only UDB... devices): Makrolon
(UDC... devices dont have a separate evaluation unit)
- Material (sensor heads): Nickel-plated brass
- Non-contact distinction between single and double sheets
- Short response times to 1 ms
- Insensitive to dust and dirt
- Paper weights between 10 g and ca. 2000 g detectable
- Installation: In existing threaded holes or using the special
fork-mounting aid MH-UDB01 (see Accessories section)
Properties:
- Cubical housing, material: PBT Applications:
- Direct surface mounting without additional mounting angles The ultrasonic double-sheet monitor is deployed in all situa-
tions in which the automatic distinction between single and
double sheets is required in order to protect machines or avoid
Design: F64 waste production.
Typical applications include:

- deployment in printing machines
- monitoring of bonding sheets in labeling machines
- deployment in letter-opening machines
- deployment in document counters
- deployment in packaging machines
- the detection of air, single and double sheets in paper
processing machines.
Properties:
- Through-beam ultrasonic barrier
- Cubical housing, material: PA
- Direct surface mounting without additional mounting angles
Electrical connections
4. Electrical connections Three different connection types are used on Pepperl+Fuchs

ultrasonic sensors:
Direct voltage sensors, 3-wire (Type E)
Cable connection - The lengths, wire diameters and cable
3-wire sensors have separate connections for the power sup- materials are stated in the individual data sheets. Sensors with
ply and load. The load can be switched to positive (pnp) or cable connections do not have a supplementary designation in
negative (npn). the type code.
They are protected against overload, short circuit and reversal
Terminal compartment - The VariKont (U1 or U9) and FP
of polarity. The residual current is negligible.
types are equipped with a terminal compartment. The maxi-
mum diameter of the cable or cross section of the wires is stat-
Sensors with analogue output
ed in the data sheet.
are direct-voltage sensors that provide an output signal pro-
Plug - The type of plug is stated under V... in the type code
portional to the measured value. They also have separate con-
(see illustration).
nections for the power supply and load.
The output signal is in the 0/4 mA ... 20 mA (current output) or Plug connector -V1 Plug connector -V15
0/2 V ... 10V (voltage output) range. (Circular connection M12) (Circular connection M12)
Additionally, they can feature switching or control outputs and
1 1
are protected against overload, short circuit and reversal of
polarity.
4 2 4 2
Sensors with external evaluation
5
3 3
are direct voltage sensors with a clock pulse input that issue a
pulse for the echo time at a separate output connection. The Colour assignments of ready-to-
Plug connector -V3
time at which the echo pulse is output is proportional to the (Circular connection M8)
use mating connectors, V1, V15,
echo time. A separate back-end unit is required for these sen- V3:
sors (see data section). Pin Colour Abbrev.
4 1 Brown BN
Sensors with serial interface 2 White WH
3 1
3 Blue BU
are direct voltage sensors that feature connections for an RS 4 Black BK
232 interface in addition to the supply connections. This inter- 5 Grey GY
face can be used for parameterisation, as well as to read out
the sensor. Additional analogue or switching outputs may also Plug connector -V17 Plug connector -V7
(circular connector M12x1) (circular connector PG 13,5)
be present.
3 6
4 1
2 5
Sensors with parallel interface
5
are direct voltage sensors that feature connections for the par- 8
allel output of the measured distance in addition to the supply 6
1
2
4
7 3
connections. They can also feature control inputs, outputs, or
a serial interface. Due to the large number of connections,
these sensors are available with cable connections only. Colour assignments of ready- Recommended colour assign-
to-use mating connectors, V17: ments mating connectors V7:
Pin Colour Abbrev. Pin Colour Abbrev.
1 White WH 1 White WH
2 Brown BN 2 Brown BN
3 Green GN 3 Green GN
4 Yellow YW 4 Yellow YW
5 Grey GY 5 Grey GY
6 Pink PK 6 Pink PK
7 Blue BU 7 Blue BU
8 None (shielding)
Connector V95 Recommended colour assign-
(7/8-16 UN 2A) ments mating connectors V95:
Pin Colour Abbrev.
1 Black BK
1 5
2 Blue BU
3 Green/ GN/YE
2 4 Yellow
4 Brown BN
3 5 White WH
Parameterisation
Overview of electrical connections
Typical electrical data Type Switching output/Remarks Standard symbol (selection)

3-wire E0 NPN Nor mally open NO
Standard symbol/Connections:
Rated operating voltage E1 NPN Nor mally closed NC* (version E0, npn)
10 V ... 30 V DC E01 NPN E0 + E1* 1 + UB
4
E4 NPN Nor mally closed NC/ U 2
Switch output
Teaching input
Output 100 mA/200 mA Nor mally open NO 5
Sync. input
(switchable)* 3
- UB
E7 NPN 2 x E4*
E2 PNP Nor mally open NO

E3 PNP Nor mally closed NC* (version E2, pnp)
E23 PNP E2 + E3 1 + UB
2
E5 PNP Nor mally closed NC/ U
Teaching input
5 Sync. input
Nor mally open NO 4
Switch output
(switchable)* 3 - UB
E6 PNP 2 x E5*
Analogue IU Sensor for

Standard symbol/Connection:
Rated operating voltage distance measurement (version IU)
10 V ... 30 V DC with analogue output 1 (BN)
+ UB
U 4 (BK)
4-20 mA
Output 4 mA ... 20 mA 2 (WH)
0-10 V
3 (BU)
Output 0 V ... 10 V - UB
Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2.
Serial R2 Communication-enabled,
Rated operating voltage parameterisable sensor (Version E6, pnp)
10 V ... 30 V DC with RS 232 interface 1 + UB
5
Sync. Input
U 2
Old designation 4
Output 1, TD
Output 2, RD
(RS) 3 - UB
Parallel 8B Communication-enabled,
Rated operating voltage parameterisable sensor Transceiver (parallel interface)
20 V ... 30 V DC with 8-bit parallel output UB
+
A1 - A8 8-bit-output
A9 Error output
UB
-
E1 Test input
TD Transmit - Data
RD Receiver - Data
External evaluation H1 Emitter*

Rated operating voltage H2 Receiver*
10 V ... 30 V DC H3 Emitter/receiver 1
+ UB
5
U Temp. output
2
Clock
4
Echo
3
- UB
Note: The standard symbols shown here are examples. The types marked with * are not shown.
Parameterisation
5. Parameterisation Example 2: UB1000+FP1+E6

(sensor with 2 switching outputs or
Switching distances A1 and A2 or the lower and upper limits of 1 switching output and switching window)
the measuring window of ultrasonic sensors in direct-detection
mode can be parameterised in a variety of ways depending on S10 Operating behaviour
their type.
Coding switch in terminal compartment

Output 1
The near and far switching distances (A1 or A2) are set in 0
steps using 4 DIP switches each. The step size of the adjust- Output 2
able switching distances is determined by the sensor software.
For the sensor in the following example, the switch combina-
tions 0000 ... 1000 correspond to 150 mm and for
1001 ... 1111 to 200 mm. Output 1
Different steps may apply to other sensors with coding switch- S1 ... S8 (window)
es (see the technical data for the relevant sensor type). 1
The following types are equipped with coding switches in ter- Output 2
minal compartment: A1 A2
- UC500+U9+E6/E7+R2, UC500+U9+IUE2/IUE0+R2
- UC3000+U9+E6/E7+R2, UC3000+U9+IUE2/IUE0+R2 Switch S1 ... S8: adjustment of the switching range
- UB1000+FP1+E6 (200 mm ... 1000 mm)
- UC6000-FP-E6/E7-R2-P5, UC6000-FP-IUE2/IUE0-R2-P5 Switch S9: (0) normally closed/(1) normally open
Switch S10: (0) two independent switching points
Example 1: UC3000+U9+E6+R2
(1) measuring window
(sensor with 2 switching outputs
or RS 232 interface)
Programming plug
Switching mode
NO The following ultrasonic sensors are equipped with a program-
ON ming plug with an integrated temperature probe. The plug can
be connected in four different positions:
OFF S1 S8 S9 S10 UC300 A2
NC UC500 E6
RS 232 mode UC1000 E6R2
V1 A1 E2/E3
UCC1000 30GM E7R2 (K)
V15
UC2000 IU
Near Far UC4000 IUR2 T
UC6000 Coded plug
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 A1/mm A2/mm
G5P
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 300 400 G5S
LUC4T IU V15
N5P
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 450 550 N5S
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 600 700 The switching distances A1 and A2 of the evaluation (E2/E3),

... ...
or the lower and upper limits of the measuring window are set
using TEACH-IN.
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1050 2400
... ... Position Function
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2900 3000 A1 Distance A1 is taught (switching distance or meas-

uring window limit)
(1 = ON, 0 = OFF)
A2 Distance A2 is taught (switching distance or meas-
uring window limit)
Switch output 1
E2/E3 E2: individual switching distances/falling analogue
Sensor A1 ramp
E3: window/rising analogue ramp
Switch output 2 T Temperature compensation is activated

A2
The state is stored when the plug is removed. The taught-in

(S9 = ON, normally open) switching distances and functions are retained when power is
switched off.
General information
Switching outputs: types ...-E6R2/E7R2

g A window function or a normally closed/normally open function
can be set for sensors with switching outputs depending on
1. Switch point mode the order in which buttons A1 and A2 are pressed. The evalu-
When A1 < A2, both switch outputs are activated as
N.O. contacts. ation range and the mode of operation of the analogue output
can be set for sensors with analogue output.
Switch point 1 Switch point 2
A 1 (N.O.) Switching output: types ...E01/E02
Switch output 1
Switch output 1
A 2 (N.O.) (N.O.) Object range
Switch output 2
Switch output 2
When A1 > A2, both switch outputs are activated as (N.C.)
N.C. contacts.
A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1 Switch point 1 -> : Switch output 1, (N.O.)
Detection of object presence
A2 (N.C.) Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.C.)
Switch output 2 Detection of object presence
2. Window mode
To exchange the switching distances is of no effect. Switching output: types ...E4/E5
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1 1. Window mode, normally open function
A1 < A2: object range
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2 A1 A2
3. Hysteresis mode 2. Window mode, normally closed function
To exchange the switching distances is of no effect. A2 < A1:
A 1 (N.O.) A2 A1
Switch output 1
3. One switch point, normally open function
A2 (N.C.) A1 -> :
Switch output 2
A2
Analogue output: types ...-IU and ...-IUR2 4. One switch point, normally closed function
A2 -> :
Near distance Far distance
of evaluation of evaluation A1
20 mA/10 V 5. A1 -> , A2 -> : Detection of object presence
1) Object detected: Switch output closed
4 mA/ No object detected: Switch output open
0V
20 mA/
Switching output: types ...E6/E7
10 V
2) 1. Switch point 1 Switch point 2
Switch output 1
4 mA/0 V (N.O.) object range
20 mA/10 V
3) 4 mA/ Switch output 2
0V (N.O.)
2. Switch point 2 Switch point 1

A1= 0 mm A2 Switch output 2
(N.C.)
object range
Programming units UB-PROG 2/UB-PROG 3 Switch output 1
(N.C.)
Ultrasonic sensor of the types:
3.
E01 Switch point 1 -> : Switch output 1, (N.C.)
E23 Detection of object presence
UB500 E4 Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.O.)
18GM75 Detection of object presence
UB2000 E5
30GM V15 Switch point 1 a. 2 -> : Both switch outputs, (N.O.)
UB4000 E6 Detection of object presence
F54
UB6000 E7
I
U
permit the UB-PROG 2/UB-PROG 3 programming units to be

inserted into the supply circuit. This permits the switching dis-
tances A1 and A2 or the evaluation limits to be programmed in
an elegant manner (TEACH-IN). Each switching point/each
evaluation limit has its own button.
Notes for installation and operation
Ultra 2001 PC service program 6. General information

(RS 232, bi-directional interface)
Resolution
The Ultra 2001 application can be used to parameterise, and
read out the parameters and measured values, of ultrasonic Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors of the UC... series are
sensors with the designation ...R2 (RS) in their type code. equipped with an integrated 12-bit DA converter. A resolution
The sensors must be connected to a PC/notebook using the of 12 bits corresponds to 4096 steps. The echo time of an ul-
supplied interface cable. trasonic packet is determined with a resolution of 1 s (sen-
Ultra 2001 is running with WINDOWS 32-Bit systems sors without an RS 232 interface) or 1.085 s (sensors with an
(WINDOWS 95 and higher) and features a modern user in- RS 232 interface) due to the clocking of the microcontroller.
terface. The operation of the program is mouse-based. This corresponds to a physical resolution of 0.172 mm or
0.186 mm. This maximum sensor resolution is available if the
measuring window (the range between A1 and A2 or between
the lower and upper limits) is less than or equal to
4096 x 0.172 mm = 705 mm

or
4096 x 0.186 mm = 762 mm
Up to this window size, the resolution is solely dependent on

the clock rate of the microcontroller. The DA converter controls
the sensor resolution if a larger measuring window is selected.
It can then be calculated using the following formula:
(A2 - A1) / 4096

or
(upper limit - lower limit) / 4096
Example:
UC-F43-R2 programming adapter
A UC4000-30GM-IUR2-V1 sensor has been set up with the
The UC-F43-R2 programming adapter is designed to be in- following parameters:
serted between sensors of the -F43- series and the supply
lead. A 9-pin cable socket with 1 m of cable permit the sensor Upper limit: 3500 mm
to be connected to the RS 232 interface of a PC with ease. Lower limit: 800 mm
The usual wiring requirements become superfluous with the
In this application, the physical resolution of the sensor
use of the programming adapter.
amounts to
The PC service program Ultra 2001 can be used for the actual
programming of ultrasonic sensors of the -F43- series. (3500 mm - 800 mm) / 4096 = 0.66 mm.
UC-30GM-R2 programming adapter Ultrasonic sensors with 8-bit parallel output resolve the meas-
uring window in 256 steps. Their resolution can be calculated
The interface cable UC-30GM-R2 permits the parameterisati- as follows:
on of ultrasonic sensors series UC...-30GM-..R2-V15 using
the PC service program ULTRA 2001. This cable connects the (upper limit - lower limit) / 256
PC-internal RS 232-interface to the program/temperature sok-
if the measuring window has been set to a size greater than
ket of the sensor. During the parameterisation procedure, the
44 mm. For smaller measuring windows, the resolution is
program/temperature plug is unplugged.
0.172 mm. The resolution given in the data sheet is based on
the largest possible measuring window.
UC-FP/U9-R2 programming adapter
The interface cable UC-FP/U9-R2 permits the parameterisati- Accuracy (conformity error)
on of ultrasonic sensors series VariKont (U9) and FP, which
To determine the absolute accuracy of the measured value of
are equipped with a serial interface, (marked with R2 or RS in
an ultrasonic sensor, factors such as
model number). This cable connects the PC-internal RS 232-
interface to the according terminal screws in the sensor base. - temperature
- atmospheric pressure
- relative humidity
- turbulence
- hot spots in the air surrounding the sensor
- Sensor in hot operating mode status
must be taken into consideration.
Notes for installation and operation
In addition, tolerances of the electronic components and differ- 7. Notes for installation and operation
ences in the response characteristic of the ultrasonic sensor
due to varying signal strengths of the sound reflected by the Ultrasonic sensors can be installed and operated in any posi-
object also have an effect. tion. Avoid installation positions that may lead to impaired
Under consideration of all of these influences, an accuracy of functioning due to deposits of dust or dirt.
better than 2 % generally can be achieved, along with a repro- When cleaning ultrasonic sensors, take care not to damage
ducibility and linearity of better than 0.2 %. the sensor surface (decoupling layer) or the integral foam in
which the transducer is embedded.
Resistance to shock and vibration Water drops or the formation of crusts on the decoupling layer
will lead to an impairment of the ultrasonic sensor's function.
Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors fulfill the DIN EN 60947-5- Light dust deposits are uncritical.
2 standards for low-voltage switching equipment, Part 5, Sec-
tion 2: Proximity Switches. A reference is made to the applica- Actuation direction
ble environmental testing procedures within the framework of
this standard. The objects to be detected can enter the sound beam from any
arbitrary direction. The sensor ranges and response curves in
Resistance to shock the data sheets represent the maximum object sensing rang-
es.
Our ultrasonic sensors were tested for their resistance to me-
chanical shocks in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27 under the
following conditions:
6 impacts in each direction along 3 axes at right angles to one

another (6 individual tests).
Pulse form: half sine

Peak acceleration: 30 g (300 m/s )
Pulse duration: 11 ms
For objects moving radially, i.e. at right angles or any other an-
Resistance to vibration gle lateral to the sound cone axis, refer to the response curve
of the data sheet to determine the switching distance.
Our ultrasonic sensors were tested for their resistance to vi-
bration in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 under the following
conditions:
Vibration along 3 axes at right angles to one another.
Frequency range: 10 Hz ... 55 Hz

Amplitude: 1 mm
Duration: 30 min each (55 Hz)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Deflection of the sound cone
The DIN EN 60947-5-2 "proximity switch standard" also refers
The sound cone can be deflected with smooth, even reflec-
to the applicable standards for the documentation of electro-
tors. Do not deflect the signal more than twice, however, as
magnetic compatibility. Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors ful-
the signal damping that occurs with each deflection will result
fill the requirements of
in reduced range.
- Interference immunity in accordance with DIN EN 61000-4-2
(immunity to electrostatic discharge)
(immunity to high-frequency interference)
(immunity to fast transients)
- Emitted interference in accordance with EN 55011 and
DIN EN 50081-2.
An exact alignment of the reflector surfaces is required. Pep- Synchronisation
perl+Fuchs offers 45 reflectors for some sensor types to
achieve a deflection of 90. Mutual interference of sensors with synchronisation inputs can
be prevented effectively by synchronising the sensors. A dis-
Mutual interference tinction is made between synchronised and multiplex mode.
To prevent mutual interference, observe the minimum distanc- Multiplex mode

es between sensors of the same type shown in the following
drawings. In this operating mode, the sensors are activated for a brief pe-
riod, consecutively and in a cyclic manner. Please note that in
this operating mode the cycle time T is extended by a factor of
N, in which N stands for the number of sensors in the multiplex
mode.
T multiplex = N x T sensor and f Sync = 1 / Tmultiplex

X
If sensors of different types are used, the total cycle time is

equal to the sum of the cycle times of the individual sensors.
T multiplex = T sensor 1 + Tsensor 2 + ... + T sensor N
If the self-synchronisation option is used, the sensors work in

Detection range X Detection range X
mm m mm m multiplex mode.
to 500 > 0.3 to 4000 > 2.0
to 2000 > 1.0 to 6000 > 2.5 Synchronised mode
In this mode, the synchronisation inputs of all sensors are con-

The indicated values should be regarded as guidelines. They nected to one another and controlled together. Unlike multi-
apply if the sound cones are aligned parallel to one another plex mode, the cycle time does not increase. In addition to the
and the surfaces of the objects are at right angles to the axes monitoring of large areas, the synchronised mode is above all
of the sound cones. The actually required spacing "X" is de- suitable for the reduction of the required minimum lateral spac-
pendent on alignment, the nature of the target objects to be ing of sensors of the same type, and for the operation of op-
detected, and local conditions related to other objects located posed sensors of the same type.
in the sound cone. In the case of opposed sensor installation, observe the dis-
In the event that objects with an unfavourable alignment are to tances specified below.
be detected, a greater spacing "X" must be used.
X'
Detection range X' Detection range X'

mm m mm m
to 500 > 2.0 to 4000 > 16.0

to 2000 > 8.0 to 6000 > 25.0
X
Measuring plate/objects
Objects to be detected by ultrasonic sensors can be solid, liq-

uid or in powder form. The properties of the object's surface
are important for the echo to be evaluated by the sensor. All
level and smooth surfaces arranged at a right angle to the
sound cone, provide an ideal reflection. An angular deviation
of the measuring plate by a maximum of 3 is permissible for
reliable detection.
The indicated spacing can be reduced significantly by syn-
3 3
chronising the ultrasonic sensors. Pepperl+Fuchs offers a se-
ries of sensors equipped with synchronisation inputs for this
purpose. These can be used in synchronised or multiplex
mode. The synchronisation can be realised with an external
synchronisation signal or with self-synchronisation in some
sensor types.
The opposed installation on non-synchronised sensors of the
same type should be avoided.
Material properties such as transparency, colour, or surface The following objects are well-suited for detection:
finish (polished or matte) have no effect on detection reliability.
The roughness of the object's surface, together with the sen- - All smooth and solid objects that are aligned at a right angle
sor-specific transducer frequency, determines whether the to the sound cone.
echo is reflected or diffused. The following table contains a list- - All solid objects with degrees of surface roughness that
ing of the transducer frequencies used in Pepperl+Fuchs ultra- cause a diffuse reflection and which are to a large extent in-
sonic sensors and the associated degrees of surface dependent of their alignment.
roughness for the reflection or diffusion of the sensor signal. - The surfaces of liquids, insofar as these are not angled more
The following rule applies: than 3 from the axis of the sound cone.
If the sound wavelength is longer than the peak-to-valley
height of the surface roughness, the directional share of the The following materials are poorly suited:
reflection will predominate. If it is shorter than the peak-to-val-
- Materials that absorb ultrasonic signals such as felt, cotton
ley height, the diffuse share will predominate.
wool, coarse textiles, or plastic foam.
- Materials at temperatures greater than 100 C.
Transducer Degree of object Degree of object It may be necessary to resort to through-beam operation for
frequency surface roughness surface roughness
such materials.
for a predomi- for a predomi-
nately directional nately diffuse
reflection reflection Sensors with adjustable sound cone width
65 kHz < 1 mm > 25 mm Some series offer a sound cone width adjustment in the close
range. This enables the operation of such sensors even at nar-
85 (90) kHz < 0.8 mm > 20 mm row places, where objects can extend sidewards into the
sound cone. Such circumstances would cause erratic swit-
120 (130) kHz < 0.5 mm > 13 mm ching ar erratic measurement under the use of sensors without
this feature. An adjustment of the sound cone can solve this
175 kHz < 0.4 mm > 10 mm
problem.
375 (400) kHz < 0.2 mm > 5 mm
The adjustment of the shape of the sound cone has no influ-
ence to the maximum sensing range.
The transition from directional to diffuse reflection is continu-
ous. Depths of roughness between the indicated values will re- Distance Y [m]
0.2
sult in reflections with diffuse and directional shares. Objects Flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
with great surface roughness will result in a reduction of the ul-
trasonic sensor's sensing range. 0.1
Greater degrees of surface roughness permit greater devia-

tions of the angle of incidence from the ideal position. The rea- 0.0
son for this is the predominately diffuse reflection of the
ultrasonic signal. As a result, filling levels or pouring cones of
coarse-grained materials can be detected at an angular devi- -0.1
ation of up to 45 (at a reduced sensing range). Round bar, 25 mm

-0.2
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Y Distance X [m]
X
wide sonic beam
narrow sonic beam
In the figure above, the characteristic response curve of the

sensor UB500-F42... is shown for 2 diffent objects (round bar
with d= 25 mm (upper part) and flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
(lower part).
If you have any questions pertaining to difficult applications, simply give us a call. Take advantage of our
help and experience. Our service team will be pleased to be of assistance.
Our contact addresses, you can find at the rear catalogue cover or in the chapter "Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH
worldwide" beginning at page 246
Series -12GM
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Model number Detection range Page
UB400-12GM-E5-V1
Series
UB400-12GM-I-V1 400 mm 28
-F43
UB400-12GM-U-V1
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Date of edi ti on 0 9/13/20 05
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB400-12GM-..-V1
-12GM
Series
TEACH-IN input
Temperature compensation
-18GK/-18GM
Analogue output 0 V ... 10 V

Series
Analogue output 4 mA ... 20 mA

Switch output
5 different output functions can be set
Measuring window adjustable
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Suitable connector cables, mounting aids and more, you can find in chapter "Accessories"
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB400-12GM-E5-V1
UB400-12GM-U-V1
UB400-12GM-I-V1
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 30 ... 400 mm ! ! !

Adjustment range 50 ... 400 mm ! ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 30 mm ! ! !
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! ! !
Transducer frequency approx. 310 kHz ! ! !
Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 50 ms ! ! !

LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range ! !
yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected
indication of the switching state !
flashing: TEACH-IN function object detected
LED red permanently red: Error ! ! !
Series
-F54
red, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object not detected

Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !
15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS !
No-load supply current 30 mA ! ! !
Output type 1 analogue output 0 ... 10 V !
Series
-F64
1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA, short-circuit/overload protected !

1 switch output E5, pnp NO/NC, parameterisable !
Resolution 0,17 mm ! !
Deviation of the characteristic curve 1 % of full-scale value ! !
Repeat accuracy 1 % !
0,5 % of full-scale value ! !
Series
-D1
Rated operational current 100 mA , short-circuit/overload protected !

Voltage drop 3 V !
Switching frequency 8 Hz !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance !
Load impedance > 1 kOhm !
Series
!
LUC
0 ... 300 Ohm

Temperature influence 1,5 % of full-scale value ! ! !
Input type 1 TEACH_IN input !
operating distance 1: -UB ... +1 V, operating distance 2: +6 V ... +UB
input impedance: > 4,7 k TEACH-IN pulse: 1 s
Double sheet
monitoring
1 TEACH-IN input ! !
lower evaluation limit A1: -UB ... +1 V, upper evaluation limit A2: +4 V ... +UB
input impedance: > 4.7 k, pulse duration: 1 s
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! ! !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Protection degree IP65 ! ! !

Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! ! !
Housing brass, nickel-plated ! ! !
Date of edition: 08/18/2005
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! ! !
Mass 25 g ! ! !
Accessories
Dimensions UB400-12GM-..-V1
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M12x1
Series
-30GM
4
41
48.4
17
(Torque)
70
max. 10 Nm
VariKont
Series
LED
6
M12x1
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Electrical connection
Standard symbol/Connections: Standard symbol/Connections: Standard symbol/Connections:

(version I) (version U) (version E5, pnp)
Series
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
2 (WH) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
U Teach input U Teach input U Teach input
4 (BK) Analogue output 4 (BK) Analogue output 4 (BK) Switch output
3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB
Series
-F54
Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2. Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2. Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2.
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function Programmed analogue output function
1. Window mode, normally open function Rising ramp
Distance Y [mm]
Double sheet
A1 < A2: object range A1 < A2:

monitoring
300 object range

A1 A2 A1 A2
200 2. Window mode, normally closed function Falling ramp
A2 < A1: A2 < A1:
100
A2 A1
2 1 A2 A1
Power supplies

Control units/
0
A1 -> :
-100
A2
-200 4. One switch point, normally closed function

A2 -> :
-300
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 A1
Y Distance X [mm]
5. A1 -> , A2 -> : Detection of object presence
Accessories
X Object detected: Switch output closed

No object detected: Switch output open
Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm
Series -12GM Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
Output version E5:

-18GK/-18GM
Adjusting the switching points

Series
The ultrasonic sensor features a switch output with two teachable switching points. These are set by applying the supply volta-
ge -UB or +U B to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs indicate
whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Switching point A1 is taught with -UB , A2 with
+UB .
Five different output functions can be set
Series
-30GM
1. Window mode, normally-open f unction

2. Window mode, normally-closed function
3. one switching point, normally-open f unction
4. one switching point, normally-closed function
VariKont
Series
5. Detection of object presence

TEACH-IN window mode, normally-open function
- Set target to near switching point
- TEACH-IN switching point A1 with -UB
Series
- Set target to far switching point

-FP
- TEACH-IN switching point A2 with +UB

TEACH-IN window mode, normally-closed function
Series

-F12

TEACH-IN switching point, normally-open function
Series

-F42

- Cover sensor with hand or remove all objects from sensing range
Series
TEACH-IN switching point, normally-closed function

-F43

Series
-F54
TEACH-IN detection of objects presence

Series
-F64
Default setting of switching points

A1 = blind range, A2 = nominal distance
LED Displays
Series
-D1
Displays in dependence on operating mode Red LED Yellow LED

TEACH-IN switching point:
Object detected off flashes
No object detected flashes off
Series
LUC
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) On off

Normal operation off Switching state
Fault on Previous state
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
Output versions -I and -U:
-18GK/-18GM
Adjusting the evaluation limits
Series
The ultrasonic sensor features an analogue output with two teachable evaluation limits. These are set by applying the supply
voltage -UB or +U B to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs
indicate whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. The lower evaluation limit A1 is taught
with -U B, A2 with +UB .
Two different output functions can be set:
Series
-30GM
1. Analogue value increases with rising distance to object (rising ramp)
2. Analogue value falls with rising distance to object (falling ramp)
TEACH-IN rising ramp (A2 > A1)
VariKont
Position object at lower evaluation limit
Series
TEACH-IN lower limit A1 with - UB
Position object at upper evaluation limit
TEACH-IN upper limit A2 with + UB
Series
-FP
TEACH-IN falling ramp (A1 > A2):
TEACH-IN lower limit A2 with + UB
Series
-F12
TEACH-IN upper limit A1 with - UB
Default setting
A1: unusable area
Series
-F42
A2: nominal sensing range
Mode of operation: rising ramp
LED Displays
Series
-F43
TEACH-IN evaluation limit
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) on off
Series
Normal mode (evaluation range) off on
-F54
Fault on previous state
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Date of edi ti on: 0 8/17/20 05
Accessories
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -18GK/-18GM
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
UB...-18GM40A... UB...-18GM40...
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
UBE500-18GK...
Series
-F12
UB...-18GM75...
Series
-F42
UBE500-18GK-SE0-V1 500 mm 34
UBE500-18GK-SE2-V1
UBE1000-18GM40-SE2-V1 1000 mm 36
Series
-F43
UB300-18GM40-E5-V1 300 mm 38
UB300-18GM40-I-V1
UB300-18GM40-U-V1
UB800-18GM40-E5-V1 800 mm
Series
UB800-18GM40-I-V1
-F54
UB800-18GM40-U-V1
UB300-18GM40A-E5-V1 300 mm 40
UB300-18GM40A-I-V1
UB300-18GM40A-U-V1
Series
-F64
UB800-18GM40A-E5-V1 800 mm
UB800-18GM40A-I-V1
UB800-18GM40A-U-V1
UB500-18GM75-E4-V15 500 mm 42
Series
UB500-18GM75-E5-V15
-D1
UB500-18GM75-I-V15
UB500-18GM75-U-V15
UB500-18GM75-E01-V15 500 mm 44
UB500-18GM75-E23-V15
Series
LUC
UB500-18GM75-E6-V15
UB500-18GM75-E7-V15
UB500-18GM75-F-V15 500 mm 46
Double sheet
monitoring
UB500-18GM75-BIT-V15
UB500-18GM75-PWM-V15
UB1000-18GM75-E4-V15 1000 mm 48
UB1000-18GM75-E5-V15
UB1000-18GM75-I-V15
Power supplies
Control units/
UB1000-18GM75-U-V15
UB1000-18GM75-E01-V15 1000 mm 50
UB1000-18GM75-E23-V15
UB1000-18GM75-E6-V15
UB1000-18GM75-E7-V15
UB1000-18GM75-F-V15 1000 mm 52
Accessories
UB1000-18GM75-BIT-V15
UB1000-18GM75-PWM-V15
For detailed function description, see page 54
Through-beam ultrasonic barrier UBE500-18GK-...-V1
-12GM
Series
High switching frequency

Small, compact design
-18GK/-18GM
Plastic housing
Series
Suited for applications for detection and counting of transparent objects

(e .g. bottles and plastic-wrapping)
Emitter and receiver included in the delivery package
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UBE500-18GK-SE0-V1
UBE500-18GK-SE2-V1
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 0 ... 500 mm , distance emitter-receiver 15 mm ... 500 mm ! !

Transducer frequency 400 kHz ! !
LED yellow indication of the switching state (receiver) ! !
Series
No-load supply current 20 mA receiver ! !

-F43
25 mA emitter
Output type 1 switch output E0, npn NO !
1 switch output E2, pnp NO !
Rated operational current 200 mA ! !
Voltage drop 1,5 V ! !
Series
-F54
Switching frequency 100 Hz ! !

Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! !
Ambient temperature 0 ... 60 C (273 ... 333 K) ! !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! !
Protection degree IP65 ! !
Series
Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! !

-F64
Housing Polyamide (PA) ! !

Mass 50 g ! !
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UBE500-18GK-...-V1
-12GM
Series
43 0.1
-18GK/-18GM
50
Series
M3
60
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
M12x1
5
16
Series
16
-FP
M18x1
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Standard symbol / Connection:
Receiver E2:
Series
-F43
1 (BN)
+UB
U 4 (BK)
3 (BU)
-UB
Receiver E0:
Series
-F54
1 (BN)
+UB
U 4 (BK)
3 (BU)
-UB
Series
Emitter:
-F64
1 (BN)
+UB
U
3 (BU)
-UB
Series
-D1
Diagrams
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Mounting/Adjustment Thin foil detection

Double sheet
Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
monitoring
20 10

10
A
Power supplies
1
Control units/
0.0 -0
0.1
-10
0.2
Parallel displacement Angle displacement
0.3 A 8 mm 5
-20
0.4
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1..
Distance [m]
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UBE1000-18GM40-SE2-V1
-12GM
Series
Short design, 40 mm
Function indicators visible from all directions
-18GK/-18GM
Switch output
Series
TEACH-IN input
Integrated alignment aid
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UBE1000-18G M40-SE2-V1
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 50 ... 1000 mm !

Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm !
Transducer frequency approx. 205 kHz !
Series
LED yellow switching state !

-F43
LED red error, object uncertain !

LED green Power on !
Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS !
No-load supply current 20 mA !
Output type NO pnp !
Series
-F54

Voltage drop 3 V !
Switch-on delay < 5 ms !
Input type 1 TEACH_IN input !
Series

-F64

Standards EN 60947-5-2 !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) !
Protection degree IP65 !
Series
-D1
Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin !

Housing brass, nickel-plated !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT !
Mass 25 g !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UBE1000-18GM40-SE2-V1
-12GM
Series
M18 x 1
-18GK/-18GM
Series
24.5
4
40.2
50.2
24
LED
Series
-30GM
M12 x 1
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
(version E2, pnp)
Series
-F43
Receiver:
1 (BN)
+UB
U 2 (WH)
Teaching input
4 (BK)
Switching output
3 (BU)
-UB
Series
-F54
Emitter:
1 (BN)
+UB
Series
U 2 (WH)
-F64
Test input
4 (BK)
n.c.
3 (BU)
-UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Obstacle size

Distance Y [mm] min. obstacle size d [mm]
Double sheet
monitoring
20 80
15 70
10 60
5 50
Power supplies
0 40
Control units/
-5 30
-10 20
-15 10
-20 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800 1000
Distance X [mm] distance X [mm]

Y
Accessories
d
X with Teach-In
Obstacle: flat plate 100 mm x 100 mm X without Teach-In
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-18GM40-..-V1
-12GM
Series
Short design, 40 mm
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
UB...-18GM40-I-V1
UB...-18GM40-U-V1
Series
-30GM

UB...-18GM40-U-V1
UB...-18GM40-I-V1
VariKont
Series
Switch output
UB...-18GM40-E5-V1
UB...-18GM40-E5-V1
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB300-18GM40-E5-V1
UB800-18GM40-E5-V1
UB300-18GM40-U-V1
UB800-18GM40-U-V1
UB300-18GM40-I-V1
UB800-18GM40-I-V1
Model number
Series
-F42

50 ... 800 mm ! ! !
70 ... 800 mm ! ! !
Series

-F43
0 ... 50 mm ! ! !
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! ! ! ! ! !
approx. 390 kHz ! ! !
Series
-F54
approx. 30 ms ! ! !
LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range, yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected ! ! ! !
indication of the switching state, flashing: TEACH-IN function object detected ! !
LED red permanently red: Error, red, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object not detected ! ! ! ! ! !
Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !

No-load supply current 20 mA ! ! ! ! ! !
Output type 1 analogue output 0 ... 10 V ! !
1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA, short-circuit/overload protected ! !
1 switch output E5, pnp NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
Default setting evaluation limit 1: 50 mm evaluation limit 2: 300 mm ! !
Series
-D1
evaluation limit 1: 70 mm evaluation limit 2: 800 mm ! !

Switch point A1: 50 mm Switch point A2: 300 mm !
Resolution 0,4 mm at max. sensing range ! ! ! !
Deviation of the characteristic curve 1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !
Series
1 %
LUC
Repeat accuracy ! !
0,5 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !
Rated operational current 200 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! !
Voltage drop 3 V ! !
13 Hz
Double sheet
Switching frequency !
monitoring
4 Hz !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance ! !
Load impedance > 1 kOhm ! !
0 ... 300 Ohm ! !
Temperature influence 1,5 % of full-scale value ! ! ! ! ! !
Input type 1 TEACH_IN input ! !
Power supplies
Control units/

1 TEACH-IN input ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! ! ! ! ! !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! ! ! ! !
Accessories
Protection degree IP65 ! ! ! ! ! !

Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! ! ! ! ! !
Housing brass, nickel-plated ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! ! ! ! ! !
Mass 25 g ! ! ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB...-18GM40-..-V1
-12GM
Series
M18 x 1
-18GK/-18GM
Series
24.5
4
40.2
50.2
24
LED
Series
-30GM
M12 x 1
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

Series
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
2 (WH) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function Programmed analogue output function
Distance Y [mm] Distance Y [mm]
100 200
object range
Double sheet
A1 A2
monitoring
150 A1 A2
50
2. Window mode, normally closed function Falling ramp
100
A2 < A1: A2 < A1:
1 50 A2 A1
2 2 A2 A1
0 1
0 3. One switch point, normally open function
A1 -> :
-50
-50
A2
-100
Power supplies
Control units/
4. One switch point, normally closed function

-150 A2 -> :
-100
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 -200 A1
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Distance X [mm]
Y Y Distance X [mm]
X X Object detected: Switch output closed

Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm
UB300-18GM40-V1 UB800-18GM40-..-V1 output version -E5 output versions -I and -U

Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-18GM40A-..-V1
-12GM
Series
Short design, 40 mm
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
UB...-18GM40A-I-V1
UB...-18GM40A-U-V1
Series
-30GM

UB...-18GM40A-U-V1
UB...-18GM40A-I-V1
VariKont
Series
Switch output
UB...-18GM40A-E5-V1
UB...-18GM40A-E5-V1
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB300-18G M40A-E5-V1
UB800-18G M40A-E5-V1
UB300-18G M40A-U-V1
UB800-18G M40A-U-V1
UB300-18G M40A-I-V1
UB800-18G M40A-I-V1
Model number
Series
-F42

50 ... 800 mm ! ! !
70 ... 800 mm ! ! !
Series
-F43

0 ... 50 mm ! ! !
approx. 390 kHz ! ! !
Series

-F54
approx. 30 ms ! ! !
LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range, yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected ! ! ! !
LED red permanently red: Error, red, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object not detected ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !

1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA, short-circuit/overload protected ! !
Series

-D1

Resolution 0,4 mm at max. sensing range ! ! ! !
Series
LUC
Repeat accuracy 1 % ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
4 Hz !
0 ... 300 Ohm ! !
Temperature influence 1,5 % of full-scale value ! ! ! ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Input type 1 TEACH_IN input ! !

1 TEACH-IN input ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! !
Accessories

Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! ! ! ! ! !
Housing brass, nickel-plated ! ! ! ! ! !
Mass 25 g ! ! ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB...-18GM40A-..-V1
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
24.5 LED
39.2 10
67.7
VariKont
Series
Series
M12 x 1
M18 x 1
-FP
Series
-F12
24
4
Series
-F42

Series
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
2 (WH) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB 3 (BU) - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function Programmed analogue output function
Distance Y [mm] Distance Y [mm]
100 200
object range
Double sheet
A1 A2
monitoring
150 A1 A2
50
100
A2 < A1: A2 < A1:
1 50 A2 A1
2 2 A2 A1
0 1
A1 -> :
-50
-50
A2
-100
Power supplies
Control units/

-150 A2 -> :
-100
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 -200 A1
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Distance X [mm]
Y Y Distance X [mm]

UB300-18GM40A-V1 UB800-18GM40A-..-V1 output version -E5 output versions -I and -U

Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB500-18GM75-..-V15
-12GM
Series
Selectable sound lobe width

TEACH-IN input
-18GK/-18GM
Synchronisation options
Series
Deactivation option
Very small unusable area
Switch output
Series
-30GM

VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB500 -18 GM75 -E4-V15
UB500 -18 GM75 -E5-V15
UB500 -18 GM75 -U-V15

UB500 -18 GM75 -I-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 30 ... 500 mm ! ! ! !

Adjustment range 50 ... 500 mm ! ! ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 30 mm ! ! ! !
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
Transducer frequency approx. 380 kHz ! ! ! !

Response delay approx. 50 ms ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range, yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected ! !
LED red permanently red: Error, red, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object not detected ! !
Series
"Error", object uncertain, in TEACH-IN function: No object detected ! !

-F54
Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! !

15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS !
50 mA ! ! !
Series
-F64
1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA !

1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC, parameterisable !
Resolution 0,11 mm at max. sensing range !
0,13 mm for max. detection range !
Series

-D1
Repeat accuracy 1 % ! !
Switching frequency max. 8 Hz ! !
Series
LUC

0 ... 300 Ohm !
Temperature influence 1,5 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Input type 1 TEACH-IN input, ! !

operating range 1: -UB ... +1 V, operating range 2: +4 V ... +UB
input impedance: > 4.7 k; TEACH-IN pulse: 1 s
Power supplies
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bi-directional ! ! ! !

Control units/
0-level: -UB...+1 V, 1-level: +4 V...+UB , input impedance: > 12 k

synchronisation pulse: 100 s, synchronisation interpulse period: 2 ms
Common mode operation 95 Hz ! ! ! !
Multiplex operation 95/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! ! !

Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! ! ! !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! ! !
Protection degree IP65
Accessories
! ! ! !
Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! ! ! !
Housing brass, nickel-plated ! ! ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! ! ! !
Mass 60 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB500-18GM75-..-V15
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M18 x 1
Series
-30GM
4
48
24
75
VariKont
Series
85
Series
-FP
LEDs
M12 x 1
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(version E4, npn) (version E5, pnp) (version U)
Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
Switch output Teaching input Teaching input
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY) U 5 (GY)
Teaching input Synchronous Sync.
5 (GY) 4 (BK) 4 (BK)
Synchronous Switch output Analog output
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F54
(version I)
1 (BN)
Series
+ UB
-F64
2 (WH)
Teaching input
U 5 (GY)
Sync.
4 (BK)
Analog output
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Distance Y [mm] 1. Window mode, normally open function Rising ramp
Double sheet

monitoring
400
object range
flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm A1 A2
300 A1 A2
200
A2 < A1: A2 < A1:
100 A2 A1
A2 A1
Power supplies

Control units/
A1 -> :
-100
A2
-200

-300 A2 -> :
round bar, 25 mm
-400 A1
0 200 400 600 900 1000
Distance X [mm]
Accessories
Object detected: Switch output closed

Y No object detected: Switch output open
wide sound lobe
X
narrow sound lobe
output versions -E4 and -E5 output versions -I and -U
Ultrasonic sensor UB500-18GM75-...-V15
-12GM
Series
2 switch outputs
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
UB500-18GM75-E7-V15
Series
-30GM
UB500-18GM75-E6-V15
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB500-18GM75-E01-V15
UB500-18GM75-E23-V15
UB500-18GM75-E7-V15
UB500-18GM75-E6-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 30 ... 500 mm ! ! ! !

Series
-F43

LED yellow indication of the switching state ! ! ! !
LED red "Error", object uncertain ! ! ! !
Series
in TEACH-IN function: No object detected

-F54

No-load supply current 50 mA ! ! ! !
Output type 2 switch outputs npn, NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
2 switch outputs pnp, NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
Repeat accuracy 1 % ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
Rated operational current 2 x 100 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! ! ! !

Voltage drop 3 V ! ! ! !
Switching frequency max. 8 Hz ! ! ! !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance ! ! ! !
Series
Input type 1 TEACH-IN input, ! ! ! !

-D1

Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Series
LUC
Protection degree IP65 ! ! ! !

Double sheet
Mass 60 g ! ! ! !
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UB500-18GM75-...-V15
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M18 x 1
Series
-30GM
4
48
24
75
VariKont
Series
85
Series
-FP
LEDs
M12 x 1
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(version E7, npn) (version E6, pnp) (version E01, npn)
Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB + UB
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 4 (BK)
Switch output 1 Teaching input Switch output 1
U 2 (WH) U 4 (BK) U 2 (WH)
Switch output 2 Switch output 1 Switch output 2
5 (GY) 2 (WH) 5 (GY)
Teaching input Switch output 2 Teaching input
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F54
(version E23, pnp)
1 (BN)
Series
+ UB
-F64
5 (GY) Teaching input
U 4 (BK)
Switch output 1
2 (WH)
Switch output 2
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function Programmed switching output function
Distance Y [mm]
Switch output 1 Switch output 1
Double sheet
monitoring
400 (N.O.) object range (N.O.) Object range

flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
300
200 (N.O.) (N.C.)
100
Power supplies
0 Switch output 2 Switch point 1 -> :

Control units/
Switch output 1, (N.O.)

(N.C.) Detection of object presence
-100
object range Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.C.)
-200 Switch output 1 Detection of object presence
(N.C.)
-300
round bar, 25 mm
-400
3.
0 200 400 600 900 1000
Switch point 1 -> : Switch output 1, (N.C.)
Distance X [mm]
Accessories
Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.O.)

Y Detection of object presence
wide sound lobe
X Switch point 1 a. 2 -> : Both switch outputs, (N.O.)
narrow sound lobe
output versions -E6 and -E7 output versions -E01 and -E23
-12GM
Series
3 different options of outputs parameterisable

Paramaterisation input
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Deactivation option
Series
-30GM
Frequency output
UB500-18GM75-F-V15
PWM output
VariKont
Serial digital output

Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB500-18GM75-F-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series

-F43

LED red flashing: error(br>permanent: no object detected ! ! !
LED green Power on ! ! !
No-load supply current 50 mA ! ! !
Series
-F54
Output type 1 frequency output, push/pull, parameterisable !

1 PWM output, push/pull, parameterisable !
1 serial output, push/pull, parameterisable !
Resolution 1 mm ! ! !
Deviation of the characteristic curve 1 % of full-scale value ! ! !
Series
Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of full-scale value

-F64
! ! !
Load impedance > 1000 Ohm < 100 nF ! ! !
Input type 1 Parameterisation input ! ! !
Input impedance: > 4.7 k
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bi-directional ! ! !
Series
0-level: -UB...+1 V
-D1
1-level: +4 V...+UB
input impedance: > 12 k
Common mode operation 95 Hz ! ! !
Multiplex operation 95/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! !
Series
LUC
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! ! !

Material
Mass 60 g ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
M18x1
-18GK/-18GM
Series
4
52
64
24
75
85
Series
-30GM
4
VariKont
LEDs
Series
M12x1
Series
-FP
LED green LED red
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB
2 (WH)
Programming input
U 5 (GY)
Synchronous
4 (BK)
Output
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Characteristic response curve Anstiegs-/Abfallzeit des Ausgangssignals
Distance Y [m]
0.20
0.15
90%
0.10
Series
1
-D1
0.05
2 10%
0.00
-0.05 4,5s 2,5s t

-0.10
-0.15
Series
+UB
LUC
-0.20 Q Lastimpedanz: 1 k // 100 nF
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Y Distance X [m]
0V
X
Double sheet

monitoring
Output characteristic Output characteristic Output characteristic

t t t
t
f Value
T
Power supplies
T T T
Control units/
max. max. max.

min. min. min.

Accessories
NDE FDE NDE FDE NDE FDE

Distance Distance Distance
output version -PWM output version -F output version -BIT
Ultrasonic sensor UB1000-18GM75-..-V15
-12GM
Series

TEACH-IN input
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Deactivation option
Switch output
Series
-30GM

VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E4-V15
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E5-V15
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-U-V15

UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-I-V1 5
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 70 ... 1000 mm ! ! ! !

0 ... 90 mm !
Series
-F43

LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range, yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected ! !
Series
LED red permanently red: Error, red, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object not detected ! ! ! !
-F54

15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS !
50 mA ! ! !
Series

-F64

Series
Repeat accuracy 1 %
-D1
! !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance
Series
! !
LUC

0 ... 300 Ohm !
Input type 1 TEACH-IN input, ! !
Double sheet
monitoring

Synchronisation bi-directional ! ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
0 level -UB...+1 V, 1 level: +4 V...+UB , input impedance: > 12 KOhm

Common mode operation 40 Hz ! ! ! !
40/n
Multiplex operation ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Accessories

Material
Mass 60 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB1000-18GM75-..-V15
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M18 x 1
Series
-30GM
4
48
24
75
VariKont
Series
85
Series
-FP
LEDs
M12 x 1
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY) U 5 (GY)
5 (GY) 4 (BK) 4 (BK)
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F54
(version I)
1 (BN)
Series
+ UB
-F64
2 (WH)
Teaching input
U 5 (GY)
Sync.
4 (BK)
Analog output
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Distance Y [mm]
Double sheet

monitoring
1000
object range
flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm A1 A2 A1 A2
750
500 A2 < A1: A2 < A1:
250 A2 A1
A2 A1
Power supplies

Control units/
A1 -> :
-250
-500 A2
-750 4. One switch point, normally closed function

round bar, 25 mm A2 -> :
-1000
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 A1
Distance X [mm]
Accessories
Object detected: Switch output closed

Y No object detected: Switch output open
wide sound lobe
X
narrow sound lobe
output versions -E4 and -E5 output versions -I and -U
-12GM
Series
2 switch outputs
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
UB1000-18GM75-E6-V15
Series
-30GM
UB1000-18GM75-E7-V15
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E01-V15
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E23-V15
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E6-V15
UB100 0-1 8GM7 5-E7-V15

Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 70 ... 1000 mm ! ! ! !

Series

-F43

LED red "Error", object uncertain ! ! ! !
Series
-F54
in TEACH-IN function: No object detected

Output type 2 switch outputs npn, normally open/closed !
2 switch outputs npn, normally open/close selectable !
Series
2 switch outputs pnp, NO/NC !

-F64
2 switch outputs pnp, normally open/close selectable !

Repeat accuracy 1 % ! ! ! !
Rated operational current 2 x 100 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! ! ! !
Voltage drop 3 V ! ! ! !
Switching frequency max. 3 Hz ! ! ! !
Series

-D1

Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Series
LUC

Double sheet
monitoring
Material
Mass 60 g ! ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M18 x 1
Series
-30GM
4
48
24
75
VariKont
Series
85
Series
-FP
LEDs
M12 x 1
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(version E7, npn) (version E6, pnp) (version E01, npn)
Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB + UB
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 4 (BK)
Switch output 1 Teaching input Switch output 1
U 2 (WH) U 4 (BK) U 2 (WH)
Switch output 2 Switch output 1 Switch output 2
5 (GY) 2 (WH) 5 (GY)
Teaching input Switch output 2 Teaching input
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F54
(version E23, pnp)
1 (BN)
Series
+ UB
-F64
5 (GY) Teaching input
U 4 (BK)
Switch output 1
2 (WH)
Switch output 2
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function Programmed switching output function
Distance Y [mm] Switch output 1 Switch output 1
Double sheet
monitoring
(N.O.) object range (N.O.) Object range

1000
750
500 (N.O.) (N.C.)
250
Power supplies
0 Switch output 2 Switch point 1 -> :

Control units/
Switch output 1, (N.O.)

(N.C.) Detection of object presence
-250
object range Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.C.)
-500 Detection of object presence
Switch output 1
-750 (N.C.)
round bar, 25 mm
-1000
3.
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Distance X [mm] Switch point 1 -> : Switch output 1, (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch point 2 -> : Switch output 2, (N.O.)

Y Detection of object presence
wide sound lobe
X Switch point 1 a. 2 -> : Both switch outputs, (N.O.)
narrow sound lobe
output versions -E6 and -E7 output versions -E01 and -E23
-12GM
Series
3 different options of outputs parameterisable

Paramaterisation input
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Deactivation option
Frequency output
UB1000-18GM75-F-V15
Series
-30GM
PWM output
UB1000-18GM75-PWM-V15
Serial digital output
UB1000-18GM75-BIT-V15
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB1000-18GM75-PWM-V15
UB1000-18GM75-BIT-V15
UB1000-18GM75-F-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

LED red flashing: error(br>permanent: no object detected ! ! !
LED green Power on ! ! !
50 mA
Series
No-load supply current ! ! !

-F54
Output type 1 frequency output, push/pull, parameterisable !

1 PWM output, push/pull, parameterisable !
1 serial output, push/pull, parameterisable !
Resolution 1 mm ! ! !
Deviation of the characteristic curve 1 % of full-scale value ! ! !
Series
-F64
Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of full-scale value ! ! !

Load impedance > 1000 Ohm < 100 nF ! ! !
Input type 1 Parameterisation input ! ! !
Input impedance: > 4.7 k
Synchronisation bi-directional
Series
! ! !
-D1
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
input impedance: > 12 KOhm
Series
30/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! !

LUC
Multiplex operation
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !
! ! !
Double sheet
Protection degree IP65

monitoring

Material
Mass 60 g ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
M18x1
-18GK/-18GM
Series
4
52
64
24
75
85
Series
-30GM
4
VariKont
LEDs
Series
M12x1
Series
-FP
LED green LED red
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB
2 (WH)
Programming input
U 5 (GY)
Synchronous
4 (BK)
Output
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Characteristic response curves Rise-/fall time of output signal
Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
90%
Series
10
-D1
10%
0.0 -0
2 1
0.2 4.5s 2.5s t
0.4
-10
0.6
Series
+UB
LUC
0.8
Q Load impedance: 1 k // 100 nF
-20
1.0
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6
Distance [m] 0V
Curve 1: flat plate 100 mm x 100 mm

Double sheet

monitoring
Output characteristic Output characteristic Output characteristic

t t t
t
f Value
T
Power supplies
Control units/
T T T
max. max. max.
min. min. min.

Accessories
NDE FDE NDE FDE NDE FDE

Distance Distance Distance
output version -PWM output version -F output version BIT
Series -18GK/-18GM Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
UBE500-18GK-SE0-V1 and UBE500-18GK-SE0-V1

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Function
A through-beam ultrasonic barrier always consists of a single emitter and a single receiver. The function of a through-beam
ultrasonic barrier is based in the interruption of the sound transmission to the receiver by the object to be detected.
The emitter sends an ultrasonic signal that is evaluated by the receiver. If the signal is interrupted or muted by the object to be
Series
-30GM
detected, the receiver switches.

No electrical connections are required between the emitter and receiver.
The function of through-beam ultrasonic barriers is not dependent on the position of their installation. We recommend, however,
to install the emitter below in the case of vertical installations to prevent the accumulation of dust particles.
VariKont
Installation tolerances
Series
The installation tolerances of the central axes of the emitter and receiver may not exceed the values specified in the illustration.
Detection of thin foils
Series
For the detection of thin foils (< 0.1 mm), install the through-beam ultrasonic barrier at an angle of > 10 from perpendicular to
-FP
the foil.
Caution
Mount or replace emitter and receiver only in pairs. Both devices are optimally matched to each other by the manufacturer.
Series
-F12
UBE1000-18GM40-SE2-V1
Function
Series
-F42
A through-beam ultrasonic barrier always consists of a single emitter and a single receiver. The function of a through-beam
ultrasonic barrier is based in the interruption of the sound transmission to the receiver by the object to be detected.
The emitter sends an ultrasonic signal that is evaluated by the receiver. If the signal is interrupted or muted by the object to be
detected, the receiver switches.
No electrical connections are required between the emitter and receiver.
Series
-F43
The function of through-beam ultrasonic barriers is not dependent on the position of their installation. We recommend, however,
to install the emitter below in the case of vertical installations to prevent the accumulation of dust particles.
Startup and parameterising
Series
For easy alignment of emitter and receiver towards each other, the receiver is equipped with an alignment aid. To activate the
-F54
alignment aid, the TEACH-Input of the receiver (pin 2) has to be connected to ground (-U B ). The flashing frequency of the yel-
low LED indicates the strength of the received ultrasonic signal. The better the alignment, the stronger the signal.
LED yellow, flashing frequency Description
Series
slowly (appr. 1.5 Hz) no signal

-F64
medium (appr. 3 Hz) weak signal

fast (appr. 9 Hz) strong signal
Simultaneously the ultrasonic barrier evaluates the signal strength of the unobstructed signal path and generates the optimal
Series
-D1
switching threshold. When disconnecting the TEACH-input from -UB , this threshold is stored non-volatile in the receivers me-
mory. In case of clear ultrasonic path (no object), all LEDs are off.
TEACH-In of very small objects/obstacles
Series
Like shown in the curve "obstacle size", the ultrasonic barrier offers the possibility to detect very small objects at a distance of
LUC
more than 300 mm.

- place the object to be detected in t he desired distance inside the ultrasonic path
- connect TEACH-input of the receiver to +UB (yellow LED f lashes slowly)
Double sheet
monitoring
- disconnect TEACH-input
In case of successful TEACH-IN (object is detected reliable), the yellow LED is on and the taught detection threshold is stored
non-volatile to the receivers memory.
In case of unsuccessful TEACH-IN (object too small or too porous for ultrasonic sound),the red LED flashes 5 times and the
ultrasonic barrier continues normal operation with unmodified detection threshold value.
Power supplies
Control units/
Test function
For test purpose, the ultrasonic emitter is equipped with a test input. In normal operation mode (test input not connected or
connected to -UB ), the green LED of the emitter is on. If the test input is connected to +UB , the ultrasonic emitter gets deacti-
vated and its LED changes into red. Simultaneously the receiver switches and its yellow LED goes on.
Accessories
-12GM
Series
UB...-18GM40(A)-... , output type -E5 (1 switch output)
-18GK/-18GM
Series
ge -U B or +UB to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs indicate
whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Switching point A1 is taught with -U B , A2 with
+U B .
Series
-30GM
1. Window mode, normally-open function
2. Window mode, normally-closed functio n
3. one switching point, normally-open function
VariKont
Series
4. one switching point, normally-closed function
Series
- TEACH-IN switching point A1 with -U B
-FP
- TEACH-IN switching point A2 with +U B
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
TEACH-IN detection of objects presence
Series
-F64

A1 = blind range, A2 = nominal distance
Series
-D1
LED Displays

Series
LUC
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) On off
Normal operation off Switching state
Double sheet
Fault on Previous state

monitoring
UB...-18GM40(A)-... , output types -I and -U (analogue output)

Power supplies
Control units/
voltage -UB or +U B to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs

Accessories

-12GM
Series
TEACH-IN lower limit A1 with - U B

-18GK/-18GM
Series
TEACH-IN upper limit A2 with + U B

Series
-30GM

TEACH-IN upper limit A1 with - U B
Default setting
VariKont
Series
A1: unusable area

LED Displays
Series
-FP

Series

-F12

All UB...-18GM75-... types

Series
-F42
Installation conditions
If the sensor is installed at places, where the environment temperature can fall below 0 C, for the sensors fixation, one of the
mounting flanges BF18, BF18-F or BF 5-30 must be used.
Series
-F43
In case of direct mounting of the sensor in a through hole using the steel nuts, it has to be fixed at the middle of the housing
thread. If a fixation at the front end of the threaded housing is required, plastic nuts with centering ring (accessories) must be
used.
UB...-18GM75-..., output types -E4 and -E5 (1 switch output)

Series
-F54
Synchronisation
The sensor features a synchronisation input for the suppression of mutual interference. If this input is not used, the sensor wi ll
operate using an internally generated clock rate. The synchronisation of multiple sensors can be realised as follows:
Series
-F64
External synchronisation
The sensor can be synchronised by the external application of a square wave voltage. A synchronisation pulse at the synchro-
nisation input starts a measuring cycle. The pulse must have a duration greater than 100 s. The measuring cycle starts with
the falling edge of a synchronisation pulse. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in the normal operation
of the sensor. A high level at the synchronisation input disables the sensor.
Series
-D1
Two operating modes are available

1. Multiple sensors can be controlled by the same synchronisation signal. The sensors are synchronised.
2. The synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to individual sensors. The sensors operate in multiplex mode.
Internal synchronisation
The synchronisation connections of up to 5 sensors capable of internal synchronisation are connected to one another. When
Series
LUC
power is applied, these sensors will operate in multiplex mode. The response delay increases according to the number of sen-
sors to be synchronised. Synchronisation cannot be performed during TEACH-IN and vice versa. The sensors must be opera-
ted in an unsynchronised manner to teach the switching point.
Double sheet
monitoring
Note:
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input has to be connected to ground (0V) or the sensor has to
be operated via a V1 cable connector (4-pin).
Power supplies
Control units/
ge -UB or +U B to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs indicate
whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Switching point A1 is taught with -UB , A2 with
+UB .

Accessories
3. One switch point, normally-open function

4. One switch point, normally-closed function
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
TEACH-IN detection of object presence
Series
-F42
A1 = unusable area
A2 = nominal sensing range
LED Displays
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Normal operation off switching
state
Fault on previous
Series
state
-F64
Adjusting the sound cone characteristics:
The ultrasonic sensor enables two different shapes of the sound cone, a wide angle sound cone and a small angle sound cone.
Series
-D1
1. Small angle sound cone
- switch off the power supply
- connect the Teach-input wire to -UB
- switch on the power supply
Series
LUC
- the red LED flashes once with a pause before the next. pause
- yellow LED: permanently on: indicates the presence of an object or disturbing object within
the sensing range
- disconnect the Teach-input wire from -UB and the changing is saved
Double sheet
monitoring
2. Wide angle sound cone

switch off the power supply
connect the Teach-input wire with +UB
Power supplies
Control units/
switch on the power supply

the red LED double-flashes with a long pause before the next. pause
yellow LED: permanently on: indicates an object or disturbing object within the sensing
range
disconnect the Teach-input wire from +UB and the changing is saved
Accessories
UB...-18GM75-..., output types -E01 and -E23 (2 switch outputs)
-12GM
Series

The ultrasonic sensor features two switch outputs with one teachable switching point. The switching points are set by applying
-18GK/-18GM
the supply voltage -UB or +U B to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least
Series
1 s. LEDs indicate whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Switching point A1 is taught
TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 1
Set target of desired switching point for switch output 1
Series
-30GM
- TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 1 with -UB
TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 2

- Set target of desired switching point for switch output 2
VariKont
- TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 2 with +UB

Series

- Cover the sensor with your hand, or remove all objects from the sensing range
- TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 1 with -UB
Series
- TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 2 with +UB

-FP
Comments
Only one switch output can be configured for detection of presence of objects. If the sensor detects an objects within the ma-
ximum detection range, the switch output switches.
Series
-F12

Switch output 1: unusable area
Switch output 2: nominal sensing range
LED Displays
Series
-F42
Displays in dependence on operating Red LED 1 yellow LED 2 yellow

mode LED
Series
-F43
TEACH-IN switching point 1

Object detected off flashes off
No object detected flashes off off
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) on off off
Series
TEACH-IN switching point 2:

-F54
Object detected off off flashes

No object detected flashes off off
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) on off off
Series
Normal operation off switch state 1 switch state 2

-F64
Fault on previous state previous state

Series
-D1

Series
LUC
- connect the Teach-input wire to -U B

Double sheet
monitoring
the sensing range
- disconnect the Teach-input wire from -U B and the changing is saved

Power supplies
Control units/

connect the Teach-input wire with +U B
Accessories
range
disconnect the Teach-input wire from +U B and the changing is saved
-12GM
Series
UB...-18GM75-..., output types -E6 and -E7 (2 switch outputs)
-18GK/-18GM
Series
The ultrasonic sensor features two switch outputs with one teachable switching point. The switching points are set by applying
the supply voltage -U B or +UB to the TEACH-IN input.
The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs indicate whether the sensor has recognised
Series
-30GM
the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Switching point A1 is taught with -UB , A2 with +U B .
Three different output functions can be set:
1. normally-open function
2. normally-closed function
VariKont
Series
TEACH-IN normally-open function
Switching point for switch output 1 < switching point for switch output 2
Series
TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 1 with -UB
-FP
TEACH-IN switching point for switch output 2 with +UB
Comments: The order doesn't make any difference. If you want, you can set only one switching point.
Series
-F12
TEACH-IN normally-closed function
Switching point for switch output 2 < switching point for switch output 1
Series
-F42
Comments: The order doesn't make any difference. If you want, you can set only one switching point. If both switching points
Series
are equal, the sensor works in close function.
-F43
Cover the sensor with the palm, or remove all objects from the detection range of the sensor
Series
-F54
Comments
Only one switch output can be configured for detection of presence of objects. If the sensor detects an object within the maxi-
mum detection range, the switch output switches.
Series
-F64
Switch output 1: unusable area
Switch output 2: nominal sensing range
LED Displays
Series
-D1
Displays in dependence on operating Red LED 1 yellow LED 2 yellow
mode LED
TEACH-IN switching point 1
Object detected off flashes off
Series
LUC
No object detected flas- off off
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) hes off off
on
TEACH-IN switching point 2:
Double sheet
monitoring
Object detected off off flashes

no object detected flas- off off
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) hes off off
on
Normal operation off switch state 1 switch state 2
Power supplies
Control units/
Fault on previous state previous state

Accessories

-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
the sensing range

Series
- disconnect the Teach-input wire from -U B and the changing is saved

Series
-30GM
connect the Teach-input wire with +U B

VariKont
Series
range
disconnect the Teach-input wire from +U B and the changing is saved
Series
-FP
UB...-18GM75-..., output types -I and -U (analogue output)
Synchronisation
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
the falling edge of a synchronisation pulse. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in the normal operation
of the sensor. A high level at the synchronisation input disables the sensor. Two operating modes are available:
Series
-F43
power is applied, these sensors will operate in multiplex mode.
The response delay increases according to the number of sensors to be synchronised. Synchronisation cannot be performed
Series
during TEACH-IN and vice versa. The sensors must be operated in an unsynchronised manner to teach the evaluation limits.
-F54
Note:
Series
-F64

voltage -U B or +UB to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs
with -UB , A2 with +U B.
Series
-D1

Series
LUC

TEACH-IN lower limit A1 with - U B
Double sheet

monitoring
TEACH-IN upper limit A2 with + U B

Power supplies
Control units/

TEACH-IN upper limit A1 with - U B
Default setting
A1: unusable area
Accessories

LED Displays
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
- the red LED flashes once with a pause before the next.
Series
-FP
pause
the sensing range
- disconnect the Teach-input wire from -UB and the changing is saved
Series
-F12
connect the Teach-input wire with +UB
Series
-F42
range
disconnect the Teach-input wire from +UB and the changing is saved
Series
-F43
UB...-18GM75-..., output type -F (frequency output)
Series
-F54
Parameter assignment of the signal output
The ultrasonic sensor is equipped with a signal output that represents the distance determined to the object in the form of a frequency propor-
tional to the distance of the object. The current path characteristic of this output signal follows a zero-point straight line, i.e. The extrapolated
output frequency for the object distance 0 (which is not usable in practical terms) also corresponds to 0. As the object distance increases, the
Series
-F64
output frequency also increases.
The object distance can be calculated according to:
Object distance [mm] = output frequency [Hz] / gain [Hz/mm]
Series
-D1
If no object is detected, the level 1 is permanently present on the output.
The frequency of the output channel is adjusted by the gain of the output characteristic line.
Wiring arrangement of the pa- Gain of the output cha-
rameterisation input racteristic line
Series
LUC
-UB 2 Hz/mm
Not used 1 Hz/mm
+UB 4 Hz/mm
Double sheet
monitoring
The sensor checks the parameterisation input when the operating voltage is switched on. A change in the wiring of the parameterisation input
during ongoing operation has no effect on the signal output.
LED display
The sensor is equipped with 2 LEDs. Their meaning is as follows:
LED green: Operating voltage applied
Power supplies
Control units/
LED red: No object detected
Synchronisation
The sensor features a synchronisation input for the suppression of mutual interference. If this input is not used, the sensor will operate using
an internally generated clock rate. The synchronisation of multiple sensors can be implemented as follows:
The sensor can be synchronised by the external application of a square wave voltage. A synchronisation pulse at the synchronisation input
Accessories
starts a measuring cycle. The pulse must have a duration greater than 100 s. The measuring cycle starts with the falling edge of a synchro-
nisation pulse. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input results in normal operation of the sensor. A high level at the synchronisation
input disables the sensor.
-12GM
Series
1) Multiple sensors can be controlled by the same synchronisation signal. The sensors work on the same clock rate.
2) The synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to only one sensor at a time. The sensors operate in multiplex mode.
-18GK/-18GM
Series
The synchronisation connections of up to 5 sensors capable of internal synchronisation are connected to one another. When power is applied,
these sensors operate in multiplex mode. The response delay increases according to the number of sensors to be synchronised.
Note
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input should be connected with ground (0 V) or the sensor should be operated
with a V1 cable connector (4-pin).
Series
-30GM
UB...-18GM75-..., output type -PWM (pulse width modulation)

VariKont
Series

The ultrasonic sensor is equipped with a signal output that represents the distance determined to the object in the form of a pulse-duty factor
proportional to the distance of the object. The current path characteristic of this output signal follows a zero-point straight line, i.e. the extrapo-
lated pulse-duty factor for the object distance 0 (not usable in practice) also corresponds to 0. As the distance to the object increases, the
pulse-duty factor also increases. It is 50 % when the nominal sensing range is reached.
Series
-FP
Object distance [mm] = 2 * sensing r ange [mm] * pulse length [s] * frequency [Hz]
Series
If the object distance reaches or exceeds twice the nominal detection range, or if no object is detected, a level 1 is permanently present on the
-F12
output.
The frequency of the output channel is adjusted by the wiring arrangement of the parameterisation input.
Wiring arrangement of the parameteri- Output frequency
sation input
Series
-F42
-UB 30 Hz
Not used 245 Hz
+UB 1900 Hz
Series
-F43

LED display
Series
-F54
Synchronisation
Series
-F64
Series

-D1
2) The synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to only one sensor at a time. The sensors operate in multiplex mode.
Series
LUC
Note
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
UB...-18GM75-..., output type -BIT (digital value)
-18GK/-18GM
Series
The ultrasonic sensor is equipped with a signal output that represents the distance determined to the object in the form of a digital value pro-
portional to the distance of the object. The current path characteristic of this output signal follows a zero-point straight line, i.e. The extrapolated
digital value for the object distance 0 (which is not usable in practical terms) also corresponds to 0. As the object distance increases, the digital
value also increases. The digital value is generated serially. A word consists of 1 start bit (level 1), 12 data bits (value), and 1 stop bit (level 0).
Series
-30GM
Object distance [mm] = Value / 2
VariKont
Series
If no object is detected, a level 1 is permanently present on the output.
The bit width is adjusted by the wiring arrangement of the parameterisation input.
Wiring arrangement of the parameteri- Bit width
sation input
-UB 50 s
Series
-FP
Not used 100 s
+UB 200 s
Series
-F12
LED display
Series
-F42
Synchronisation
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
2) T he synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to only one sensor at a time. T he sensors operate in multiplex mode.
Series
-F64
Note
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Series -30GM
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -30GM
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Model number Description Detection range Page
Comfort design (with RS 232 serial interface)
UC300-30GM-IUR2-V15 300 mm 66
Series
-F12
UC300-30GM-E6R2-K-V15 for installation in confined spaces 300 mm 68
UC300-30GM-E7R2-K-V15
UC300-30GM-IUR2-K-V15
UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15 500 mm 70
Series
-F42
UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC500-30GM-IUR2-V15
UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15 for installation in confined spaces 1000 mm 72
Series
-F43
UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15 with chemical resistant transducer coating 1000 mm 74
UCC1000-30GM-IUR2-V15
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15 2000 mm 76
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-F54
UC2000-30GM-IUR2-V15
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-T-V15 extended temperature range 2000 mm 78
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-T-V15
UC2000-30GM-IUR2-T-V15
Series
-F64
UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15 4000 mm 80
UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15 6000 mm 82
UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-D1
Basic design
UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15 Ultrasonic through beam barrier 4000 mm 84
Series
LUC
UB500-30GM-E4-V15 500 mm 86
UB500-30GM-E5-V15 500 mm
UB2000-30GM-E4-V15 2000 mm
UB2000-30GM-E5-V15 2000 mm
Double sheet
monitoring
UB4000-30GM-E4-V15 4000 mm 88
UB4000-30GM-E5-V15 4000 mm
UB6000-30GM-E4-V15 6000 mm
UB6000-30GM-E5-V15 6000 mm
Power supplies
Control units/
Ultrasonic sensors for external control units

UB500-30GM-H3-V1 Emitter/receiver 500 mm 90
UB2000-30GM-H3-V1 2000 mm
UB4000-30GM-H3-V1 4000 mm
UB6000-30GM-H3-V1 6000 mm
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UC300-30GM-IUR2-V15
-12GM
Series

Parameterisation interface for the application-specific adjustment of the
sensor setting via the service program ULTRA 2001
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Current and voltage output

Adjustable acoustic power and sensitivity
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC300-30GM-IUR2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Adjustment range 15 ... 300 mm !
Unusable area 0 ... 15 mm !
Series

-F43
Response delay 21 ms minimum !

63 ms factory setting
LED green permanent: Power-on !
flashing: Standby mode or TEACH-IN function object detected
LED yellow 1 permanent: object in evaluation range !
Series
-F54
flashing: TEACH-IN function

LED yellow 2 permanent: object in detection range !
LED red permanent: temperature/TEACH-IN plug not connected !
flashing: fault or TEACH-IN function object not detected
Temperature/TEACH-IN connector temperature compensation , TEACH-IN for evaluation range , output function setting !
Series
-F64

Power consumption 900 mW !
Output type 1 current output 4 ... 20 mA !
1 voltage output 0 ... 10 V
Repeat accuracy 0,1 % of full-scale value !
0,2 % of full-scale value
Series
Deviation of the characteristic curve !

-D1
Resolution evaluation range [mm]/4000, but 0,05 mm !

Load impedance current output: 500 Ohm !
Voltage output: 1000 Ohm
Temperature influence 2 % from full-scale value (with temperature compensation) !
0.2 %/K (without temperature compensation)
Series
LUC
Synchronisation bi-directional !
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
Double sheet
monitoring
Common mode operation 95 Hz !

Multiplex operation 95/n Hz, n = number of sensors !
Interface type RS 232, 9600 Bit/s , no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit !
Ambient temperature 0 ... 70 C (273 ... 343 K) !
Power supplies
Control units/

Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin !
Material
Housing stainless steel 1.4303 !

plastic parts PBT
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; polyurethane foam !
Mass 170 g !
Accessories
Dimensions UC300-30GM-IUR2-V15
-12GM
Series
M30x1.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
5
36
Series
-30GM
114
VariKont
Series
22
Series
-FP
LED
27.5
Temperature probe
Coded plug
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
(version IU)
Series
-F43
1 (BN)
+ UB
U 5 (GY)
Sync.
2 (WH)
0-10 V
4 (BK)
4-20 mA
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Programmed analogue output function

Distance Y [m]
Analogue function
Double sheet
monitoring
0.20
0.15 of evaluation of evaluation
0.10 20 mA/10 V
1 1) 4 mA/
0.05
2 0V
Power supplies
0.00
Control units/
20 mA/
-0.05
10 V
2)
-0.10
-0.15 4 mA/0 V
-0.20 20 mA/10 V
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/
Y
0V
Accessories
X
A1= 0 mm A2
Ultrasonic sensor UC300-30GM-...-K-V15
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

2 switch outputs freely adjustable
UC300-30GM-E6R2-K-V15, UC300-30GM-E7R2-K-V15
Series
-30GM
Hysteresis mode selectable

Window function can be selected
VariKont
Series

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC300-30GM-E6R2-K-V15
UC300-30GM-E7R2-K-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series

-F43

Response delay 21 ms minimum, 63 ms factory setting ! ! !
LED green permanent: Power-on, flashing: Standby mode or TEACH-IN function object detected ! ! !
LED yellow 1 permanent: object in evaluation range, flashing: TEACH-IN function !
permanent: switching state switch output 1, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! !
Series
-F54
LED yellow 2 permanent: object in detection range, flashing: TEACH-IN function !

LED red permanent: temperature/TEACH-IN plug not connected, flashing: fault or TEACH-IN function object not detected ! ! !
Temperature/TEACH-IN connector temperature compensation , TEACH-IN of the switch points , output function setting ! !
temperature compensation , TEACH-IN for evaluation range , output function setting !
Series

-F64
No-load supply current 50 mA ! !

Output type 1 current output 4 ... 20 mA, 1 voltage output 0 ... 10 V !
2 switch outputs npn, NO/NC, parameterisable !
2 switch outputs pnp, NO/NC, parameterisable !
Series
-D1

Range hysteresis 1 % of the adjusted operating range (default settings), programmable ! !
Series

LUC

Load impedance current output: 500 Ohm , voltage output: 1000 Ohm !
Temperature influence 2 % from full-scale value (with temperature compensation) ! ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Synchronisation bi-directional ! ! !
Interface type RS 232, 9600 Bit/s , no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !
Protection degree sensor head: IP67 ! ! !

connector sensor head/controller unit: IP52
Material
Housing stainless steel 1.4303, plastic parts PBT ! ! !
Accessories
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; polyurethane foam ! ! !

Mass 210 g ! !
260 g !
Dimensions UC300-30GM-...-K-V15
-12GM
Series
5 5
Temperature probe Temperature probe

Coded plug 36 Coded plug 36
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M30x1.5
M30x1.5
LED LED
22 22
Series
-30GM
27.5 112 27.5 93.5
4 4
VariKont
1.5 m 1.5 m
Series
24 24
M18x1
M18x1
26 26
Series
-FP
output version -IUE2 output version -E6R2 and -E7R2
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Standard symbol/Connection: Standard symbol/Connection: Standard symbol/Connection:

(version E6, pnp) (version IU) (version E7, npn)
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
5 (GY) + UB 2 (WH)
Sync. U 5 (GY)
U Switch output 1
U 2 (WH) Sync. 4 (BK)
Switch output 2
Switch output 1 2 (WH)
4 (BK) 0-10 V 5 (GY)
Switch output 2 4 (BK) Sync.
3 (BU) 4-20 mA 3 (BU) - UB
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Characteristic response curve Programmed analogue output function Possible operating modes
1. Switch point mode
Distance Y [m]
Analogue function When A1 < A2, both switch outputs are activated as
0.20 N.O. contacts.
Series
0.15 of evaluation of evaluation Switch point 1 Switch point 2
-D1
0.10 20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
1 1) 4 mA/
0.05
2 0V A 2 (N.O.)
0.00 Switch output 2
20 mA/
Series
LUC
-0.05
10 V
2) When A1 > A2, both switch outputs are activated as
-0.10 N.C. contacts.
-0.15 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
Double sheet
20 mA/10 V
monitoring
-0.20
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm To exchange the switching distances is of no effect.
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Control units/
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
To exchange the switching distances is of no effect.
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
Accessories
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
output version -IUE2 output version -E6R2 and -E7R2
Ultrasonic sensor UC500-30GM-...-V15
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-30GM

UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15
VariKont
Series

UC500-30GM-IUR2-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15
UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC500-30GM-IUR2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

Focke Ident-Nr. 8 763 161 !
Series

-F54

Series
-F64

Series

-D1

Series
LUC
Deviation of the characteristic curve 0,2 % of full-scale value !

Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !

Material
Accessories
Mass 140 g ! !
170 g !
Dimensions UC500-30GM-...-V15
-12GM
Series
M30x1.5 M30x1.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
5
5
36 36
94
Series
-30GM
114
22
VariKont
Series
22
LED
27.5
Temperature probe
Coded plug
LED
27.5
Series
-FP
Temperature probe
Coded plug
Series
-F12
output versions -E6R2 and -E7R 2 output version -IUR2
Series
-F42

(version E6, pnp) (version IU) (version E7, npn)
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
5 (GY) + UB 2 (WH)
Sync. U 5 (GY)
U Switch output 1
U 2 (WH) Sync. 4 (BK)
Switch output 2
4 (BK) 0-10 V 5 (GY)
Switch output 2 4 (BK) Sync.
3 (BU) 4-20 mA 3 (BU) - UB
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
0.20 N.O. contacts.
Series
-D1
0.10 20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
1 1) 4 mA/
0.05
2 0V A 2 (N.O.)
0.00 Switch output 2
20 mA/
Series
-0.05
LUC
10 V
-0.10 N.C. contacts.
-0.15 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-0.20
monitoring
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Switch output 1
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
output version -IU R2 output versions -E6R2 and -E7R2
Ultrasonic sensor UC1000-30GM-..R2-K-V15
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

Series
-30GM

UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15
UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15
VariKont
Series

UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 80 ... 1000 mm ! !

Adjustment range 120 ... 1000 mm ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 80 mm ! !
Series
-F43
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! !

Transducer frequency approx. 180 kHz ! !
Response delay 65 ms minimum, 195 ms factory setting ! !
LED green permanent: Power-on, flashing: Standby mode or TEACH-IN function object detected ! !
Series
permanent: switching state switch output 1, flashing: TEACH-IN function !

-F54

LED red permanent: temperature/TEACH-IN plug not connected, flashing: fault or TEACH-IN function object not detected ! !
Temperature/TEACH-IN connector temperature compensation , TEACH-IN of the switch points , output function setting !
Series
-F64

Series

-D1
Voltage drop 2,5 V !

Repeat accuracy 0,1 % of full-scale value ! !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the adjusted operating range (default settings), programmable !
Switching frequency 2,5 Hz !
Series
LUC

Load impedance current output: 500 Ohm, voltage output: 1000 Ohm !
Temperature influence 2 % from full-scale value (with temperature compensation) ! !
Double sheet
Synchronisation bi-directional ! !
monitoring

Common mode operation 30 Hz ! !
Multiplex operation 30/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
Interface type RS 232, 9600 Bit/s , no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! !

Protection degree sensor head: IP67 ! !
connector sensor head/controller unit: IP52

Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! !
Material
Housing stainless steel 1.4303, plastic parts PBT ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; polyurethane foam ! !
Accessories
Mass 210 g !
260 g !
Dimensions UC1000-30GM-..R2-K-V15
-12GM
Series
5
Temperature probe
Coded plug 36
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M30x1.5
Series
-30GM
LED
22
27.5 112
VariKont
Series
5
1.5 m 36
Series
-FP
M30x1.5
Series
-F12
26
Series
-F42
Standard symbol/Connection: Standard symbol/Connection:

(version E6, pnp) (version IU)
Series
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) + UB
Sync. U 5 (GY)
U 2 (WH) Sync.
4 (BK) 0-10 V
Switch output 2 4 (BK)
3 (BU)
- UB 4-20 mA
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
0.6 N.O. contacts.
Series
-D1
20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
0.2 Switch output 1
1) 4 mA/
0.0 0V A 2 (N.O.)
2 1 Switch output 2
-0.2 20 mA/
Series
10 V
LUC
-0.4 2) When A1 > A2, both switch outputs are activated as
N.C. contacts.
-0.6 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-0.8
monitoring
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
Power supplies
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
output version -IUR2 output version -E6R2
Ultrasonic sensor UCC1000-30GM-..R2-V15
-12GM
Series
High chemical resistance through teflon-coated transducer surface

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15
VariKont
Series
UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15
UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

120 ... 1000 mm !
Series

-F43

Response delay 65 ms minimum, 195 ms factory setting ! !
LED green permanent: Power-on, flashing: Standby mode or TEACH-IN function object detected ! !
Series
-F54

LED red permanent: temperature/TEACH-IN plug not connected, flashing: fault or TEACH-IN function object not detected ! !
Temperature/TEACH-IN connector temperature compensation , TEACH-IN of the switch points , output function setting !
Series

-F64

Series
-D1

Range hysteresis 1 % of the adjusted operating range (default settings), programmable !
Series

LUC

Temperature influence 2 % from full-scale value (with temperature compensation) ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Synchronisation bi-directional ! !
Interface type RS 232, 9600 Bit/s , no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Ambient temperature 0 ... 70 C (273 ... 343 K) ! !

Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! !
Housing stainless steel 1.4303, plastic parts PBT ! !
Mass 140 g !
Accessories
170 g !
Dimensions UCC1000-30GM-..R2-V15
-12GM
Series
32 32
-18GK/-18GM
13.5
13.5
Series
5
5
96
Series
-30GM
36 36
115
VariKont
Series
LED
Temperature probe
Coded plug
LED
M30x1.5
Series
Temperature probe
-FP
Coded plug
M30x1.5
Series
-F12
output version -E6R2 output version -IUR2
Series
-F42

(version E6, pnp) (version IU)
Series
-F43
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) + UB
Sync. U 5 (GY)
U 2 (WH) Sync.
4 (BK) 0-10 V
Switch output 2 4 (BK)
3 (BU)
- UB 4-20 mA
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Programmed switching output function Programmed analogue output function
Angle [degrees] Analogue function

Double sheet
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 Position of insert
monitoring
Switch output functions

20
of evaluation of evaluation
20 mA/10 V
Switch point 1 Switch point 2
10 A 1 (N.O.) 1) 4 mA/
Switch output 1 0V
E2
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 2 1
0 A 2 (N.O.)
20 mA/
Switch output 2
10 V
0.5 -10
2)
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
4 mA/0 V
1.0
-20
E3
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
1.5 -30
2.0 2.5 3.0
Distance [m]
Accessories

output version -E6R2 output version -IUR2
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-30GM

UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15
VariKont
Series

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

Series

-F54

Series
-F64

Series

-D1

Switching frequency 2,5 Hz ! !
Series
LUC

Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !

Material
Accessories
Mass 140 g ! !
170 g !
-12GM
Series
M30x1.5 M30x1.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
5
5
36 36
94
Series
-30GM
114
22
VariKont
Series
22
LED
27.5
Temperature probe
Coded plug
LED
27.5
Series
-FP
Temperature probe
Coded plug
Series
output versions -E6R2 and -E7R2 output version -IUR2
-F12
Series
-F42

(version E6, pnp) (version E7, npn) (version IU)
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) 2 (WH) + UB
Sync. U Switch output 1 U 5 (GY)
U 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
Switch output 2 Sync.
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 0-10 V
Switch output 2 Sync. 4 (BK)
3 (BU) 3 (BU) - UB 4-20 mA
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
0.6 N.O. contacts.
Series
-D1
20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
0.2 Switch output 1
1) 4 mA/
0.0 0V A 2 (N.O.)
2 1 Switch output 2
-0.2 20 mA/
Series
LUC
10 V
N.C. contacts.
-0.6 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-0.8
monitoring
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Switch output 1
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
output version -IUR2 output versions -E6R2 and -E7R2
Ultrasonic sensor UC2000-30GM-...-T-V15
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

UC2000-30GM-E6R2-T-V15, UC2000-30GM-E7R2-T-V15
Series
-30GM

VariKont
Series

UC2000-30GM-IUR2-T-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-T-V15
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-T-V15
UC2000-30GM-IUR2-T-V1 5
Model number
Series
-F42

Series

-F43

Series
-F54

LED red permanent: temperature/TEACH-IN plug not connected , flashing: fault or TEACH-IN function object not detected ! ! !
Series

-F64

Series
-D1

Series

LUC

Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !

Material
Accessories
Mass 180 g ! !
210 g !
Dimensions UC2000-30GM-...-T-V15
-12GM
Series
40 40
-18GK/-18GM
25
25
Series
5
108
Series
-30GM
128
36 36
VariKont
Series
22
LED
22
27.5
Temperature probe
Series
Coded plug
-FP
LED
27.5
M30x1.5
Temperature probe
Coded plug
M30x1.5
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) 2 (WH) + UB
U 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 0-10 V
3 (BU) 3 (BU) - UB 4-20 mA
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
0.6 N.O. contacts.
Series
-D1
20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
0.2 Switch output 1
1) 4 mA/
0.0 0V A 2 (N.O.)
2 1 Switch output 2
-0.2 20 mA/
Series
LUC
10 V
N.C. contacts.
-0.6 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-0.8
monitoring
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Switch output 1
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-30GM

UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15
VariKont
Series

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15
UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

Series

-F54

Series
-F64

Series

-D1

Series
LUC

Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !

Material
Accessories
Mass 180 g ! !
210 g !
-12GM
Series
40 40
-18GK/-18GM
25
25
Series
5
108
Series
-30GM
128
36 36
VariKont
Series
22
LED
22
27.5
Temperature probe
Series
Coded plug
-FP
LED
27.5
M30x1.5
Temperature probe
Coded plug
M30x1.5
Series
-F12
output version -IUR2 output versions -E6R2 and E7R2
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) 2 (WH) + UB
U 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 0-10 V
3 (BU) 3 (BU) - UB 4-20 mA
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
1.5 N.O. contacts.
of evaluation of evaluation Switch point 1 Switch point 2
Series
1.0
-D1
20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
0.5 1) 4 mA/
2 1 0V A 2 (N.O.)
0.0 Switch output 2
20 mA/
Series
LUC
-0.5 10 V
N.C. contacts.
-1.0
4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-1.5
monitoring
0,0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5
Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Switch output 1
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Series

UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Series
-30GM

UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15
UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15, UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15
VariKont
Series

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15
UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

Series

-F54

Series
-F64

Series

-D1

Series
LUC

Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! !

Material
Accessories
Mass 270 g ! !
280 g !
-12GM
Series
73 73
-18GK/-18GM
19
19
Series
32.5
32.5
5
Series
-30GM
112
132
36 36
VariKont
Series
22
22
LED
27.5
Series
-FP
Temperature probe
Coded plug
LED
27.5
M30x1.5
temperature probe
coded plug
M30x1.5
Series
-F12
output versions -E6R2 and -E7R2 output version -IUR2
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN)
-F43
1 (BN) + UB + UB 1 (BN)
5 (GY) 2 (WH) + UB
U 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 0-10 V
3 (BU) 3 (BU) - UB 4-20 mA
- UB 3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Diagrams
Series
-F64
Distance Y [m]
1.5 N.O. contacts.
of evaluation of evaluation Switch point 1 Switch point 2
Series
1.0
-D1
1 20 mA/10 V A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
0.5 1) 4 mA/
2 0V A 2 (N.O.)
0.0 Switch output 2
20 mA/
Series
LUC
-0.5 10 V
N.C. contacts.
-1.0 4 mA/0 V A 1 (N.C.)
Switch output 1
20 mA/10 V
Double sheet
-1.5
monitoring
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Distance X [m]
3) 4 mA/ A2 (N.C.)
Y
0V Switch output 2
X
2. Window mode
A1= 0 mm A2
A 1 (N.O.)
Power supplies
Switch output 1
Control units/
A2 (N.C.)
Switch output 2
3. Hysteresis mode
A 1 (N.O.)
Switch output 1
A2 (N.C.)
Accessories
Switch output 2
Through-beam ultrasonic barrier UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15
-12GM
Series
Reliable detection of transparent materials

-18GK/-18GM
Small angle of divergence

Series
Protective functions
Adjustable acoustic power
Adjustable switch-on delay
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
U
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 0 ... 4000 mm , distance emitter-receiver 500 mm ... 4000 mm !

Through-beam mode Single path ultrasonic switch !
Transducer frequency 85 kHz !
Reference target receiver !
Series
-F43
LED green alignment aid !

OFF: no ultrasonic signal
flashing: uncertain area
ON: positive reception
LED yellow switching state !
Series

-F54
No-load supply current 35 mA emitter !

25 mA receiver
Output type 2 switch outputs pnp, normally open/closed (complementary) !
Rated operational current 200 mA !
Series
15 Hz
-F64
Switching frequency !
Switch-on delay 100 ... 3000 ms !
C-UL listed: 57M3, IND CONT. EQ., "Powered by Class 2 Power Source"
Series
-D1

Material
Housing brass, nickel-plated, plastic components PBT !
Mass 160 g each sensor !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15
-12GM
Series
Dimensions:
Threaded pipe M30x1.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
40
Series
-30GM
25 22
90
VariKont
Series
Emitter: Receiver:
Dual-LED
LED green green/yellow
Series
-FP
internal distance regulator Potentiometer
Plug connector Plug connector
ON delay
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
(version A2, pnp)
Series
-F43
Receiver:
1 (BN)
+UB
2 (WH)
U 4 (BK)
N.O. N.C.
5 n.c.
3 (BU) -UB
Series
-F54
Emitter:
1 (BN)
+UB
2 (WH) 10k
Series
U
-F64
4 (BK)
5 n.c.
3 (BU) -UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves

Angle [degrees]
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 0
0.5
1.0 -10
1.5
-20
2.0
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Distance [m]
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-30GM-..-V15
-12GM
Series
Switch output
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
Deactivation option
Insensitive to compressed air
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-30GM-E4-V15
UB2000-30GM-E5-V15
UB500-30GM-E4-V15
UB500-30GM-E5-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

80 ... 2000 mm ! !
50 ... 500 mm ! !
Series

-F43
0 ... 80 mm ! !
approx. 380 kHz ! !
Response delay approx. 150 ms ! !
Series
-F54
approx. 50 ms ! !
LED green permanent: Power-on ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanent: switching state switch output ! ! ! !
LED red normal operation: "fault" ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
TEACH-IN function: no object detected

Output type 1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
Series
Rated operational current 200 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! ! ! !

-D1
Voltage drop 2,5 V ! ! ! !

Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! ! ! !
3,3 Hz ! !
Series
LUC
Temperature influence < 2 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !

Double sheet
monitoring
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
95 Hz
Power supplies
! !
Control units/

95/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !

Accessories
Material
Housing brass, nickel-plated, plastic components PBT ! ! ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; polyurethane foam ! ! ! !
Mass 135 g ! !
140 g ! !
Dimensions UB...-30GM-..-V15
-12GM
Series
M30x1.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
5
36
Series
-30GM
94
VariKont
Series
22
LED
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Standard symbol/Connections: Standard symbol/Connections:

(version E4, npn) (version E5, pnp)
Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH)
Switch output Teaching input
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY)
Teaching input Synchronous
5 (GY) 4 (BK)
Synchronous Switch output
3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB
Series
Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2. Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2.
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Characteristic response curve Programmed switching output function
1. Window mode, normally open function
Distance Y [m] Distance Y [m]
Double sheet

monitoring
0.20 0.6
A1 A2
0.15 0.4
2. Window mode, normally closed function
0.10
0.2 A2 < A1:
1
0.05 A2 A1
0.0
2
Power supplies

Control units/
0.00 1
-0.2 A1 -> :
-0.05
-0.4 A2
-0.10

-0.15 -0.6 A2 -> :
-0.20 -0.8 A1
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Y Distance X [m] Y Distance X [m]
Accessories

UB500-30GM-... UB2000-30GM-...
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-30GM-..-V15
-12GM
Series
Switch output
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
Deactivation option
Insensitive to compressed air
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB4000-30GM-E4-V15
UB4000-30GM-E5-V15
UB6000-30GM-E4-V15
UB6000-30GM-E5-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

350 ... 6000 mm ! !
400 ... 6000 mm ! !
Series

-F43
0 ... 350 mm ! !
approx. 85 kHz ! !
Series
-F54
approx. 650 ms ! !
LED green permanent: Power-on ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanent: switching state switch output ! ! ! !
LED red normal operation: "fault" ! ! ! !
Series
-F64

Output type 1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
Series

-D1

Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! ! ! !
1,5 Hz ! !
Series
LUC
Temperature influence < 2 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !

Double sheet
monitoring
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
7 Hz
Power supplies
! !
Control units/

7/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !

Accessories
Material
Mass 180 g ! !
250 g ! !
Dimensions UB...-30GM-..-V15
-12GM
Series
40 73
-18GK/-18GM
19
25
Series
32.5
5
Series
-30GM
108
112
36
36
VariKont
Series
22
22
LED
LED
M30x1.5
M30x1.5
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
UB4000-30GM-... UB6000-30GM-...
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH)
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY)
5 (GY) 4 (BK)
3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet

monitoring
1.5 1.5
A1 A2
1.0 1.0
2. Window mode, normally closed function
1 A2 < A1:
0.5 0.5
A2 A1
2 1 2
Power supplies

Control units/
0.0 0.0
A1 -> :
-0.5 -0.5 A2
-1.0 4. One switch point, normally closed function

-1.0
A2 -> :
-1.5 -1.5 A1
0,0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Accessories

UB4000-30GM-... UB6000-30GM-...
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-30GM-H3-V1
-12GM
Series
Separate evaluation
Direct detection mode
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-30GM-H3-V1
UB4000-30GM-H3-V1
UB6000-30GM-H3-V1
UB500-30GM-H3-V1
Model number
Series
-F42

30 ... 500 mm !
350 ... 6000 mm !
80 ... 2000 mm !
Series
-F43
240 ... 4000 mm !

400 ... 6000 mm !
50 ... 500 mm !
Unusable area !
0 ... 200 mm 1)
1) !
0 ... 30 mm
Series
-F54
!
0 ... 350 mm 1)
!
0 ... 80 mm 1)
Transducer frequency approx. [kHz] 380 180 85 65
Series
-F64

Output type 1 pulse output for echo run time, short-circuit proof ! ! ! !
open collector pnp with pulldown resistor = 22 kOhm
level 0 (no echo): -UB, level 1 (echo detected): (+UB-2 V)
Series
Temperature influence the echo propagation time: 0,17 % / K ! ! ! !

-D1
Input type 1 pulse input for transmitter pulse (clock) ! ! ! !

0-level (active): < 5 V (UB > 15 V), 1-level (inactive): > 10 V ... +UB (UB > 15 V)
0-level (active): < 1/3 UB (10 V < UB < 15 V), 1-level (inactive): > 2/3 UB ... +UB (10 V < UB < 15 V)
Pulse length !
20 ... 300 s (typ. 200 s) 2)
40 ... 600 s (typ. 500 s) 2) !
Series
LUC
5 ... 100 s (typ. 50 s) 2) !
50 ... 700 s (typ. 500 s) 2) !

Pause length 50 x pulse length ! ! ! !
Double sheet
Impedance 10 kOhm internal connected to +UB ! ! ! !

monitoring
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! ! ! !
Power supplies

Control units/

Mass 140 g ! !
180 g !
250 g !
Fun ction
The sensing range is determined in the downstream evaluation electronics (e. g. the units UH3-KHD2-4E5, UH3-KHD2-4I or UH3-T1-KT). PLC modules or other
existing evaluation units can also be substituted for these units offered by Pepperl+F uchs.
Accessories
The object distance in pulse-echo mode is obtained from the echo time.
1)
The unusable area (blind range) BR depends on the pulse duration Ti .
The unusable area reaches a minimum with the shortest pulse duration.
2)
The sensors detection range depends on the pulse duration Ti.
With pulse duration < typical pulse duration, the sensors detection range may be reduced.
Dimensions UB...-30GM-H3-V1
-12GM
Series
M30 x 1.5 40 74
-18GK/-18GM
19
25
32.5
Series
60
74
80
80
90
5
95
100
105
110
36
Series
-30GM
36
M12 x 1
VariKont
Series
M12 x 1
M12 x 1
M30 x 1.5
M30 x 1.5
Series
-FP
UB500-... and UB2000-... UB4000-... UB6000-...
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB
2 (WH)
U Clock
4 (BK)
Echo
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
2 = Emitter pulse input
-F54
4 = Echo propagation time output
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves
Distance Y [m] Distance Y [m] Distance Y [m]
1.5 4
Double sheet
3
monitoring
Distance Y [m]
0.3 3
1
2
0.2 2
0.5 1
0.1 1
1
0 0 0 -0
2 2 1 2 1 2 1
-0.1 -1
-0.5 -1
Power supplies
Control units/
-0.2 -2
-2
-1
-0.3 -3
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
-3
-4
Distance X [m] -1.5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Distance X [m] Distance X [m] Distance X [m]
Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm
Accessories
U B500-30GM-H3-V1 UB2000-30GM-H3-V1 UB4000-30GM-H3-V1 UB6000-30GM-H3-V1
-12GM
Series
UC...-30GM-IUR2-..-V15 (with 2 analogue outputs)

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Description of the sensor functions

This ultrasonic sensor features a four-pole temperature/TEACH-IN plug, that can be connected in four different positions. The-
se have the following significance.
Plug position Meaning
Series
-30GM
A1 TEACH-IN evaluation limit A1

A2 TEACH-IN evaluation limit A2
E2/E3 Rising/falling ramp/output characteristic of
the voltage output by zero point
VariKont
Series
T Temperature compensation
Description of the TEACH-IN procedure

TEACH-IN the evaluation limits 1 or 2
Cut supply voltage
Series
-FP
Remove TEACH-IN plug

Restore supply voltage (Reset)
Set object to desired switching point
Series
-F12
Plug and remove the TEACH-IN plug in pos. A1 or A2. This teaches the evaluation limits A1 or A2.
Caution: Removing the temperature/TEACH-IN plug, the values of the object position will be adopted.
The TEACH-IN procedure is controlled with the LED. The green LED flashes, when object is detected, the red LED flashes
when no object is detected.
Series
-F42
Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. T. This completes the TEACH-IN procedure and saves the distance.
The sensor works in normal mode
TEACH-IN the analogue function
Series
Cut supply voltage

-F43

Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. E2/E3. By multiple plugging, three different modes of operation can be set in cyclical se-
Series
-F54
quence:
1) r ising ramp, LED A2 flashes,
2) falling ramp, LED A1 flashes,
3) zero line, LED A1 and A2 flash
Series
Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. T. This completes the TEACH-IN procedure and saves the mode of operation.
-F64
The sensor works in normal mode

Note: If the temperature/TEACH-IN plug has not been plugged in within 5 minutes in position T, the sensor will return to normal
mode (with the latest permanent stored values) without temperature compensation.
Series
Synchronisation
-D1
The sensor features a synchronisation input for the suppression of mutual interference. If this input is not used, the sensor will operate using an internally
generated clock rate. It can be synchronised by applying a square wave voltage. A falling edge leads to the transmission of a single ultrasonic pulse. A
low level 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in t he normal operation of the sensor.
Series
A high level > 1 s will result in the standby mode of the sensor (indicator green LED). The out puts pause in the lat est status.
LUC
Synchronisation cannot be performed during TEACH-IN and vice versa.

Mult iple operating modes are possible:
Double sheet
1. Two t o five sensors can be synchronised by interconnecting their synchronisation inputs. In this case, the sensors alternately transmit ultrasonic pulses.
monitoring
4. A high level at the synchronisation input disables the sensor.
The response time increases when the sensor is synchronised, because the synchronisation increases the measurement cycle time.
Power supplies
Control units/
Note:
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input has to be connected to ground (0V) or the sensor has to be operated via a V1 cable
connector (4-pin).
Default setting
A1: unusable area
Accessories

-12GM
Series
LED Displays/Analogue output
-18GK/-18GM
Displays in dependence on operating Dual Dual- LED LED analogue out-
Series
mode LED LED yellow A1 yellow A2 put
green red
TEACH-IN evaluation limit A1 unchanged
object detected flashing off flashing off
object not detected off flashing flashing off
Series
-30GM
TEACH-IN evaluation limit A2 unchanged
object detected flashing off off flashing
object not detected off flashing off flashing
TEACH-IN mode of operation (E2/E3) unchanged
VariKont
Series
rising ramp on off off flashing
falling ramp on off flashing off
zero line on off flashing (syn- flashing (syn-
chronised) chronised)
Normal mode on, if target in on, if target in analogue value
Series
-FP
temperature compensated on off evaluation detection range
plug pulled/shorted off on range
Standby flashing off previous state previous st ate unchanged
Interference (e.g. compressed air) off flashing previous state previous st ate unchanged or
Series
error value
-F12
LED-Window RS 232-connection
LED Dual-LED LED Groove V15-plug connector
Series
yellow green/red yellow
-F42
(M12x1)
Temperature/program
connector
(PC connection via inter- 4 1
E2 E3 face cable UC-30GM-R2)
3 2
1: TXD
A1 A2 2: RXD
Series
Evaluation limit 1 Evaluation limit 2 3: not used
-F43
LED-window
"Power on"/Disturbance 4: GND
Note on communication with the UC-30GM-R2 interface cable

The UC-30GM-R2 interface cable allows for communication with the ultrasonic sensor using the ULTRA 2001 service program.
The cable creates a connection between the PC-internal RS 232 interface and the plug-in connection for the temperature/pro-
Series
-F54
gram plug on the sensor. When setting up the connection on the sensor, make certain the plug is lined up correctly; otherwise
no communication will be possible. The protrusion of the round plug must be inserted into the groove of the plug connection
on the sensor side and not into the arrow symbol on the sensor.
Adjustable parameter with service program ULTRA 2001
Series
-F64
Evaluation limits A1 and A2
Rising/falling ramp/zero line
Mode of operation
Series
Sonic speed
-D1
Temperature offset (The inherent temperature-rise of the sensor can be considered in the temperature compensation)
Expansion of the unusable area (for suppression of unusable area echoes)
Reduction of the detection range (for suppression of remote range echoes)
Series
LUC
Time of measuring cycle

Acoustic power (interference of the burst duration)
Sensitivity
Double sheet
monitoring
Behaviour of the sensor in case of echo loss

Behaviour of the sensor in case of a fault
Average formation via an allowed number of measuring cycles
Selection of the parameter set, RS 232 or manually.
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
-12GM
Series
UC...-30GM-... , output versions -E6R2 and -E7R2 (with 2 switch outputs)

-18GK/-18GM
Series

This ultrasonic sensor features a four-pole temperature/TEACH-IN plug, that can be connected in four different positions. The-
se have the following significance.
Plug position Meaning
Series
-30GM
A1 TEACH-IN switching point A1

A2 TEACH-IN switching point A2
E2/E3 Switching: 2 independent switching points/window mode/hysteresis
mode
VariKont
Series
T Temperature compensation
Description of the TEACH-IN procedure

TEACH-IN of switching points 1 or 2
Series
-FP
Cut supply voltage

Series
-F12
Set object to desired switching point

Plug and remove the TEACH-IN plug in pos. A1 or A2. Switching point A1 or A2 is taught.
Caution: Removing the temperature/TEACH-IN plug, the values of the object position will be adopted.
The TEACH-IN procedure is controlled with the LED. The green LED flashes, when object is detected, the red LED flashes
Series
-F42
when no object is detected.

Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. T. The TEACH-IN procedure is completed, the sensor is working in normal mode.
TEACH-IN of switching function
Cut supply voltage
Series
-F43

Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. E2/E3. By multiple plugging, three different modes of operation can be set in cyclical se-
Series
quence:
-F54
switching point mode, LED A1 is flashing,

window mode, LED A2 is flashing
hysteresis mode, LED A1 and A2 are flashing
Series
Connect TEACH-IN plug in pos. T. The TEACH-IN procedure is completed, the sensor is working in normal mode.
-F64
Note: If the temperature/TEACH-IN plug has not been plugged in within 5 minutes in position T, the sensor will return to normal
mode (with the latest permanent stored values) without temperature compensation.
Synchronisation
Series
The sensor features a synchronisation input for the suppression of mutual interference. If this input is not used, the sensor will operate using an internally
-D1
generated clock rate. It can be synchronised by applying a square wave voltage. A falling edge leads to the transmission of a single ultrasonic pulse. A
low level 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in t he normal operation of the sensor.
A high level > 1 s will result in the standby mode of the sensor (indicator green LED). The out puts pause in the lat est status.
Series
Synchronisation cannot be performed during TEACH-IN and vice versa.

LUC
Multiple operating modes are possible

1. Two t o five sensors can be synchronised by interconnecting their synchronisation inputs. In this case, the sensors alternately transmit ultrasonic pulses.
Double sheet
monitoring
4. A high level at the synchronisation input disables the sensor.
The response time increases when the sensor is synchronised, because the synchronisation increases the measurement cycle time.
Note:
Power supplies
Control units/
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input has to be connected to ground (0V) or the sensor has to be operated via a V1 cable
connector (4-pin).
Default setting
A1: unusable area

Accessories
-12GM
Series
LED Displays
-18GK/-18GM
Displays in dependence on operating Dual LED LED LED LED
Series
mode green red yellow A1 yellow A2
TEACH-IN of swit ching point A1
object detected flashing off flashing off
no object detected off flashing flashing off
Series
-30GM
TEACH-IN switching point A2
object detected flashing off off flashing
no object detected off flashing off flashing
TEACH-IN mode of operation (E2/E3)
VariKont
Series
two independent switching points on off flashing off
window mode on off off flashing
Hysteresis mode on off flashing flashing
Normal mode
Series
temperature compensated on off switching state A1 switching state A2
-FP
plug pulled or shorted off on switching state A1 switching state A2
Interference (e.g. compressed air) off flashing last or defined condi- last or defined condi-
tion tion
Series
-F12
Standby flashes off previous state previous state
LED ON indicates closed switch output.
Series
-F42
LED-Window RS 232-connection
LED Dual-LED LED Groove V15-plug connector
yellow green/red yellow (M12x1)
Temperature/program
connector
(PC connection via inter- 4 1
E2 E3 face cable UC-30GM-R2)
Series
-F43
3 2
1: TXD
2: RXD
A1 A2 3: not used
Switch output 1 Switch output 2 LED-window
"Power on"/Disturbance 4: GND
Series
-F54
Note on communication with the UC-30GM-R2 interface cable
The UC-30GM-R2 interface cable allows for communication with the ultrasonic sensor using the ULTRA 2001 service program.
The cable creates a connection between the PC-internal RS 232 interface and the plug-in connection for the temperature/pro-
gram plug on the sensor. When setting up the connection on the sensor, make certain the plug is lined up correctly; otherwise
no communication will be possible. The protrusion of the round plug must be inserted into the groove of the plug connection
Series
-F64
on the sensor side and not into the arrow symbol on the sensor.
Adjustable parameter with service program ULTRA 2001
Switching point 1 and 2
Series
NO/NC function
-D1
Mode of operation
Sonic speed
Temperature offset (The inherent temperature-rise of the sensor can be considered in the temperature compensation)
Series
LUC
Expansion of the unusable area (for suppression of unusable area echoes)

Reduction of the detection range (for suppression of remote range echoes)
Time of measuring cycle
Double sheet
monitoring
Acoustic power (interference of the burst duration)

Sensitivity
Behaviour of the sensor in case of echo loss
Behaviour of the sensor in case of a fault
Power supplies
Control units/
Average formation via an allowed number of measuring cycles

On/off-delay
Switching hysteresis
Selection of the parameter set, RS 232 or manually.

Accessories
-12GM
Series
UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15 (through beam type)

-18GK/-18GM
Series

Remote potentiometer
The distance range of the through-beam ultrasonic barrier can be adjusted with the potentiometer integrated in the emitter, or
via a remote potentiometer connected to the emitter.
Series
-30GM
The remote potentiometer simplifies the adjustment of the distance range if the sensors are installed in an inaccessible location.
A 10 k/0.3 W potentiometer serves as the remote potentiometer. The connection is realised using the plug connector pins 2
and 4 of the emitter (see: Electrical Connection).
The following distance ranges can be set using the remote potentiometer:
VariKont
Series
Adjustment of the internal distance regu- Distance range adjustable via remote potenti-
lator ometer
Minimum switching point 0 m ... 2 m
Maximum switching point 2 m ... 4 m
Series
When operating without a remote potentiometer, the plug connector pins 2 and 4 must be bridged.
-FP
Alignment
When adjusting the emitter and receiver, take care to align them as precisely as possible.
Angular tolerance: < 2
s < 5 mm
Series
maximum offset:
-F12
A through-beam ultrasonic barrier consists of a single emitter and a single receiver.

Caution
Mount or replace emitter and receiver only in pairs. Both devices are optimally matched to each other by the manufacturer.
Series
-F42
UB...-30GM-... , output types -E4 and -E5 (with 1 switch output)

Series
Synchronisation
-F43
External synchronisation:
Series
-F54
the falling edge of a synchronisation pulse. Two operating modes are available:
Internal synchronisation:
Series
-F64
power is applied, these sensors will operate in multiplex mode.
The state of the switch output will not change until the switching threshold has been exceeded five times as an average of the
five measurements is determined internally. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in the normal operation
of the sensor.
Series
-D1
Synchronisation cannot be performed during TEACH-IN and vice versa. The sensors must be operated in an unsynchronised
manner to teach the switching point.
A high level at the synchronisation input disables the sensor.
Note:
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
voltage -U B or +UB to the TEACH-IN input. The supply voltage must be applied to the TEACH-IN input for at least 1 s. LEDs
indicate whether the sensor has recognised the target during the TEACH-IN procedure. Evaluation limit A1 is taught with -UB ,
A2 with +UB . For simple setting the switching point and the output functions the programming unit UB-PROG2 can be used.
Five different output functions can be set:
Power supplies

Control units/

3. One switching point, normally-open function
4. One switching point, normally-closed function
Accessories
-12GM
Series
Set target to near switching point
-18GK/-18GM
Series
TEACH-IN switching point A1 with -UB
Set target to far switching point
TEACH-IN switching point A2 with +UB
Series
-30GM
Set target to far switching point
VariKont
Series
TEACH-IN one switching point, normally-open function
Series
-FP
Cover sensor with hand or remove all objects from sensing range
TEACH-IN one switching point, normally-closed function
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Default setting
A1: unusable area
Series
-F54
LED Displays
Displays in dependence on operating Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
mode
Series
TEACH-IN switching point
-F64
Object detected flashes off flashes
No object detected off flashes flashes
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) off flashes off
Normal operation on off switching state
Series
-D1
Interference off flashes previous state
LED-Window
Series
Dual-LED LED
LUC
green/red yellow
Double sheet
monitoring
Switch output
"Power on"/Disturbance
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series VariKont
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
UC500+U9+E6+R2 Switching output + RS 232-interface 500 mm 100
UC500+U9+IUE2+R2 Analogue output + RS 232-interface
UC3000+U9+E6+R2 Switching output + RS 232-interface 3000 mm 102
Series
-F54
UC3000+U9+E7+R2
UC3000+U9+IUE0+R2 Analogue output + 1 Switching output +
UC3000+U9+IUE2+R2 RS 232-interface
UJ3000+U1+8B+RS 8 Bit parallel-interface 3000 mm 104
Series
-F64
UBE6000+U1+SA2 Through beam ultrasonic barrier 6000 mm 106
UB500+U9+H3 for exter nal control/evaluation units 500 mm 108
UB3000+U9+H3 3000 mm
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UC500+U9+...+R2
-12GM
Series
Serial interface
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Absolute polarity reversal protection

Parameterisable with ULTRA 2001
1 Analogue output, load-dependent voltage or current + 1 switch output
UC500+U9+IUE2+R2
Series
-30GM
2 independent switch outputs

UC500+U9+E6+R2
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC500+U9+ IUE2+R2
UC500+U9+ E6+ R2
Model number
Series
-F42

Response delay for factory setting ! !
Series
minimal (EM; NONE): 20 ms (2 measuring cycles)

-F43
default (EM, MXN, 5, 2): 40 ms (4 measuring cycles)

dynamic (EM, DYN): 30 ms (3 measuring cycles)
LED yellow switching state switch output !
switching state switch output 1 !
switching state switch output 2
Series
-F54
LED red/green permanently green : "Power on", flashes during standby operation ! !
red flashing : "Error", (e. g. background noise level too high)
Output type 1 switch output E5: pnp NO/NC switchable !
Series
1 analogue output, load-dependent:

-F64
RL 500 Ohm: current output 4 ... 20 mA

RL 1 kOhm: voltage output 2 ... 10 V
Voltage drop 3 V DC ! !
Series

-D1

Resolution < 1 mm !
0,172 mm !
2 %
Series
Temperature influence ! !
LUC
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bidirectional ! !

0-level: -UB ... (-UB + 1 V), 1-level: (-UB + 5 V) ... +UB
Pulse length 100 s ! !
Pause length 2 ms ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Synchronisation frequency 80 Hz , with external synchronisation ! !

Interface type RS 232, 9600 bit/s, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit !
RS 232, 9600 bit/s, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (S10 = OFF) !
Power supplies
Control units/

Connection terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa ! !
Material
Housing PBT ! !
Mass 180 g ! !
Accessories
Dimensions UC500+U9+...+R2
-12GM
Series
30
M20 x 1.5
5.3
-18GK/-18GM
Series
60
Series
-30GM
LED
Oblong hole 5.3 x 7.3

131
VariKont
Series
X-axis 90
53 +0.3
59
Series
-FP
40
Y-axis 90
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(Version E6, pnp) (Version IUE2, pnp)
Series
1 1
-F43
+ UB + UB
5 5
Sync. Input Sync. Input
U 2 U 2
Output 1, TD E2 Output, TD
4 4
Output 2, RD IU Output, RD
3 - UB 3 - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves LED-Window LED-Window

LED Dual-LED LED Dual-LED LED
yellow green/red yellow green/red yellow
Double sheet
Angle [degrees]
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Switch status A1 Switch status A2 Switch output

"Power on"/Disturbance "Power on"/Disturbance
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 0
2 1
UB500+ U9+ E6+R2 UC500+U9+IUE2+R2
0.1
-10
0.2
-20
0.3
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Distance [m]
Accessories

Ultrasonic sensor UC3000+U9+...+R2
-12GM
Series
Serial interface
-18GK/-18GM
Series

1 Analogue output, load-dependent voltage or current + switch output
UC3000+U9+IUE0+R2
Series
-30GM
UC3000+U9+IUE2+R2
UC3000+U9+E6+R2
UC3000+U9+E7+R2
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC3000+U9+ IUE0+R2
UC3000+U9+ IUE2+R2
UC3000+U9+ E6+ R2
UC3000+U9+ E7+ R2
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 300 ... 3000 mm ! ! ! !

Response delay for factory setting ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
minimum (EM; NONE): 80 ms (2 measuring cycles)

LED yellow switching state switch output ! !
switching state switch output 1 ! !
Series

-F54
LED red/green permanently green : "Power on", flashes during standby operation ! ! ! !
Output type 1 switch output E0, npn, normally open/closed switchable !
Series
-F64
1 analogue output, load dependent:

1 switch output E5: pnp NO/NC switchable !
Series

-D1
2 switch outputs npn, normally open/closed !

Voltage drop 3 V DC ! ! ! !
Series

LUC
Deviation of the characteristic curve ! !

Resolution < 1 mm ! !
0,172 mm ! !
Repeat accuracy 0,1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !
1 % of the set operating distance
Double sheet
Range hysteresis ! ! ! !
monitoring
Temperature influence 2 % ! ! ! !
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bidirectional ! ! ! !
Pulse length 100 s ! ! ! !
Pause length 2 ms ! ! ! !
Synchronisation frequency 20 Hz , with external synchronisation ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
80 Hz , with external synchronisation ! !

Interface type RS 232, 9600 bit/s, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit ! !
RS 232, 9600 bit/s, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (S10 = OFF) ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Connection ! ! ! !
terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa
Accessories
Material
Housing PBT ! ! ! !
Mass 180 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UC3000+U9+...+R2
-12GM
Series
30
M20 x 1.5
5.3
-18GK/-18GM
Series
60
Series
-30GM
LED

131
VariKont
Series
X-axis 90
53 +0.3
59
Series
-FP
40
Y-axis 90
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(Version E6, pnp) (Version E7, npn)
Series
1 1
-F43
+ UB + UB
5 2
Sync. Input Output 1,TD
U 2 U 4
Output 1, TD Output 2, RD
4 5
Output 2, RD Sync. Input
3 - UB 3 - UB
Series
-F54
(Version IUE0, npn) (Version IUE2, pnp)
Series
1 1
-F64
+ UB + UB
5 5
U 2 U 2
E0 Output, TD E2 Output, TD
4 4
IU Output, RD IU Output, RD
3 - UB 3 - UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC

LED Dual-LED LED Dual-LED LED
Angle [degrees] yellow green/red yellow green/red yellow
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Switch status A1 Switch status A2 Switch output
1 "Power on"/Disturbance "Power on"/Disturbance
Power supplies
2
Control units/
0.0 0
output versions +E6 and +E7 output versions +IUE0 and +IUE2
0.5
-10
1.0
1.5 -20
2.0
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Distance [m]
Accessories

Ultrasonic sensor UJ3000+U1+8B+RS
-12GM
Series
8 bit output
-18GK/-18GM
Test input
Series
Fault output
Serial interface
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UJ3000+ U1+8B+RS
Model number
Series
-F42

Response delay static 4: 280 ms (factory setting) !
static 1: 70 ms
Series
-F43
dynamic; 100 ms
LED red/green green LED: Power on !
red LED, flashing at 2 Hz: error (high level of external noise)
Series
-F54
Output type 8 bit output for outputting object distance, pnp !

1 fault output, pnp NC
Voltage drop Ue - 4 V !
Resolution 11 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !
Series
Repeat accuracy 11 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !

-F64
Range hysteresis 11 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !

Temperature influence 0,17 % / K !
Input type 1 test input, (-UB + 5 V) up to +UB, 100 kOhm !
Series
-D1

Connection !
2 m, cable, 14 x 0.14 mm2, cast terminal compartment
Material
Series
LUC
Housing PBT !
Mass 290 g !
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UJ3000+U1+8B+RS
-12GM
Series
30
5.3
-18GK/-18GM
Series
60
Series
-30GM
LED

131
VariKont
Series
X-axis 90
53 +0.3
59
Series
-FP
40
Y-axis 90
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
+UB
8 bit output
U Error output
-UB
Test input
Transmit-Data
Series
Receiver-Data
-F54
Legend:
+UB = Brown Test input = Grey/Pink
-UB = Blue Error output = Red/Blue
Interface:
Receiver-Data RD = White/Green
Series
-F64
Transmit-Data TD = Brown/Green
8 bit output:
A1 = White A2 = Yellow
A3 = Pink A4 = Red
A5 = Green A6 = Grey
Series
A7 = Black A8 = Violet
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves LED-Window

LED green/red
Angle [degrees]
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
"Power on"/Error
1
Power supplies
2
Control units/
0.0 0
0.5
-10
1.0
1.5 -20
2.0
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Distance [m]
Accessories

Through-beam ultrasonic barrier UBE6000+U1+SA2
-12GM
Series

Complementary outputs
-18GK/-18GM

Series
Adjustable sensitivity
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UBE6000+U1+SA2
Model number
Series
-F42

Operating range 0 ... 6000 mm !
Reference target receiver !
LED yellow switching state (receiver only) !
Series
LED green Emitter: "Power on" mains ON !

-F43
Receiver: "Power on" mains ON

LED red LED on continuously: strong signal !
LED 2 Hz flashing: multiple reflections
Power consumption Emitter: 1,5 W !
Series
Receiver: 1 W
-F54
Output type Receiver: Complementary output stage 200 mA, Short-circuit/overload protected !
Voltage drop Receiver: UB - 3 V !
Series

-F64

Connection !
terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa
Housing PBT !
Series
-D1
Mass 180 g each sensor !

Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UBE6000+U1+SA2
-12GM
Series
30
M20 x 1.5
5.3
-18GK/-18GM
Series
60
Series
-30GM
131
LED
VariKont
Series
X-axis 90
53 +0.3
59
potentiometer
Series
-FP
40
Y-axis 90
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Standard symbol / Connection: Standard symbol / Connection:
Emitter Transceiver
Series
-F43
1 1
+ UB + UB
U U 2 Switch output
4 alternative
2
- UB 3 - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Indicating/operating means LED-Window

LED green
LED
Angle [degrees]
Double sheet
red
monitoring
LED
yellow
Signal too strong strong weak too weak
"Power on"
Interference Working range poor
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0
2.0
Potentiometer setting LED-Window-Receiver
LED red LED yellow LED green
4.0
5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Distance [m]
Accessories
Setting aid "Power on"

Switch output
Ultrasonic sensor UB...+U9+H3
-12GM
Series
Separate evaluation
With temperature sensor
-18GK/-18GM

Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB3000+U9+ H3
UB500+U9+ H3
Model number

Series
-F42
60 ... 500 mm !
Unusable area !
0 ... 300 mm 1)
1) !
0 ... 60 mm
Series
-F43
approx. 380 kHz !

Output type 1 pulse output for temperature ! !
1-level: > 4 V (100 A), 0-level: < 0.5 V (100A)
Series
1 pulse output for echo propagation time

-F54
1-level: UB -3 V (< 10 mA), 0-level: 1 V (100 A)

Temperature influence the echo propagation time: 0,17 % / K !
the echo propagation time: 0,17 % / K !
Pulse length 10 s/K + timer pulse, synchronisation with the timer pulse ! !
Input type 1 pulse input for transmitter pulse, activation through open collector npn ! !
Series
-F64
< 1 V: emitter active, > 4 V: emitter inactive

Pulse length 10 ... 100 s (typ. 50 s) 2) !
20 ... 500 s (typ. 300 s) 2) !

Pause length 50 x pulse length ! !
Series

-D1

Connection terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa ! !
Material
Housing PBT ! !
Series
LUC

Mass 180 g ! !
Double sheet
Description of the sensor fu nction s

monitoring
The sensing range is determined in the downstream evaluation electronics (e. g. the units UH3-KHD2-4E5, or UH3-KHD2-4I).
The sensing range is determined on the basis of the echo time of a transmitted pulse in pulse-echo mode.
Temperature comp ensation
A temperature pulse is available at the temperature output for external temperature compensation. It is synchronous to the externally applied clock pulse and has
the length T Tem p , calculated as follows:
Power supplies
Control units/
TTe mp [ s ] = T T akt[ s] + T [K ] 10 s K
Put into the formula the temperature in Kelvin and the clock time in the unit s.
1)
The unusable area (blind range) BR depends on the pulse duration.
Accessories
2)
The sensors detection range depends on the pulse duration.
Dimensions UB...+U9+H3
-12GM
Series
30
M20 x 1.5
5.3
-18GK/-18GM
Series
60
Series
-30GM
131
VariKont
Series
X-axis 90
53 +0.3
59
Series
-FP
40
Y-axis 90
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
1
+ UB
5
U Temp. output
2
Clock
4
Echo
3
- UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves TClock

Clock
Angle [degrees]
Double sheet
Angle [degrees]
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
20 Temp.-
impulse
TImp
10
10
TImp = T [K] x 10 s/K
1 TTemp = TClock + TImp
Power supplies
2
Control units/
0.0 0 0.0 0
2 1
0.5
0.1
-10 -10
1.0
0.2
1.5 -20
-20
0.3 2.0
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Distance [m] Distance [m]
Accessories
Curve 1: flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Curve 1: flat plate 100 mm x 100 mm
UB500+... UB3000+...
Series VariKont Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
UC500+U9+E6+R2
-18GK/-18GM
Series

The outputs of the sensor can be used in two different operating modes: Switching mode with 2 adjustable switching points, or
RS 232 mode (RS 232, 9600, n, 8, 1). Select the operating mode with DIP switch 10. The switching points are set with the DIP
switches 1-4 and 5-8 (see table). Switch 9 is used to set the close or open function of the switch outputs.
Series
-30GM
For further information on the sensor's command set, please see the publication "Command Set for Ultrasonic Sensors with
RS 232 Interface".
Caution: Ensure that DIP switch S10 is correctly set before connecting the RS 232 interface.
Synchronisation
VariKont
Series
operate using an internally generated clock rate. It can be synchronised by applying a square wave voltage. A falling edge leads
to the transmission of a single ultrasonic pulse. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input will result in the normal
operation of the sensor. A high level > 1 s will result in the standby operation of the sensor (green LED).
Several functions are available:
Series
Two to five sensors can be synchronised by interconnecting their synchronisation inputs. In this case, the sensors alternately
-FP
transmit ultrasonic pulses.

Multiple sensors can be controlled by the same synchronisation signal. The sensors are synchronised.
The synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to individual sensors. The sensors operate in multiplex mode.
Series
-F12
The response time increases when sensors are synchronised as the measuring cycle time is increased by the synchronisation.
Adjustment of the evaluation window via coding switch in terminal compartment
Switch NDE Switch FDE

Series
1234 [mm] 5678 [mm]

-F42
DIP Switches in Terminal Compartment

0000 60 0000 70
Switch
0001 80 0001 90 N.O. mode
0010 100 0010 110
0011 125 0011 135
Series
ON
-F43
0100 150 0100 160

0101 175 0101 185 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0110 200 0110 210
0111 230 0111 240 Switch distance Switch distance
Series
RS 232-
-F54

1000 260 1000 270 mode
1001 290 1001 300 N.C.
1010 320 1010 330
1011 350 1011 360
Series
-F64
1100 385 1100 395

1101 420 1101 430
1110 455 1110 465
1111 490 1111 500
Series
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
-D1
UC500+U9+IUE2+R2
Series

LUC
The outputs of the sensor can be used in two different operating modes: Switching/analogue mode, or RS 232 mode (RS 232,
9600, n, 8, 1). Select the operating mode with DIP switch 10. The limits of the IU ramp are set with the DIP switches 1-4 and
5-8 (see table). Switch 9 is used to set the close or open function of the switch output.
Double sheet
monitoring
RS 232 Interface".
Synchronisation
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Switch NDE Switch FDE DIP Switches in Terminal Compartment:
Series
12 34 [mm] 56 78 [mm] Adjustment of the Target Window
00 00 60 00 00 60 Switch/
N.O. IU-mode
00 01 80 00 01 80
00 10 100 00 10 100 ON
Series
-30GM
00 11 125 00 11 125
01 00 150 01 00 150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
01 01 175 01 01 175
01 10 200 01 10 200 Near span Far span
RS 232-
VariKont
boundary boundary
Series
01 11 230 01 11 230 mode
10 00 260 10 00 260 N.C.
10 01 290 10 01 290 near span boundary < distant limit IU-rising slope
near span boundary > distant limit IU-declining slope
10 10 325 10 10 325 near span boundary = distant limit IU-switch point
10 11 360 10 11 360
Series
Switch point switch output:
-FP
11 00 395 11 00 395 (NDE + FDE)/2 (Preconfiguration)
11 01 430 11 01 430
11 10 465 11 10 465
11 11 500 11 11 500
Series
-F12
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
UC3000+U9+... output versions +E6+R2 and +E7+R2
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
RS 232 Interface".
Synchronisation
The sensor features a synchronisation input for the suppression of mutual interference. If this input is not used, the sensor will
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Switch NDE Switch FDE DIP Switches in Terminal Compartment

12 34 [mm] 56 78 [mm] Switch
Series
LUC
00 00 300 00 00 400 N.O. mode

00 01 450 00 01 550
00 10 600 00 10 700 ON
Double sheet
monitoring
00 11 750 00 11 850
01 00 900 01 00 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
01 01 1050 01 01 1150
01 10 1200 01 10 1300 Switch distance Switch distance
RS 232-
01 11 1350 01 11 1450 mode
Power supplies
Control units/
10 00 1500 10 00 1600 N.C.

10 01 1700 10 01 1800
10 10 1900 10 10 2000
10 11 2100 10 11 2200
11 00 2300 11 00 2400
11 01 2500 11 01 2600
Accessories
11 10 2700 11 10 2800
11 11 2900 11 11 3000
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
-12GM
Series
UC3000+U9+... , output versions +IUE0+R2 and +IUE2+R2

-18GK/-18GM
Series

Series
-30GM
RS 232 Interface".
Synchronisation
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP

Series
-F12

1234 [mm] 5678 [mm] Adjustment of the Target Window
Series
-F42
0000 300 0000 300 Switch/

N.O. IU-mode
0001 450 0001 450
0010 600 0010 600 ON
0011 750 0011 750
Series
-F43
0100 900 0100 900 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0101 1050 0101 1050
0110 1200 0110 1200 Near span Far span
RS 232-
0111 1400 0111 1400 boundary boundary
mode
Series
-F54
1000 1600 1000 1600 N.C.

1001 1800 1001 1800 near span boundary < distant limit IU-rising slope
near span boundary > distant limit IU-declining slope
1010 2000 1010 2000 near span boundary = distant limit IU-switch point
1011 2200 1011 2200 Switch point switch output:
Series
-F64
1100 2400 1100 2400 (NDE + FDE)/2 (Preconfiguration)
1101 2600 1101 2600

1110 2800 1110 2800
1111 3000 1111 3000
Series
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
UJ3000+U1+8B+RS
-18GK/-18GM
Series
The measurement of the distance is realised using the echo time of the ultrasonic pulse. The processor calculates the di-
stance on the basis of the echo time and the speed of sound. The distance is directly issued in parallel in the form of an 8-bit
data word.
Series
-30GM
A serial interface (RS 232, 9 600, n, 8, 1) is also available.
The output functions can be set up flexibly. For further information on the sensor's command set, please see the publication
"Command Set for Ultrasonic Sensors with RS 232 interface".
In the event of interference that the sensor cannot handle, the sensor goes into failure mode in that the failure output opens
and the 8-bit output retains the most recent measuring value. The dual LED goes into the red flashing state.
VariKont
Series
A 1 level at the test input causes the 8-bit output to switch from 00000000 to 11111111 and back every 200 ms.
UBE6000+U1+SA2
Series
Description of the sensor function
-FP
This system consists of one emitter an one receiver, which are operating independend of each other.
For the handling of the wide dynamic range the sensitivity of the receiver can be adjusted by means of a built in potentiometer.
The red LED can be used as adjustment aid.
Series
-F12
System adjustment
Mount emitter and receiver in the desired distance. The detection area has to be unobstructed. Switch on supply voltage and
turn potentiometer counter-clockwise until the red LED lights up permanently (strong signal). In case of short distance applica-
tion, it may happen, that the red LED flashes at a frequency of approx. 2 Hz caused by multi sound reflections between the
Series
sensors transducers. In that case, turn the potentiometer clockwise, until the red LED goes off.
-F42
Make sure, that the receivers output is not activated (yellow LED off) when the detection area is unobstructed.
In the strong working range, the system is highly resistant against any interference. Only large objects can be detected.
In the weak working range the systems resistance against interference is decreased, but the system is highly sensitve even to
detect small objects.
Series
-F43
UB...+U9+H3
Series
-F54
The sensing range is determined in the downstream evaluation electronics (e. g. the units UH3-KHD2-4E5, or UH3-KHD2-4I).
The sensing range is determined on the basis of the echo time of a transmitted pulse in pulse-echo mode.
A temperature pulse is available at the temperature output for external temperature compensation. It is synchronous to the
Series
-F64
externally applied clock pulse and has the length T T emp, calculated as follows:
TTe mp [ s ] = TT akt [ s ] + T[ K ] 10 s K
Series
Put into the formula the temperature in Kelvin and the clock time in the unit s.
-D1
1)
The unusable area (blind range) BR depends on the pulse duration.
2)
Series
The sensors detection range depends on the pulse duration.

LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Series -FP Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -FP
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
UC6000-FP-E6-R2-P5 2 switching outputs + RS 232 interface 6000 mm 116
UC6000-FP-E7-R2-P5
UC6000-FP-IUE0-R2-P5 1 analogue output + 1 switching output + 6000 mm 116
Series
-F54
UC6000-FP-IUE2-R2-P5 RS 232 interface
UJ4000-FP-E2-P1 1 switching output 4000 mm 118
UJ6000-FP-8B-RS 8 bit parallel interface + RS 232 interface 4000 mm 120
Series
-F64
UB1000+FP1+E6 Reflex sensor with switching output 1000 mm 122
UB6000-FP-H3 For external control/evaluation unit 6000 mm 124
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UC6000-FP-...-R2-P5
-12GM
Series
Serial interface
-18GK/-18GM
Series

1 analogue output, load-dependent voltage or current + 1 witch output
UC6000-FP-IUE0-R2-P5
Series
-30GM
UC6000-FP-E6-R2-P5
UC6000-FP-E7-R2-P5
VariKont
Series
UC6000-FP-E7-R2-P5
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC6000-FP-E6-R2 -P5
UC6000-FP-E7-R2 -P5
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 800 ... 6000 mm ! ! ! !

Series
-F43
Response delay for factory setting ! ! ! !

minimal (EM; NONE): 180 ms (2 measuring cycles)
LED yellow switching state switch output ! !
switching state switch output 1 ! !
Series
-F54

LED red/green permanently green : "Power on", flashes during standby operation ! ! ! !
20 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !
60 mA
Series
No-load supply current ! ! ! !

-F64
Output type 1 switch output E0, npn, normally open/closed switchable !

1 analogue output, load dependent:
RL 500 Ohm: current output 4 ... 20 mA, RL 1 kOhm: voltage output 2 ... 10 V
1 switch output E5: pnp NO/NC switchable !
Series
RL 500 Ohm: current output 4 ... 20 mA, RL 1 kOhm: voltage output 2 ... 10 V
-D1
2 switch outputs npn, normally open/closed !

Voltage drop 3 V DC ! ! ! !
Series
LUC
Deviation of the characteristic curve 0,2 % ! !

Resolution < 1 mm ! !
depending on the set evaluation range: ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
0,172 mm , if evaluation range < 705 mm ,

evaluation range [mm] / 3296, when evaluation range > 705 mm
Temperature influence 2 % ! ! ! !
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bidirectional ! ! ! !
Pulse length 100 s ! ! ! !
Power supplies
2 ms
Control units/
Pause length ! ! ! !
Synchronisation frequency 10 Hz , with external synchronisation ! ! ! !
RS 232, 9600 bit/s, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (S10 = OFF) ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Accessories
Connection terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa ! ! ! !

Material
Housing PBT ! ! ! !
Mass 320 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UC6000-FP-...-R2-P5
-12GM
Series
73
-18GK/-18GM
21
Series
40
7
Series
-30GM
LED
M20x1.5
5.3
VariKont
Series
80
65
Series
-FP
65
Series
-F12
80
Series
-F42

(Version E6, pnp) (Version E7, npn)
Series
1 1
-F43
+ UB + UB
5 2
Sync. Input Output 1,TD
U 2 U 4
Output 1, TD Output 2, RD
4 5
Output 2, RD Sync. Input
3 - UB 3 - UB
Series
-F54
(Version IUE0, npn) (Version IUE2, pnp)
Series
1 1
-F64
+ UB + UB
5 5
U 2 U 2
E0 Output, TD E2 Output, TD
4 4
IU Output, RD IU Output, RD
3 - UB 3 - UB
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC

LED Dual-LED LED LED Dual-LED
yellow green/red yellow yellow green/red
Double sheet
Angle [degrees]
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Switch status A1 Switch status A2 Switch status

"Power on"/Disturbance "Power on"/Disturbance
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 2 1 0
1.0
output versions -E6 and -E7 output versions -IUE0 and -IUE2
2.0 -10
3.0
-20
4.0
5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Distance [m]
Accessories

Ultrasonic sensor UJ4000-FP-E2-P1
-12GM
Series

1 switch output
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
Reflex sensor function

Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP

Technical Data
Series
-F12
UJ4000-F P-E2-P1
Model number
Series

-F42
Operating range 0 ... reflector distance sR - 6 % !

Response delay 900 ms, for TEACH-IN with +Ue !
150 ms for TEACH-IN with -Ue
Series
-F43
LED yellow switching state switch output !

red LED, flashing at 2 Hz: error (reflector incorrectly positioned)
Series
-F54
Output type 1 switch output, NOpnp !

Voltage drop 3 V !
Input type 1 TEACH-IN input, !
operating distance 1: -UB ... (-UB +2 V), operating distance 2: (+UB -2 V) ... +UB
Series
-F64

Connection terminal compartment, 2.5 mm2 conductor csa !
Material
Series
-D1
Housing PBT !
Mass 320 g !
Series

LUC
The measurement of the distance is realised using the echo time of ultrasonic
pulses. After installation, the transmitter is taught with the distance to a station-
Sensor
ary reflector and stores this value by shorting the TEACH-IN input with -U B or
Double sheet
monitoring
+U B (see Electrical Connection). The distance determined in this manner is re-

tained for as long as required when the power supply is shut off. If an interrup-
tion of the barrier by an object is determined during operation, switch output is
closed.
Standard test plate
If objects smaller than the standard measuring plate are to be detected, the re-
Power supplies
Control units/
flector must also be reduced in size accordingly. This may result in a reduction SR
of range.
Unobstructed
Accessories
region 6 %
Standard
reflector
Dimensions UJ4000-FP-E2-P1
-12GM
Series
73
-18GK/-18GM
21
Series
40
7
Series
-30GM
LED
M20x1.5
5.3
VariKont
Series
Series
80
-FP
65
Series
-F12
65
80
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
1 + UB
2
U Teach input
4 Switch output
3 - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC

Dual-LED LED
Angle [degrees] green/red yellow
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Switch output
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 0
2 1
0.5
1.0
-10
1.5
2.0 -20
2.5
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Distance [m]
Accessories

Ultrasonic sensor UJ6000-FP-8B+RS
-12GM
Series
8 bit output
-18GK/-18GM
Test input
Series
Fault output
Serial interface
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UJ6000-F P-8B+RS
Model number
Series
-F42

Response delay static 4: 720 ms (factory setting) !
static 1: 180 ms
Series
-F43
dynamic; 270 ms
red LED, flashing at 2 Hz: error (high level of external noise)
Series
Output type 8 bit output for outputting object distance, pnp !

-F54
1 fault output, pnp NC

Voltage drop 4 V !
Range hysteresis 21 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !
Repeat accuracy 21 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !
Series
-F64
Resolution 21 mm , (corresponding to 1 LSB) !

Input type 1 test input, (-UB + 5 V) up to +UB, 100 kOhm !
Series

-D1

Connection !
2 m, cable, 14 x 0.14 mm2, cast terminal compartment
Material
Housing PBT !
Series
LUC

Mass 430 g !
Double sheet
Description of the sensor fu nctions

monitoring
The meas urement of the distance is realised using the echo time of the ultras onic pulse. The proc es sor calculates the distance on
the bas is of the ec ho time and the speed of sound. The distance is directly iss ued in parallel in the form of an 8-bit data word.
A serial interface (RS 232, 9 600, n, 8, 1) is also av ailable.
The output functions can be set up flexibly . For further information on the sens or's command set, please see the publication "Com-
Power supplies
mand Set for Ultrasonic Sensors w ith RS 232 interfac e".

Control units/
In the ev ent of interferenc e that the sensor cannot handle, the s ensor goes into failure mode in that the failure output opens and the
8-bit output retains the most recent m easuring v alue. The dual LED goes into the red flashing state.
A 1 lev el at the tes t input causes the 8-bit output to switch from 00000000 to 11111111 and back every 200 ms.
Accessories
Dimensions UJ6000-FP-8B+RS
-12GM
Series
73
-18GK/-18GM
21
Series
40
7
Series
-30GM
LED
approx. 33
VariKont
5.3
Series
Series
-FP
80
65
Series
-F12
65
80
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
+UB
8 bit output
U Error output
-UB
Test input
Transmit-Data
Series
Receiver-Data
-F54
Legend:
+UB = Brown Test input = Grey/Pink
-UB = Blue Error output = Red/Blue
Interface:
Receiver-Data RD = White/Green
Series
-F64
Transmit-Data TD = Brown/Green
8 bit output:
A1 = White A2 = Yellow
A3 = Pink A4 = Red
A5 = Green A6 = Grey
Series
A7 = Black A8 = Violet
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC

Dual-LED
Angle [degrees] green/red
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
10
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 2 1 0
0.5
1.0
-10
1.5
2.0
2.5 -20
3.0
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
Distance [m]
Accessories

Reflex sensor UB1000+FP1+E6
-12GM
Series
Through-beam and direct detection modes

-18GK/-18GM
4 operating modes can be set

Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB1000+F P1 +E6
Model number
Series

-F42

Response delay 100 ms !
LED green Power on !
Series
-F43
LED yellow switch output 1 !

switch output 2
LED red fault (due to external noise or incorrect adjustment) !
DIP-switch S9= ON/NO !
S9= OFF / NC
S10= ON/Window operation (barrier mode)
Series
-F54
S10= OF/independent switch points

Output type 2 switch outputs pnp, NO/NC !
3 V DC
Series
Voltage drop !
-F64

Series
-D1

Material
Series
LUC
Housing PBT !
Mass 338 g !
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UB1000+FP1+E6
-12GM
Series
73
-18GK/-18GM
21
Series
40
7
Series
-30GM
LED
Pg13.5
5.3
VariKont
Series
Series
80
-FP
65
Series
-F12
65
80
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
1 + UB
2
U Switch output 1
4 Switch output 2
3 - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Output functions LED-Window

LED Dual-LED LED
Blind zone
Switching
Switching
Detection
yellow green/red yellow

Double sheet
Angle [degrees]
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
point
point
limit
20
S9 S10
10
A1 1 0
Switch status 2 Switch status 1
A2 1 0 "Power on"/Disturbance
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0
2
0 A1 0 0
1
A2 0 0
0.5 A1 1 1
-10
A2 1 1
1.0 -20 A1 0 1
A2 0 1
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Distance [m]
Blind range (forbidden)
Accessories
Output open
Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm Output closed
Ultrasonic sensor UB6000-FP-H3
-12GM
Series
Separate evaluation
With temperature sensor
-18GK/-18GM

Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB6000-FP-H3
Model number

Series
-F42
Unusable area !
0 ... 800 mm 1)
Series
Output type 1 pulse output for temperature !

-F43
1-level: > 4 V (100 A), 0-level: < 0.5 V (100A)

1 pulse output for echo propagation time
1-level: UB -3 V (< 10 mA), 0-level: 1 V (100 A)
Temperature influence the echo propagation time: 0,17 % / K !
Pulse length 10 s/K + timer pulse, synchronisation with the timer pulse !
Series
-F54
Input type 1 pulse input for transmitter pulse, activation through open collector npn !
< 1 V: emitter active, > 4 V: emitter inactive
Pulse length 50 ... 700 s (typ. 500 s) 2) !
Pause length 50 x pulse length !
Series

-F64

Material
Housing PBT !
Series
-D1

Mass 320 g !
Description of the sensor fu nctions

Series
LUC
The sens ing range is determined in the dow ns tream ev aluation electronics (e. g. the units UH3-KH D2-4E5, or UH3-KHD2-4I).
The sens ing range is determined on the bas is of the ec ho time of a transmitted pulse in pulse-ec ho m ode.
Temperatur e co mpensation
Double sheet
A temperature pulse is av ailable at the temperature output for external temperature compensation. It is synchronous to the externally
monitoring
applied cloc k pulse and has the length T T em p, c alc ulated as follows:
TTe mp [ s ] = T T akt[ s] + T [K ] 10 s K
Power supplies
Control units/
Put into the formula the temperature in Kelv in and the c lock time in the unit s .
1) The unus able area (blind range) BR depends on the pulse duration.
The unus able area reaches a minimum with the s hortest puls e duration.
2) The sensors detection range depends on the puls e duration.
Accessories
With pulse duration < typical puls e duration, the s ensors detection range may be reduced.
Dimensions UB6000-FP-H3
-12GM
Series
73
-18GK/-18GM
21
Series
40
7
Series
-30GM
LED
M20x1.5
5.3
VariKont
Series
80
65
Series
-FP
65
Series
-F12
80
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
1
+ UB
5
U Temp. output
2
Clock
4
Echo
3
- UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves TClock

Clock
Angle [degrees]
Double sheet
monitoring
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
Temp.-
impulse
TImp
10
TImp = T [K] x 10 s/K

TTemp = TClock + TImp
Power supplies
Control units/
0.0 2 1 0
0.5
1.0
-10
1.5
2.0
2.5 -20
3.0
3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
Distance [m]
Accessories

Series -FP Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
UC6000-FP-...-R2-P5 , output versions -E6 and -E7

-18GK/-18GM
Series

Series
-30GM
RS 232 Interface".
Synchronisation
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP

Series
-F12
Switch NDE Switch FDE DIP Switches in Terminal Compartment

Series
-F42
12 3 4 [mm] 56 7 8 [mm] Switch

00 0 0 800 00 0 0 950 N.O. mode
00 0 1 1100 00 0 1 1250
00 1 0 1400 00 1 0 1550 ON
Series
-F43
00 1 1 1700 00 1 1 1850
01 0 0 2000 01 0 0 2150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
01 0 1 2300 01 0 1 2450
01 1 0 2600 01 1 0 2750
Switch distance Switch distance
01 1 1 2900 01 1 1 3050 RS 232-
Series

-F54
mode
10 0 0 3200 10 0 0 3350
10 0 1 3500 10 0 1 3650 N.C.
10 1 0 3800 10 1 0 4000
10 1 1 4200 10 1 1 4400
Series
-F64
11 0 0 4600 11 0 0 4800
11 0 1 5000 11 0 1 5200
11 1 0 5400 11 1 0 5600
11 1 1 5800 11 1 1 6000
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
Series
-D1
UC6000-FP-...-R2-P5 , output versions -IUE0 and -IUE2

Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
RS 232 Interface".
Synchronisation
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -FP Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
1 23 4 [mm] 5 67 8 [mm] Adjustment of the Target Window
Series
0 00 0 800 0 00 0 800 Switch/
0 00 1 1100 0 00 1 1100 N.O. IU-mode
0 01 0 1400 0 01 0 1400
0 01 1 1700 0 01 1 1700 ON
0 10 0 2000 0 10 0 2000
Series
-30GM
0 10 1 2300 0 10 1 2300 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 11 0 2650 0 11 0 2650
0 11 1 3000 0 11 1 3000 Near span Far span
RS 232-
1 00 0 3350 1 00 0 3350 boundary boundary
mode
VariKont
Series
1 00 1 3700 1 00 1 3700
N.C.
1 01 0 4050 1 01 0 4050
near span boundary < distant limit IU-rising slope
1 01 1 4400 1 01 1 4400 near span boundary > distant limit IU-declining slope
near span boundary = distant limit IU-switch point
1 10 0 4800 1 10 0 4800
1 10 1 5200 1 10 1 5200 Switch point switch output:
Series
(NDE + FDE)/2 (Preconfiguration)
-FP
1 11 0 5600 1 11 0 5600
1 11 1 6000 1 11 1 6000
1 ^ ON, 0 ^ OFF
UB1000+FP1+E6
Series
-F12
The sensor is suitable for direct-detection mode as well as beam-interruption mode. The functions of the outputs can be set
with switches S9 and S10 in accordance with the following table.
Series
-F42
DIP Switches in Terminal Compartment
Switch Switching range
S1 200 ... 300 mm Window-/beam
N.O. interruption operation
S2 300 ... 400 mm
Series
S3 400 ... 500 mm
-F43
ON
S4 500 ... 600 mm
S5 600 ... 700 mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S6 700 ... 800 mm
Series
S7 800 ... 900 mm
-F54
Switching range
Independent
S8 900 ... 1000 mm setting
switch points
A continuous switching range must be selected. When operating with independent N.C.
switching points, A1 switches the upper limit and A2 the lower limit of the switching
range.
Series
-F64
Barrier mode
In barrier mode, primarily the range up to objects used as reflector will be evaluated (e. g. machine part). Objects entering the
range between the sensor and reflector are detected. This includes objects of a strongly sound-absorbent nature and objects
positioned at an angle to the sensor's active axis. In this case, no echo reaches the receiver. If the sound is reflected by an
Series
-D1
object, the reflection will have a different echo time from the regular reflector echo. The sensor detects the object on the basis
of the shorter echo time or lack of an echo while in barrier mode.
Sensor Scanning Reflector
range
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Object
Power supplies
Control units/
Detection range Switching

range
For use as a barrier, set the close function (S9 = 1) and window mode (barrier mode) (S10 = 1). The distance between the
sensor and the reflector determines the switching range which must be set using a switch between S1 and S8. Only one switch
may be set to "ON", resulting in a switching range of 100 mm.
The sensor and/or reflector should be adjusted in such a manner that output A1 is closed. The reflector should be positioned
as closely as possible to the sensor's near switching range limit. The sensor works in direct-detection mode in the area between
Accessories
the reflector and the sensor's near limit. A reliable evaluation is therefore not possible.
If an interruption of the barrier by an object is determined during operation, switch output A1 is opened. Output A2 is not taken
into consideration as a rule, as it also works in direct-detection mode rather than beam-interruption mode.
Series -F12 Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -F12
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
UB800-F12P-EP-V15 800 mm 130
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB800-F12P-EP-V15
-12GM
Series
Push-pull output
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
U
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB800-F12P-EP-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 100 ms !

LED green Operating display !
LED yellow switch output !
LED red permanent: stop plate switch point adjuster !
flashing: error
Series
-F54

Output type Push-pull output, short-circuit proof, protected against reverse polarity !
Voltage drop 3 V !
Series
-F64
Switching frequency max. 4 Hz !

Temperature influence 1,5 % of full-scale value !
Input type 1 input for sound lobe adjustment !
small sound beam: -UB ... +1 V
wide sound beam: +4 V... +UB or open input
Series
-D1
input impedance: > 4.7 k

switching delay: 1 s
Synchronisation 1 synchronous connection, bi-directional !
0-level: -UB...+1 V
1-level: +4 V...+UB
Series
LUC
input impedance: > 12 k

Common mode operation 45 Hz !
Multiplex operation 45/n Hz, n = number of sensors !
UL Power from Class 2 Power Source !
Double sheet
monitoring
IND.CONTR.EQ 57M3
Power supplies
Control units/

Housing Frame: die-cast zinc, nickel-plated !
Laterals: plastic PC, glass-fiber reinforced
Mass 60 g !
Accessories
Dimensions UB800-F12P-EP-V15
-12GM
Series
M4 / 4 deep 10
-18GK/-18GM
15
Series
7.5
41.5
5
Series
-30GM
49
32.5
65
4.5
5.3
VariKont
2
Series
5.5
7
M12x1
Series
19.5
-FP
Connector 90 adjustable position
24
11.5
2 1 Operating display green
2 2 Switch state yellow
Series
-F12
3 Turnover switch Q / Q
4 Switching point adjuster
1 4
3 5 Acoustic axis transducer
Series
-F42
(version EP, pnp/npn)
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB
2 (WH) Beam input
U 5 (GY)
Synchronous
4 (BK)
Switch output
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Switching output function

Distance Y [mm] 1. normally open function Q
Double sheet
monitoring
200
150 object distance
100
2. normally closed function Q
50
Power supplies
0
Control units/
-50
-100
-150
round bar, 25 mm
-200
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
Distance X [mm]
Accessories
Y
wide sound lobe
X
narrow sound lobe
Series -F12 Sensor function description
-12GM
Series
UB800-F12P-EP-V15
-18GK/-18GM
Synchronisation
Series
To suppress mutual influence, the sensor is equipped with a synchronisation connection. If this is not activated, the sensor
works with an internally generated clock. Synchronisation of multiple sensors can be achieved in the following ways.
The sensor can be synchronized by external application of a square wave voltage. A synchronisation impulse on the synchro-
Series
-30GM
nisation input leads to the execution of one measurement cycle. The impulse width must be larger than 100 s. The measure-
ment cycle starts with the falling flank. A low level > 1 sec or an open synchronisation input puts the sensor in normal mode. A
high level on the synchronisation input deactivates the sensor.
Two operational modes are possible
1. Multiple sensors are controlled using the same synchronisation signal. The sensors work in synch.
VariKont
Series
2. The synchronisation impulses are cyclically fed to only one sensor at a time. The sensors work in multiplex mode.
Autosynchronisation
The synchronisation connections of up to 10 sensors are connected together with the option of autosynchronisation. These
sensors work in multiplex mode after power is switched on. The activation delay is increased corresponding to the numer of
synchronised sensors.
Series
-FP
Note:
If the synchronisation option is not used, the synchronisation input should be connected to ground (0V), or the sensor connec-
ted using a V1 connector cable (4-pin).
Selection of beam characteristics
Series
-F12
By switching the beam input, the activation characteristics of the ultrasound sensor can be selected. If the beam input is open
or connected to +UB , the sensor works with a wide ultrasonic cone. A beam input connected to -UB causes the sensor to work
with a narrower ultrasonic cone. This setting is preferred when an object in the vicinity of the sensor is close to the ultrasonic
beam, and should be suppressed. The characteristic of the ultrasonic cone can be changed during sensor operation. Switching
Series
the sound cone characteristics becomes active one second after the change to the signal level at the beam input.
-F42
Setting the switch point

The ultrasonic sensor possesses a switch output, of which the switching point can be set simply and precisely using the built-
in 12-position potentiometer. Using the switch Q / Q which is also easy to find on the upper side of the sensor, the effective
direction of the switching output can be selected.
Series
-F43
There are two different output functions which can be selected

1. one switching point, normally open
2. one switching point, normally closed
LED display
Series
-F54
Opening function (Q\) Closing function (Q)

LED green: Power On
LED yellow: Switch stat e Switch state
Series
-F64
Object outside switching area, or Object detected in switching area

no object
LED red Potentiometer for setting of swit ch point at "limit"
LED red flashing Ultrasonic error
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -F42
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
UB...-F42-...V15 UB...-F42S-...V15
(top looker) (sde looker)
Series
-F12
Model number AC-version/ side looker top looker Detection range Page
Series
-F42
relay output
UB400-F42-UK-V95 ! ! 400 mm 134
UB400-F42S-UK-V95 ! !
UB500-F42-E4-V15 ! 500 mm 136
Series
-F43
UB500-F42S-E4-V15 !
UB500-F42-E5-V15 !
UB500-F42S-E5-V15 !
UB500-F42-I-V15 !
Series
-F54
UB500-F42S-I-V15 !
UB500-F42-U-V15 !
UB500-F42S-U-V15 !
UB500-F42-E6-V15 !
Series
-F64
UB500-F42S-E6-V15 !
UB500-F42-E7-V15 !
UB500-F42S-E7-V15 !
UB1500-F42-UK-V95 ! ! 1500 mm 138
Series
UB1500-F42S-UK-V95 ! !
-D1
UB2000-F42-E4-V15 ! 2000 mm 140
UB2000-F42S-E4-V15 !
UB2000-F42-E5-V15 !
!
Series
UB2000-F42S-E5-V15
LUC
UB2000-F42-I-V15 !
UB2000-F42S-I-V15 !
UB2000-F42-U-V15 !
Double sheet
monitoring
UB2000-F42S-U-V15 !
UB2000-F42-E6-V15 !
UB2000-F42S-E6-V15 !
UB2000-F42-E7-V15 !
Power supplies
!
Control units/
UB2000-F42S-E7-V15
UB3000-F42-UK-V95 ! ! 3000 mm 142
UB4000-F42-E4-V15 ! 4000 mm 144
UB4000-F42-E5-V15 !
UB4000-F42-I-V15 !
UB4000-F42-U-V15 !
Accessories
UB4000-F42-E6-V15 !
UB4000-F42-E7-V15 !
Ultrasonic sensor UB400-F42(S)-UK-V95
-12GM
Series
Relay output for high power

Extremely small unusable area
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN
Series
Interference suppression (adjustable width of sound cone in close range)

NO/NC selectable
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB400-F42S-UK-V9 5
UB400-F42-UK-V95
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

LED green permanently green: Power on ! !
LED yellow permanent: switching state switch output ! !
LED red normal operation: "fault" ! !
Series
-F54
Operating voltage 20 ... V DC ... 253 V AC ! !

Output type 1 relay output ! !
Rated operational current 3A ! !
Series
-F64

Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! !
Temperature influence 1 % of full-scale value ! !
Series
-D1

Connection Connector V95 (7/8"-16 UN 2A), 5-pin ! !
Housing PBT ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! !
Mass 260 g ! !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UB400-F42(S)-UK-V95
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2 15 7.5 5.2
7/8"-16 UN 2A
7/8"-16 UN 2A
15.5
15.5
-18GK/-18GM
Membrane keys Membrane keys
10
Series
A2
A2
52.5
52.5
TEACH IN
TEACH IN
MODE
MODE
34
34
80
80
65
65
A1
A1
LED window LED window
5
16 16
Series
-30GM
10 65 10 65
34 80 34 80
10
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Housing version -F42 Housing version -F42S
Series
-F12
1 AC/DC
U 5
20 V ... 253 V
4
Series
max. 250 V AC/120 V DC
-F42
2
Imax = 3 A
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Diagrams
Characteristic response curves Possible operating modes
Series
1. Switch point operation
-D1
Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20 normally open
A1 ->
A2
10 normally closed
A2 ->
Series
A1
LUC
2 1 0 2. Window operation
50
100 normally open

Double sheet
A1 < A2
monitoring
-10 A1 A2
150
200 normally closed

A2 < A1 A2 A1
-20
250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
Distance [mm]
3. Hysteresis operation
Power supplies
Control units/

Curve 2: round bar, 25 mm normally open
A1 < A2
A1 A2
normally closed
A2 < A1 A2 A1
4. Object presence detection mode

Accessories
A1 -> , A2 -> : Sensor detects object presence within

sensing range
Note A1 -> , A2 -> means: cover sensor with hand
or remove all objects from sensing range
Ultrasonic sensor UB500-F42(S)-...-V15
-12GM
Series

TEACH-IN
-18GK/-18GM

Series
1 Switch output
UB500-F42(S)-E4-V15
Series
-30GM
UB500-F42(S)-E5-V15
UB500-F42(S)-E6-V15
UB500-F42(S)-E7-V15
VariKont
Series

UB500-F42(S)-U-V15
UB500-F42(S)-I-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB500-F42S-E4-V15
UB500-F42S-E5-V15
UB500-F42S-E6-V15
UB500-F42S-E7-V15
UB500-F42S-U-V1 5
UB500-F42-E4-V15
UB500-F42-E5-V15
UB500-F42-E6-V15
UB500-F42-E7-V15
UB500-F42S-I-V15
UB500-F42-U-V15
UB500-F42-I-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 30 ... 500 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Adjustment range 50 ... 500 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 30 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer frequency approx. 390 kHz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 50 ms ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

LED green permanently green: Power on ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanent: object in evaluation range, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! ! ! !
permanent: switching state switch output, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! ! ! !
LED yellow 1 permanent: switching state switch output 1, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! ! ! !
Series
-F54
LED red normal operation: "fault", TEACH-IN function: no object detected ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
17 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !
No-load supply current 50 mA ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA ! !

1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
2 switch outputs npn, normally open/close selectable ! !
2 switch outputs pnp, normally open/close selectable ! !
Series
Rated operational current 200 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

-D1
Voltage drop 2,5 V ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Switching frequency 8 Hz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
LUC

Resolution 0,2 mm at max. sensing range ! !
0,2 mm for max. detection range ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
0 ... 300 Ohm ! !

Temperature influence 1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Synchronisation bi-directional ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
Power supplies
Control units/
Common mode operation 95 Hz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Multiplex operation 95/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Protection degree IP54 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Accessories
Housing ABS ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Mass 140 g ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB500-F42(S)-...-V15
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2 15 7.5 5.2
15.5
15.5
-18GK/-18GM
10
M12x1
M12x1
Series
A2
A2
52.5
52.5
TEACH IN
SET
TEACH IN
SET
34
34
MODE
MODE
80
80
65
65
A1
A1
5
16 16
Series
-30GM
10 65 10 65
34 80 34 80
10
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Housing version -F 42 H ousing version -F42S
Series
-F12
(version E4, npn) (version E6, pnp) (version I)
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 2 (WH)
Switch output Sync. Teaching input
U 2 (WH) U 4 (BK) U 5 (GY)
Teaching input Switch output 1 Sync.
Series
5 (GY) 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
-F42
Synchronous Switch output 2 Analog output
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F43
(version E5, pnp) (version E7, npn) (version U)
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
+ UB + UB
2 (WH) Teaching input 4 (BK) 2 (WH)
Switch output 1 Teaching input
U 5 (GY) U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY)
Synchronous Switch output 2 Sync.
4 4 (BK)
Series
(BK) 5 (GY)
Switch output Sync. Analog output
-F54
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F64
Diagrams output versions -I and -U output versions -E6 and E7 output versions -E4 and -E5
Analogue output programmation

Characteristic response curve Switching output programmation Programmable operation modes
Unusable area
Unusable area Unusable area
Series
Distance Y [m]
-D1
0.2
Flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
Object distance
Object distance
0.1 Object distance
N. O. (A1 < A2):
Rising ramp
Output 1 1. Switching point mode
A1 A2 A1
0.0
Output 2
N. C.
Series
LUC
Falling ramp A2 A2
N. C. (A1 > A2):
A1
-0.1 A1 A2 Output 1
A1 N. O.
Round bar, 25 mm Zero line Output 2 A1
A2 A2
-0.2
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 A1 , A2 : Object presence detection
Double sheet
A1 = 0 A2 Object-
monitoring
Y Distance X [m] Both outputs are active if Object within detection range.
presence
X Detection-
wide sonic beam A1, A2
Switching window and switching point: limit
narrow sonic beam
Output 1
A1 A2 2. Window mode
Output 1
A2 A1
N. O.
Output 2 prog. with A1 key A2 > A1
A3 A1 A2
Power supplies
prog. with A2 key

Control units/
Output 2
A3 N. C.
A1> A2
Note: A2 A1
means: cover transducer surface with your hand,
while programming the output. 3. Hysteresis mode
If A1 = A2, the output work like A1 < A2

N. C.
A2 > A1
A1 A2
N. O.
A1 > A2
A2 A1
Accessories
Note:
while teaching the switching point.
If A1 = A2, the output works like A2 > A1
Ultrasonic sensor UB1500-F42(S)-UK-V95
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN
Series

NO/NC selectable
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB1500-F42 S-UK-V95
UB1500-F42 -UK-V95
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43

LED green permanently green: Power on ! !
LED yellow permanent: switching state switch output ! !
LED red normal operation: "fault" ! !
Series

-F54
Operating voltage 20 ... V DC ... 253 V AC ! !

Output type 1 relay output ! !
Rated operational current 3A ! !
Series
-F64

Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! !
Series

-D1

Connection Connector V95 (7/8"-16 UN 2A), 5-pin ! !
Housing PBT ! !
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! !
Mass 260 g ! !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UB1500-F42(S)-UK-V95
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2 15 7.5 5.2
7/8"-16 UN 2A
7/8"-16 UN 2A
15.5
15.5
-18GK/-18GM
22
Series
A2
A2
52.5
52.5
TEACH IN
TEACH IN
MODE
MODE
34
34
80
80
65
65
A1
A1
5
16 16
Series
-30GM
10 65 10 65
34 80 34 80
VariKont
22
Series
Series
-FP
Housing version -F42 Housing version -F 42S
Series
-F12
1 AC/DC
U 5
20 V ... 253 V
4
Series
-F42
2
Imax = 3 A
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Diagrams
Series
-D1
Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20 normally open
0.8
A1 ->
A2
0.6
0.4 10 normally closed

A2 ->
Series
A1
LUC
0.2
0 0 2. Window operation
2 1
-0.2 normally open
Double sheet
A1 < A2
monitoring
-0.4 -10 A1 A2
-0.6
normally closed
-0.8 A2 < A1 A2 A1
-20
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
Distance [m]
Power supplies
Control units/

A1 < A2
A1 A2
normally closed
A2 < A1 A2 A1

Accessories

sensing range
Ultrasonic sensor UB2000-F42(S)-...-V15
-12GM
Series

TEACH-IN
-18GK/-18GM

Series
1 Switch output
UB2000-F42(S)-E4-V15
Series
-30GM
UB2000-F42(S)-E5-V15
UB2000-F42(S)-E6-V15
UB2000-F42(S)-E7-V15
VariKont
Series

UB2000-F42(S)-U-V15
UB2000-F42(S)-I-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-F42 S-E4-V15
UB2000-F42 S-E5-V15
UB2000-F42 S-E6-V15
UB2000-F42 S-E7-V15
UB2000-F42 S-U-V15
UB2000-F42 -E4-V15
UB2000-F42 -E5-V15
UB2000-F42 -E6-V15
UB2000-F42 -E7-V15
UB2000-F42 S-I-V15
UB2000-F42 -U-V15
UB2000-F42 -I-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 60 ... 2000 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Adjustment range 90 ... 2000 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 60 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Standard target plate 100 mm x 100 mm ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer frequency approx. 175 kHz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 150 ms ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

LED green permanently green: Power on ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanent: object in evaluation range, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! ! ! !
permanent: switching state switch output, flashing: TEACH-IN function ! ! ! !
Series
-F54
LED red normal operation: "fault", TEACH-IN function: no object detected ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
17 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !
No-load supply current 50 mA ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series

-F64

1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC, parameterisable ! !
2 switch outputs npn, normally open/close selectable ! !
2 switch outputs pnp, normally open/close selectable ! !
Series
-D1
Rated operational current 200 mA , short-circuit/overload protected ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Voltage drop 2,5 V ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Switching frequency 2,7 Hz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Range hysteresis 1 % of the set operating distance ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
0,5 % of switching point
Series
Repeat accuracy ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LUC

Resolution 0,7 mm ! ! ! !
0 ... 300 Ohm ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Temperature influence 1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Synchronisation bi-directional ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
Power supplies
30 Hz
Control units/
Common mode operation ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Multiplex operation 30/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Ambient temperature -25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Protection degree IP54 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Housing ABS ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Accessories
Transducer epoxy resin/hollow glass sphere mixture; foam polyurethane, cover PBT ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Mass 140 g ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB2000-F42(S)-...-V15
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2 15 7.5 5.2
15.5
15.5
-18GK/-18GM
22
M12x1
M12x1
Series
A2
A2
52.5
52.5
SET
TEACH IN
SET
TEACH IN
34
34
MODE
MODE
80
80
65
65
A1
A1
5
16 16
Series
-30GM
10 65 10 65
34 80 34 80
22
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Housing version -F42 Housing version -F42S
Series
-F12
(version E4, npn) (version E6, pnp) (version I)
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) + UB
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 2 (WH)
Switch output Sync. Teaching input
U 2 (WH) U 4 (BK) U 5 (GY)
Teaching input Switch output 1 Sync.
Series
5 (GY) 2 (WH) 4 (BK)
-F42
Synchronous Switch output 2 Analog output
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F43
(version E5, pnp) (version E7, npn) (version U)
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
+ UB + UB
2 (WH) Teaching input 4 (BK) 2 (WH)
Switch output 1 Teaching input
U 5 (GY) U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY)
Synchronous Switch output 2 Sync.
Series
4 (BK) 5 (GY) 4 (BK)
Switch output Sync.
-F54
Analog output
3 (BU)
- UB 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB
Series
-F64

Unusable area
Series
-D1
Distance Y [m]
1
Object distance
Flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm
Object distance
Object distance
0.5 N. O. (A1 < A2):
Rising ramp
0 A1 A2 A1
Output 2
N. C.
Series
LUC
Falling ramp A2 A2
-0.5 N. C. (A1 > A2):
A1
Round bar, 25 mm A1 A2 Output 1
-1
A1 N. O.
Zero line Output 2 A1
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
A2 A2
Distance X [m] A1 , A2 : Object presence detection
Double sheet
A1 = 0 A2 Object-
monitoring
Y Both outputs are active if Object within detection range.

presence
X Detection-
narrow sonic beam
Output 1
Output 1
A2 A1
N. O.
A3 A1 A2
Power supplies
prog. with A2 key

Control units/
Output 2
A3 N. C.
A1> A2
Note: A2 A1

N. C.
A2 > A1
A1 A2
N. O.
A1 > A2
A2 A1
Accessories
Note:
Ultrasonic sensor UB3000-F42-UK-V95
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN
Series

NO/NC selectable
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB3000-F42 -UK-V95
Model number
Series
-F42

Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 325 ms !

LED green permanently green: Power on !
LED yellow permanent: switching state switch output !
LED red normal operation: "fault" !
Series
-F54
Operating voltage 20 ... V DC ... 253 V AC !

Output type 1 relay output !
Rated operational current 3A !
Series

-F64
Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point !

Temperature influence 1 % of full-scale value !
Series
-D1

Connection Connector V95 (7/8"-16 UN 2A), 5-pin !
Housing PBT !
Mass 260 g !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UB3000-F42-UK-V95
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2
-18GK/-18GM
Series
7/8"-16 UN 2A
15.5
Membrane keys 30
A2
52.5
TEACH IN
MODE
34
Series
-30GM
80
65
A1
LED window
5 16
VariKont
Series
10 65
34 80
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
1 AC/DC
U 5
20 V ... 253 V
4
Series
-F42
2
Imax = 3 A
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Diagrams
Series
-D1
Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20 normally open
1.5 A1 ->
A2
1.0
10 normally closed
A2 ->
Series
A1
LUC
0.5
2 1
0 0 2. Window operation
-0.5 normally open

Double sheet
A1 < A2
monitoring
-10 A1 A2
-1.0
normally closed
-1.5
A2 < A1 A2 A1
-20
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Distance [m]
Power supplies
Control units/

A1 < A2
A1 A2
normally closed
A2 < A1 A2 A1

Accessories

sensing range
Ultrasonic sensor UB4000-F42-...-V15
-12GM
Series

TEACH-IN
-18GK/-18GM

Series
1 Switch output
UB4000-F42-E4-V15
Series
-30GM
UB4000-F42-E5-V15
UB4000-F42-E6-V15
UB4000-F42-E7-V15
VariKont
Series

UB4000-F42-U-V15
UB4000-F42-I-V15
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB4000-F42 -E4-V15
UB4000-F42 -E5-V15
UB4000-F42 -E6-V15
UB4000-F42 -E7-V15
UB4000-F42 -U-V15
UB4000-F42 -I-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 200 ... 4000 mm ! ! ! ! ! !

Adjustment range 240 ... 4000 mm ! ! ! ! ! !
Unusable area 0 ... 200 mm ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer frequency approx. 85 kHz ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
Response delay approx. 325 ms ! ! ! ! ! !

LED green permanently green: Power on ! ! ! ! ! !
LED yellow permanent: object in evaluation range ! !
permanent: switching state switch output ! !
Series
-F54
LED yellow 1 permanent: switching state switch output 1 ! !

LED yellow 2 permanent: switching state switch output 2 ! !
LED red normal operation: "fault" ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F64
Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! ! ! !

17 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS !
Series
-D1

2 switch outputs npn, normally open/close selectable !
2 switch outputs pnp, normally open/close selectable !
2,5 V
Series
Voltage drop ! ! ! !
LUC
Switching frequency 1,2 Hz ! ! ! !

Repeat accuracy 0,5 % of switching point ! ! !
Double sheet
monitoring

0 ... 300 Ohm !
Temperature influence 1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! ! ! !
Synchronisation bi-directional ! ! ! ! ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
0 level -UB...+1 V
1 level: +4 V...+UB
Common mode operation 13 Hz ! ! ! ! ! !

Multiplex operation 13/n Hz, n = number of sensors ! ! ! ! ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! !
Accessories

Connection connector V15 (M12 x 1), 5 pin ! ! ! ! ! !
Housing ABS ! ! ! ! ! !
Mass 150 g ! ! ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB4000-F42-...-V15
-12GM
Series
15 7.5 5.2
-18GK/-18GM
Series
15.5
Membrane keys 30
M12x1
A2
52.5
TEACH IN
SET
34
Series
-30GM
MODE
80
65
A1
LED window
5 16
VariKont
Series
10 65
34 80
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
+ UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH) 2 (WH)
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY) U 5 (GY)
Series
5 (GY) 4 (BK) 4 (BK)
-F42
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F43
(version I) (version E6, pnp) (version E7, npn)
1 (BN) + UB 1 (BN) 1 (BN)
+ UB + UB
2 (WH) 5 (GY) 4 (BK)
Teaching input Sync. Switch output 1
U 5 (GY) U 4 (BK) U 2 (WH)
Sync. Switch output 1 Switch output 2
4 (BK)
Series
2 (WH) 5 (GY)
Analog output Sync.
-F54
Switch output 2
3 (BU) 3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB - UB
Series
-F64

Unusable area
Series
-D1
Distance Y [m]
2
Flat surface 100 mm x 100 mm Object distance
1.5
Object distance
1 Object distance
N. O. (A1 < A2):
0.5
Rising ramp
0 A1 A2 A1
Output 2
N. C.
Series
-0.5
LUC
Falling ramp A2 A2
N. C. (A1 > A2):
-1 A1
A1 A2 Output 1
-1.5 A1
Round bar, 25 mm N. O.
-2 Zero line Output 2 A1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
A2 A2
Distance X [m] A1 , A2 : Object presence detection
Double sheet
A1 = 0 A2 Object-
monitoring
Y Both outputs are active if Object within detection range.

presence
X Detection-
narrow sonic beam
Output 1
Output 1
A2 A1
N. O.
A3 A1 A2
Power supplies
prog. with A2 key

Control units/
Output 2
A3 N. C.
A1> A2
Note: A2 A1

N. C.
A2 > A1
A1 A2
N. O.
A1 > A2
A2 A1
Accessories
Note:
-12GM
Series
UB...-F42(S)-... , output versions -UK

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Safety notes:
The supply circuit is separated from the relay circuit by basic insulation.
Safety class II is only guaranteed when using the accessorial connector cable. The connector cable may only
be separated from the unit when the power is off.
Series
-30GM
CAUTION:
The UB...-F42(S)-UK-V95 ultrasonic sensor is not suitable for use in environments subject to explo-
sion hazards.
VariKont
Series
Conformity: EN 60947-5-2
Housing insulation: Safety class II
Degree of contamination: 3
Overvoltage category: III
Series
-FP
Parameterisation:
You can use 2 keys to parameterise the sensor. In order to start the switch point 1 learning mode, press the A1 key; in order
to start the switch point 2 learning mode, press the A1 key.
If you keep both keys pressed as you switch on the power supply, the sensor will switch over to the sensitivity adjustment mode
Series
-F12
of operation.
In case the parameterisation procedure is not completed within 5 minutes, the sensor will discontinue the process and retain
all previous settings.
Teaching in switch points:
Series
-F42
Teaching in A1 switch point

by pressing A1 key.
Keep A1 key pressed for The sensor enters the switch point 1 learning
Series
-F43
> 2s mode
Position target object in the The sensor indicates via LED lights whether the
desired distance target object has been detected. In case the
object has been detected, the yellow LED will
Series
-F54
flash; if the object has not been detected, the red

LED flashes.
Briefly press the A1 key The sensor completes the switch point 1
Series
TEACH-IN process and saves this value in non-

-F64
volatile memory. In the event of an uncer tain

object (flashing red LED), the value learned is
invalid. The system exits the TEACH-IN mode.
Analogously, the A2 switch point is learned in the same fashion as described above using the A2 key.
Series
-D1
Switching hysteresis operation mode <--> switch point/window operation mode:
Keep both A1 and A2 keys The sensor indicates the current operation mode
pressed through the green LED.
Series
LUC
per manent green: Switch point/window operation

mode
flashing green: Hysteresis operation mode
Double sheet
monitoring
after 2 seconds: The sensor changes the operation mode which

can be identified through the green LED.
per manent green: Switch point/window operation
mode
flashing green: Hysteresis operation mode
Power supplies
Control units/
Release keys The green LED of the sensor keeps indicating

the operation mode selected for additional 5
seconds
Accessories
-12GM
Series
Suppression of disturbing targets
Some types of installation or particular conditions during operation of an ultrasonic sensor may admit that undesired objects
-18GK/-18GM
(such as shelf brow posts, edges of machines) are closer than the actual target as they enter the recording range. In this case,
Series
the sensor would normally detect these objects rather than the desired target. So in order to ensure an error-free operation, in
may be necessary to suppress those objects.
Objects can be suppressed if they meet the following conditions:
- The disturbing target must not hide the actual target completely.
- The amplitude of the disturbing signal must be smaller than the amplitude of the desired signal.
Series
-30GM
- The disturbing target must remain in the edge region of the sound lobe and must not enter its center.
Sound lobe
VariKont
Series
Centre of
sound lobe
Target
suppressable not suppressable
Series
object object
-FP
The suppression of the disturbing target is effected through reduction of the response sensitivity. This figure shows its effect
on the response characteristics of the sensor. The sensor is preset on step 1 by the manufacturer.
100 %
Series
-F12
Step 1
50 %
Step 4
Step 20 Step 12
Step 17
Step 21
Series
-F42
50 %
Series
100 %
-F43
25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %
Sensitivity adjustment for suppression of disturbing targets

Remove the actual target object from the detection range.
Series
-F54
Keep A1 and A2 keys The sensor enters the sensitivity adjustment mode
pressed as you switch of operation.
on power supply The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted in 24 steps.
Step 1 = high response
Series
-F64
Step 24 = low response
Br iefly press the A1 key Response is increased. The LED lights indicate the
actual state of the sensor.
- flashing red: no disturbing target detected
Series
-D1
- flashing yellow: disturbing target detected
- permanent red: upper setting limit is reached.
Br iefly press the A2 key Response is decreased. The LED lights indicate the
Series
actual state of the sensor.

LUC
- flashing red: no disturbing target detected

- flashing yellow: disturbing target detected
- permanent red: lower setting limit is reached.
Double sheet
monitoring
Press both A1 and A2 Exiting sensitivity adjustment. The sensor response

keys at once is saved in non-volatile memor y.
In the event the sensitivity adjustment is not exited
through this procedure, the sensor will exit this
Power supplies
Control units/
operation mode automatically after 5 minutes, and

the previous sensitivity value remains valid.
Accessories
-12GM
Series
UB...-F42(S)-... , output versions -E4 and -E5

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Functional Description
The sensor may be completely parameterised via two keys on the side panel of the housing. As a special feature provided by
this sensor, the ultrasound beam width may be adapted to the environmental conditions at the place of operation of the sensor.
Default settings
Series
-30GM
A1: Minimum sensing range

A2: Nominal distance
window function
wide ultrasound beam
VariKont
Series
Specifying the switching points:

When specifying the switching points, the user determines at which points the switching output changes its state. The order of
the switching points A1 > A2, or A1 < A2 also determines the direction of action (i.e. normally-closed/normally-open contact
function).
Series
-FP
Specifying the A1 switching point by pressing the A1 key
Holding down the A1key > 2 The sensor switches to learn mode and the user may
seconds specify the A1 switching point
Series
Positioning the target object The yellow LED of the sensor flashes fast to indicate
-F12
at the desired distance that the target object has been recognised. The red
LED flashes if the object has not been recognised.
Briefly pressing the A1 key The sensor terminates the specification of the A1
Series
switching point and saves it as a non-volatile value. The

-F42
specified value is invalid if the object is uncertain (i.e.

the red LED lights up at irregular intervals). The learn
mode is exited.
The A2 switching point is specified via the A2 key, analogous to the description above.
Series
-F43
Alternatively, the switching points may also be specified electrically via the learn input. To specify the A1 switching point, the
learn input must be connected to
-UB ; to specify the A2 switching point, it must be connected to +U B . Specified values are saved upon the disconnection from
the learn input.
Series
Switching points may only be specified directly after Power on. A time lock secures the adjusted switching points against un-
-F54
intended modification 5 minutes after the last keypress. To modify the switching points later, the user may specify the desired
values only after a new Power On.
Proceed as follows to parameterise the output function and the ultrasound beam width:
Series
-F64
Press the A1 key during Power on and hold down the key for another second to ensure that the sensor starts the two-step
parameterisation of the operating modes.
Step 1, parameterisation of the output function

The output function parameterised last is displayed. All output functions available may be selected via consecutive, brief stro-
Series
-D1
kes of the A2 key. These strokes are visualised via short flashes of the green LED.
Operating mode Flash sequence of the green LED A2 key

1 switching point/
Series
LUC
pause
object detection
Window function
pause
(default)
Double sheet
monitoring
Hysteresis mode
pause
Hold down the A1 key for 2 seconds to save the selected output mode, complete the parameterisation and ensure that the
Power supplies
Control units/
sensor returns to normal mode. Step 2 may be initiated by briefly pressing the A1 key (parameterisation of the ultrasound beam
width).
Accessories
-12GM
Series
Step 2, parameterisation of the ultrasound beam width
In the near range, via Step 2, the ultrasound beam width may be adapted to the requirements of the corresponding application.
-18GK/-18GM
The beam width parameterised last is displayed first. Available beam width settings may be selected via consecutive, brief stro-
Series
kes of the A2 key. These strokes are visualised via the flash sequence of the red LED.
Beam width Flash sequence of the red LED A2 key
Small beam
Series
-30GM
pause
Medium beam
pause
VariKont
Series
Large beam
pause
Hold down the A1 key for 2 seconds to save the selected beam shape, complete the parameterisation and ensure that the
Series
sensor returns to normal mode. Briefly press the A1 key to return to Step 1 (parameterisation of the output function).
-FP
If the parameterisation mode is not terminated within 5 minutes after last keypress (by holding down the A1 key for 2 seconds),
Series
the sensor aborts this mode without modifying the settings.
-F12
Synchronisation
The sensor has a synchronisation port to suppress mutual influencing. If this port has not been connected, the sensor works
at an internally generated cycle rate. Several sensors may be synchronised via the following options.
Series
-F42
The sensor may be synchronised via the external application of a square wave voltage. A synchronisation pulse on the syn-
chronisation input initiates a measuring cycle. The pulse width must be greater than 100 s. The measuring cycle is started
with the falling edge. A low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input initiate the transition to normal sensor mode. A high
level on the synchronisation input deactivates the sensor.
Series
-F43
Two modes are possible:
- Several sensors are controlled via the same synchronisation signal. The sensors work in common mode.
- The synchronisation pulses are forwarded at cyclic intervals to respectively one single sensor. The sensors work in mul-
tiplex mode.
Self-synchronisation:
Series
-F54
The synchronisation ports of up to 5 sensors suitable for self-synchronisation are connected to each other. These sensors work
in multiplex mode after Power on. The On delay increases depending on the number of sensors to be synchronised. While the
learn mode is active, no synchronisation is possible (and vice-versa). To specify the switching points, the sensors must be ope-
rated in non-synchronised mode.
Series
-F64
Note:
If the synchronisation option is not used, the synchronisation input must be connected to ground (0V) or the sensor must be
operated with a (4-pole) V1 connecting cable.
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
-12GM
Series
UB...-F42(S)-... , output versions -E6 and -E7

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Functional description
The sensor can be completely parameterised using 2 keys on the side of the housing. One special feature of this sensor is the
option of adapting the ultrasonic beam width to the ambient conditions at the place where the sensor is used.
Default settings
Series
-30GM
A1: blind range

A2: nominal distance
2 x normally open function
Wide ultrasonic beam width
VariKont
Series
Teach-in of switching points:

Teach-in of switching points is used to determine the points at which the switching outputs will change their state. In addition,
the order of switching points A1 < A2, or A1 > A2 also determines the effective direction (normally closed/open function) of the
window in the output function (operating mode) "Window + Switching point (see below).
Series
-FP
Teach-in of switching point A1 with key A1
Press key A1 > 2 seconds The sensor goes into learning mode for switching point
A1
Series
Position the target object at The sensor indicates by rapid flashing of the yellow
-F12
the desired distance LED that the target object has been detected. If no ob-
ject is detected, the red LED flashes.
Press key A1 briefly The sensor completes the Teach-in process for switch-
Series
ing point A1 and stores the value in permanent memo-

-F42
ry. If the object is uncertain (red LED lit irregularly) the

Teach-in value is not valid. Teach-in mode closes.
The process for Teach-in of switching point A2 is similar to what was described above, using key A2.
Series
Special feature for output function "Window + switching point

-F43
In the case of the output function (operating mode) "Window + switching point (see below), switching points A1 and A2 define
the window limits of switch output 1.
A third switching point A3 can also be defined here at which switch output 2 switches.
Series
Teach-in of switching point A3 with keys A1 and A2

-F54
(only for operating mode window + switching point, see below)
Press key A1 + A2 > 2 sec- The sensor goes into learning mode for switching point
onds A3
Series
-F64
the desired distance LEDs that the target object has been detected. If no ob-
Series
-D1
(output 2: normally closed) ing point A3 and stores the value in permanent memo-
ry.
or If the object is uncertain (red LED lit irregularly) the
Press key A2 briefly
Series
LUC
(output 2: normally open)

Teach-in for switching points can only be performed within the first 5 minutes after turning on the power supply. If the switching
points need to be changed at a later time, this cannot be done until there is a new Power On.
Double sheet
monitoring
Parameter assignment of the output function and ultrasound beam width
If you press the A1 key while the power supply is being turned on and then hold it down for 1 second, the sensor goes into the
two-level parameterisation of operating modes.
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
Level 1, parametrisation of the output function
Pressing the A2 key briefly will cause the possible output functions to be selected one after the other (depending on the last
-18GK/-18GM
output function to be parameterised). The functions are indicated by a flashing sequence of the green LED.
Series
Operating mode Flashing sequence of green LED A2 key

Pause
(default)
Series
-30GM
2 x normally closed func-
Pause
tion
2 switching points
VariKont
Series
Pause
n.o. (output 1) +
n.c. (output 2)
Window (output 1) +
Pause
switching point (output 2)
Series
-FP
Pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds saves the selected output operating mode. The parameter assignment process is then com-
plete and the sensor returns to normal mode. If you press the A1 key briefly instead, you go to Level 2 (parameter assignment
of ultrasonic beam range).
Series
-F12
Level 2, parameter assignment of ultrasonic beam width
The ultrasonic beam width can be adjusted to match the requirements of the application in Level 2.
Pressing the A2 key briefly will cause the possible beam widths to be selected one after the other (depending on the last beam
width to be parameterised). The functions are indicated by a flashing sequence of the red LED.
Series
-F42
Beam width Flashing sequence of red LED A2 key
Narrow beam width

Pause
Series
-F43
Average beam width
Pause
Wide beam
Pause
(default)
Series
-F54
Pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds saves the selected type of beam width. The parameter assignment process is then complete
and the sensor returns to normal mode. If you press the A1 briefly instead, you go back to Level 1 (parameter assignment of
output function).
Series
-F64
If parameterisation is not complete within 5 minutes (pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds), the sensor interrupts parameterisation
mode without changing the settings.
Series
-D1
Synchronisation
The sensor is equipped with a synchronisation connection to suppress mutual interaction. If it is not turned on, the sensor works
at an internally generated cycle rate. Synchronisation of more than one sensor is possible in a number of different ways.
Series
LUC
The sensor can be synchronised by the application of a square wave voltage externally. A synchronisation pulse on the syn-
chronisation input results in the execution of a measurement cycle. The pulse width must be greater than 100 s. The measu-
rement cycle must be started with the falling signal edge. A Low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input results in normal
operation of the sensor. A High level on the synchronisation input deactivates the sensor.
Double sheet
monitoring
Two different operating modes are possible

- Multiple sensors can be controlled by the same synchronisation signal. The sensors work on synonymous cycle.
- Synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to only one sensor each time. The sensors work in Multiplex mode.
Self synchronisation:
The synchronisation connections of up to 5 sensors with option for self-synchronisation are connected with each other. These
Power supplies
Control units/
sensors work after turning on the operating voltage in Multiplex mode. The On delay increases depending on the number of
sensors to be synchronised. Synchronisation is possible during Teach-in and vice-versa. Sensors must be operated unsyn-
chronised to perform Teach-in of switching points.
Note:
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input can be connected with ground (0 V) or the sensor can
be operated with a V1 connection cable (4-pin).
Accessories
-12GM
Series
UB...-F42(S)-... , output versions -I and -U

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Functional description
The sensor can be completely parameterised using 2 keys on the side of the housing. One special feature of this sensor is the
option of adapting the ultrasonic beam width to the ambient conditions at the place where the sensor is used.
Default settings
Series
-30GM
A1: blind range

A2: nominal distance
Wide ultrasonic beam width
VariKont
Series
Teach-in of switching points:

Teach-in of switching points is used to determine the points at which the switching outputs will change their state. In addition,
the order of switching points A1 < A2, or A1 > A2 also determines the effective direction (normally closed/open function) of the
window in the output function (operating mode) "Window + Switching point (see below).
Series
-FP
Teach-in of switching point A1 with key A1
Press key A1 > 2 seconds The sensor goes into learning mode for switching point
A1
Series
-F12
the desired distance LED that the target object has been detected. If no ob-
Series
ing point A1 and stores the value in permanent memo-

-F42
ry. If the object is uncertain (red LED lit irregularly) the

The process for Teach-in of switching point A2 is similar to what was described above, using key A2.
Series
Special feature for output function "Window + switching point

-F43
In the case of the output function (operating mode) "Window + switching point (see below), switching points A1 and A2 define
the window limits of switch output 1.
A third switching point A3 can also be defined here at which switch output 2 switches.
Series
Teach-in of switching point A3 with keys A1 and A2

-F54
(only for operating mode window + switching point, see below)
Press key A1 + A2 > 2 sec- The sensor goes into learning mode for switching point
onds A3
Series
-F64
the desired distance LEDs that the target object has been detected. If no ob-
Series
-D1
(output 2: normally closed) ing point A3 and stores the value in permanent memo-
ry.
or If the object is uncertain (red LED lit irregularly) the
Press key A2 briefly
Series
LUC
(output 2: normally open)

Teach-in for switching points can only be performed within the first 5 minutes after turning on the power supply. If the switching
points need to be changed at a later time, this cannot be done until there is a new Power On.
Double sheet
monitoring
Parameter assignment of the output function and ultrasound beam width
If you press the A1 key while the power supply is being turned on and then hold it down for 1 second, the sensor goes into the
two-level parameterisation of operating modes.
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
Level 1, parametrisation of the output function
Pressing the A2 key briefly will cause the possible output functions to be selected one after the other (depending on the last
-18GK/-18GM
output function to be parameterised). The functions are indicated by a flashing sequence of the green LED.
Series
Operating mode Flashing sequence of green LED A2 key

Pause
(default)
Series
-30GM
2 x normally closed func-
Pause
tion
2 switching points
VariKont
Series
Pause
n.o. (output 1) +
n.c. (output 2)
Window (output 1) +
Pause
switching point (output 2)
Series
-FP
Pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds saves the selected output operating mode. The parameter assignment process is then com-
plete and the sensor returns to normal mode. If you press the A1 key briefly instead, you go to Level 2 (parameter assignment
of ultrasonic beam range).
Series
-F12
Level 2, parameter assignment of ultrasonic beam width
The ultrasonic beam width can be adjusted to match the requirements of the application in Level 2.
Pressing the A2 key briefly will cause the possible beam widths to be selected one after the other (depending on the last beam
width to be parameterised). The functions are indicated by a flashing sequence of the red LED.
Series
-F42
Beam width Flashing sequence of red LED A2 key
Narrow beam width

Pause
Series
-F43
Average beam width
Pause
Wide beam
Pause
(default)
Series
-F54
Pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds saves the selected type of beam width. The parameter assignment process is then complete
and the sensor returns to normal mode. If you press the A1 briefly instead, you go back to Level 1 (parameter assignment of
output function).
Series
-F64
If parameterisation is not complete within 5 minutes (pressing the A1 key for 2 seconds), the sensor interrupts parameterisation
mode without changing the settings.
Series
-D1
Synchronisation
The sensor is equipped with a synchronisation connection to suppress mutual interaction. If it is not turned on, the sensor works
at an internally generated cycle rate. Synchronisation of more than one sensor is possible in a number of different ways.
Series
LUC
The sensor can be synchronised by the application of a square wave voltage externally. A synchronisation pulse on the syn-
chronisation input results in the execution of a measurement cycle. The pulse width must be greater than 100 s. The measu-
rement cycle must be started with the falling signal edge. A Low level > 1 s or an open synchronisation input results in normal
operation of the sensor. A High level on the synchronisation input deactivates the sensor.
Double sheet
monitoring
Two different operating modes are possible

- Multiple sensors can be controlled by the same synchronisation signal. The sensors work on synonymous cycle.
- Synchronisation pulses are sent cyclically to only one sensor each time. The sensors work in Multiplex mode.
Self synchronisation:
The synchronisation connections of up to 5 sensors with option for self-synchronisation are connected with each other. These
Power supplies
Control units/
sensors work after turning on the operating voltage in Multiplex mode. The On delay increases depending on the number of
sensors to be synchronised. Synchronisation is possible during Teach-in and vice-versa. Sensors must be operated unsyn-
chronised to perform Teach-in of switching points.
Note:
If the option for synchronisation is not used, the synchronisation input can be connected with ground (0 V) or the sensor can
be operated with a V1 connection cable (4-pin).
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -F43
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17 UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17 300 mm 156
UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17 2000 mm
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UC...-F43-2KIR2-V17
-12GM
Series
Current output 4 mA ... 20 mA

2 relay outputs
-18GK/-18GM
Serial interface
Series
Reverse polarity protection
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC2000-F43 -2KIR2-V17
UC300-F43-2KIR2-V1 7
Model number
Series
-F42

80 ... 2000 mm !
Series
-F43
0 mm !
approx. 390 kHz !
Response delay minimum (EM; NONE): 20 ms (2 measuring cycles) !
factory setting (EM, MXN, 5, 2): 60 ms (6 measuring cycles)
Series
-F54
dynamic (EM,DYN): 30 ms (3 measuring cycles)

minimum (EM; NONE): 50 ms (2 measuring cycles) !
factory setting (EM, MXN, 5, 2): 150 ms (6 measuring cycles)
LED green continuous: object in the measuring window ! !
flashing: object outside the measuring window
Series
-F64
LED red error (e. g. interference level too high) ! !

Operating voltage 10 ... 30 V DC ! !
ripple 10 %SS
Power consumption 2 W(all relays pulled-in, current output 20 mA) ! !
no-load power consumption 0.7 W
Series
Output type 2 relay outputs, 1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA ! !

-D1
Deviation of the characteristic curve < 0,2 % of full-scale value ! !

Resolution 0,2 mm !
0,6 mm !
Load impedance current output: ! !
Series
LUC
500 at UB 17V
200 at UB < 17V
Range hysteresis 0 ... 15 % parameterisable with ULTRA2001 ! !
Contact loading 60 V DC / 1 A (max. 24 W DC), ohmic !
Double sheet
monitoring
60 V DC/1 A (max. 24 WDC), ohmic !

Lifetime ! !
electrical: 3 x 105 switching cycles at resistive load (1 A / 24 V DC)
mechanical: 107 switching cycles
Power supplies
Control units/

-25 ... 70 C (248 ... 343 K) !

Connection 8-pin round connector, Lumberg type RSF 8 ! !
Material
Housing PBT ! !
Accessories
Mass 290 g ! !
Dimensions UC...-F43-2KIR2-V17
-12GM
Series
LED window 22 LED window 22
5.5
5.5
-18GK/-18GM
Series
13
13
Series
-30GM
100
100
117
117
100
100
134
134
VariKont
Series
M4 M4
Bore holes for thread M4 Bore holes for thread M4
(The delivery includes 4 pcs.) (The delivery includes 4 pcs.)
41 5.5 30 41 5.5 30
Series
52 52
-FP
Transducer 14 mm countersunk Transducer 5 mm countersunk
UC300-F 43-2KIR2-V17 UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
2
-F43
(BN)
+UB
1 (WH)
U 4 (YE)
6 (PK)
7 (BU)
-UB
3 (GN)
RxD
Series
5 (GY)
-F54
TxD
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Basic setting Characteristic response curve Basic setting
OM: OM:
Relay 1: NO 0.5
Relay 1: NO
0.15
Relay 2: NO Relay 2: NO
Double sheet
monitoring
0.4
0.10 SD1/SD2: SD1/SD2:
0.3
Switch point relay 1 = 25 mm Switch point relay 1 = 100 mm
Switch point relay 2 = 50 mm 0.2 Switch point relay 2 = 2000 mm
0.05
0.1
2 NDE/FDE: NDE/FDE:
2 1
0.00 Analogue output: 4 mA 25 mm 0.0 Analogue output: 4 mA 100 mm
1 20 mA 300 mm -0.1 20 mA 2000 mm
-0.05 FSF: -0.2 FSF:
Relay 1 and 2: Relay 1 and 2: latest state
Power supplies
Error latest state Error

Control units/
-0.3
-0.10 Analogue output: IOUT = 3,9 mA Analogue output: IOUT = 3,9 mA
-0.4
NEF: NEF:
-0.5
-0.15
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 No echo error message 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 No echo error message
MA,S: MA,S:
X Switching mode X Switching mode
Accessories
UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17 UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17
-12GM
Series
UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Thanks to its extensive command set, the sensor can be configured to suit the application via the RS 232 interface.
RS 232 command set (overview)
Command Meaning Parameter Access
VS0 Velocity of Sound at 0 C Velocity of sound at 0 centigrade VS0 in [cm/s] {10000 ... 60000) r ead and set
Series
-30GM
VS Velocity of Sound Velocity of sound VS in [cm/s] r ead

TO Temperature Offset TO in [0.1 K] {-200 ... 200} r ead and set
TEM TEMperature TEM in [0.1 K] r ead and adapt to TO
REF REFer ence measurement REF distance in [mm] adaptation of VS0
VariKont
Series
SD1 Switching Distance 1 Switching point, relay 1 SD1 in [mm] { 1 ... 800} r ead and set
SD2 Switching Distance 2 Switching point, relay 2 SD2 in [mm] {1 ... 800} r ead and set
SH1 Switching Hysteresis 1 Hysteresis, relay 1 in [%] {0 ... 15} r ead and set
SH2 Switching Hysteresis 2 Hysteresis, relay 2 in [%] {0 ... 15} r ead and set
Series
-FP
NDE Near Distance ofEvaluation Near measuring window limit in [mm] {1 ... 800} r ead and set
FDE Far Distance of Evaluation Far measuring window limit in [mm]{1 ... 800} r ead and set
BR Unusable area (Blind Range) Unusable ar ea in [mm] {0 ... 800} r ead and set
RR Range Reduction reduces sensing range [mm] {0 ... 800} r ead and set
Series
-F12
CBT Constant BurstTime Burst length {0,1, 2, 3} r ead and set

CCT Constant Cycle Time Time in [ms] {0 ... 1000} r ead and set
FTO Filter TimeOut Number of measur ements without echo to be filtered { 0 ... 255} r ead and set
EM Evaluation Method Evaluation method { 0 = NONE; PT1[,f,p,c]; MXN[,m,n]; DYN[,p] } r ead and set
Series
CON CONservative filter Counter threshold as number {0 ... 255} r ead and set
-F42
OM Output Mode OM coded [nor mally-open = 0, normally-closed = 1, inactive = I] r ead and set
FSF Fail Safe Function Failur e function type e.g. FSF,11,35 {0,1,2}, [fault current in 0.1 mA], -1 = cur rent r ead and set
output indifferently
MD Master Device Function as master r ead and set
Series
-F43
{0 = NONE},AD,RD,RT,SS,ADB,RDB,RTB }
MA Main Application Determines whether the green LED orients on analogue output or switching outputs r ead and set
{A,S}
NEF No Echo Failure Sensor behaviour when no echo is present {0,1} r ead and set
Series
-F54
AD Absolute Distance Distance in [mm] r ead

RD Relative Distance Relative distance as number {0 ... 4095} r ead
RT RunTime Echo run time in machine cycles r ead
[1 machine cycle = 1.085 s]
Series
SS1 Switching State 1 SS1 binary [0: inactive, 1 active] ( independent of OM) r ead
-F64
SS2 Switching State 2 SS2 binary [0: inactive, 1 active] ( independent of OM) r ead
ADB Absolute Distance Binary Distance in [mm] not as ASCII r ead
RDB Relative Distance Binary Relative distance as number {0 ... 4095} not as ASCII r ead
RTB RunTime Binar y Echo run time in machine cycles [1 machine cycle = 1.085 s] not as ASCII r ead
Series
-D1
ER Echo Received Echo detected: no, yes [0/1] r ead

VER VERsion Version string: xxxx r ead
ID IDentification ID string: P&F UC300-F 43-2KIR2-V17... r ead
DAT DATe Date string: e.g. Date: 04/12/02 r ead
Series
LUC
Time: 11:14:35
ST STatus Status as hexadecimal string r ead
RST ReSeT Performs a reset Command
Double sheet
monitoring
DEF DEFault settings Restor es defaults Command

SUC Stor e User Configur ation Stores all settings Command
RUC Recall User Configuration Restor es stored settings Command
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
-12GM
Series
UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Thanks to its extensive command set, the sensor can be configured to suit the application via the RS 232 interface.
RS 232 com mand set (overview)
Command Meaning Parameter Access
VS0 Velocity of Sound at 0 C Velocity of sound at 0 centigrade VS0 in [cm/s] {12000 ... 60000) read and set
Series
-30GM
VS Velocity of Sound Velocity of sound VS in [cm/s] read
TO Temperature Offset TO in [0.1K] read and set
TEM TEMperature TEM in [0.1K] read and adapt to TO
VariKont
REF REFerence measurement REF distance in [mm] {100 ... 4000} adaptation of VS0
Series
SD1 Switching Distance 1 Switching point, relay 1 SD1 in [mm] read and set
{100 ... 4000}
SD2 Switching Distance 2 Switching point, relay 2 SD1 in [mm] read and set
{100 ... 4000}
Series
SH1 Switching Hysteresis 1 Hysteresis, relay 1 in [%] {0 ... 15} read and set
-FP
SH2 Switching Hysteresis 2 Hysteresis, relay 2 in [%] {0 ... 15} read and set
NDE Near Distance of Evaluation Near measur ing window limit in [mm] read and set
{100 ... 4000}
Series
FDE Far Distance of Evaluation Far measuring window limit in [mm] read and set
-F12
{100 ... 4000}
BR Unusable area (Blind Range) Unusable area in [mm] {0 ... 4000} read and set
RR Range Reduction reduces sensing r ange [in mm] {100 ... 4000} read and set
CBT Constant Burst Time Burst length {0,1, 2, 3} read and set
Series
-F42
CCT Constant Cycle Time Time in [ms] {0 ... 1000} read and set
FTO Filter TimeOut Number of measurements without echo to be filtered {0 ... 255} read and set
EM Evaluation Method Evaluation method { 0 = NONE; PT1[,f,p,c]; MXN[,m,n]; DYN[,p] } read and set
CON CONservative filter Counter thr eshold as number {0 ... 255} read and set
Series
-F43
OM Output Mode OM coded [normally- open = 0, normally-closed = 1, inactive = I] read and set
FSF Fail Safe Function Failure function type e.g. FSF,11,35 {0,1,2} , [fault curr ent in 0.1 mA], -1 = current read and set
output indifferently
MD Master Device Function as master read and set
Series
{0 = NONE},AD,RD,RT,SS,ADB,RDB,RTB }
-F54
MA Main Application Determines whether the green LED orients on analogue output or switching outputs read and set
{A,S}
NEF No Echo Failur e Sensor behaviour when no echo is present {0,1} read and set
AD Absolute Distance Distance in [mm] read
Series
-F64
RD Relative Distance Relative distance as number { 0 ... 4095} read
RT RunTime Echo run time in machine cycles read
[1 machine cycle = 1.085s]
SS1 Switching State 1 SS1 binar y [0: inactive, 1 active] (independent of OM) read
Series
-D1
SS2 Switching State 2 SS2 binar y [0: inactive, 1 active] read
(independent of OM)
ADB Absolute Distance Binary Distance in [mm] not as ASCII read
RDB Relative Distance Binar y Relative distance as number { 0 ... 4095} read
not as ASCII
Series
LUC
RTB RunTime Binary Echo run time in machine cycles read

[1 machine cycle = 1.085s] not as ASCII
ER Echo Received Echo detected: no, yes [0/1] read
Double sheet
monitoring
VER VERsion Ver sion string: xxxx read

ID IDentification ID string: P&F UC2000- F43-2KIR2- V17... read
DAT DATe Date string: e.g. Date: 04/12/02 read
Time: 11:14:35
ST STatus Status as hexadecimal string read
Power supplies
Control units/
RST ReSeT Perfor ms a reset Command

DEF DEFault settings Restores defaults Command
SUC Store User Configuration Stores all settings Command
RUC Recall User Configur ation Restores stored settings Command
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -F54
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
UB500-F54-E4-V15 Switching output 500 mm 162
UB500-F54-E5-V15 500 mm
UB2000-F54-E4-V15 2000 mm
Series
-F43
UB2000-F54-E5-V15 2000 mm
UB500-F54-I-V15 Analogue output 500 mm 164
UB500-F54-U-V15 500 mm
Series
-F54
UB2000-F54-I-V15 2000 mm
UB2000-F54-U-V15 2000 mm
UB500-F54-H3-V1 For exter nal control/evaluation unit 500 mm 166
Series
-F64
UB2000-F54-H3-V1 2000 mm
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-F54-...-V15
-12GM
Series
Switch output
-18GK/-18GM
TEACH-IN input
Series
Deactivation option
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-F54 -E4-V15
UB2000-F54 -E5-V15
UB500-F54-E4-V15
UB500-F54-E5-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

80 ... 2000 mm ! !
50 ... 500 mm ! !
Series
-F43
0 ... 80 mm ! !
approx. 380 kHz ! !
Response delay 150 ms ! !
50 ms ! !
Series
-F54
LED green permanently green: monitoring system ! ! ! !

green flashing: TEACH-IN function
LED red flashing: normal mode: error, TEACH-IN function: no object detected ! ! ! !
Series
permanently: TEACH-IN mode, object uncertain

-F64

Output type 1 switch output E4, npn NO/NC ! !
1 switch output E5, pnp NO/NC ! !
Series
3 V
-D1
Voltage drop ! ! ! !
max. 3 Hz ! !
Repeat accuracy 1 % of full-scale value ! ! ! !
Series

LUC

switching point A1: -UB ... +1 V, switching point A2: +4 V ... +UB
input impedance: > 4.7 k, TEACH-IN pulse: 1 s
Synchronisation 1 synchronous input ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
0-level: -UB...+1 V, 1-level: +4 V...+UB

input impedance: > 12 KOhm, synchronisation pulse: 0,1 ... 28 ms
1 synchronous input ! !
0 level: -UB...+1 V, 1 level: +4 V...+UB
input impedance: > 12 KOhm, synchronisation pulse: 0.1 ... 8 ms
Power supplies
33 Hz
Control units/
! !
Multiplex operation 100 / n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
33 / n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Accessories
Material
Housing ABS ! ! ! !
Mass 100 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB...-F54-...-V15
-12GM
Series
120 120
105 105
94
-18GK/-18GM
94
Series
32
21
32
21
Series
-30GM
Bore hole and countersinking Bore hole and countersinking
for screws/hexagon M4 for screws/hexagon M4
3.5
3.5
VariKont
Series
25
25
3.5
3.5
Series
-FP
UB500-F54-... UB2000-F54-...
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB
4 (BK) 2 (WH)
U 2 (WH) U 5 (GY)
5 (GY) 4 (BK)
3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet

monitoring
0.20 0.5
0.15
0.4 A1 A2
0.3 2. Window mode, normally closed function
0.10
0.2
A2 < A1:
1
0.05
0.1 A2 A1
2 2 1
Power supplies
0.00 3. One switch point, normally open function

Control units/
0.0
A1 -> :
-0.1
-0.05
-0.2 A2
-0.10
-0.3 4. One switch point, normally closed function

-0.15
-0.4 A2 -> :
-0.20 -0.5 A1
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
Accessories

UB500-F54-... UB2000-F 54-...
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-F54-...-V15
-12GM
Series

TEACH-IN input
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Deactivation option
UB500-F54-U-V15
Series
-30GM
UB2000-F54-U-V15
UB500-F54-I-V15
UB2000-F54-I-V15
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-F54 -U-V15
UB500-F54-U-V15
UB2000-F54 -I-V15
UB500-F54-I-V15
Model number
Series
-F42

80 ... 2000 mm ! !
50 ... 500 mm ! !
Series
0 ... 80 mm ! !
-F43

approx. 380 kHz ! !
Response delay 150 ms ! !
50 ms ! !
Series
-F54
LED green permanently green: monitoring system ! ! ! !

green flashing: TEACH-IN function
LED yellow permanently yellow: object in the evaluation range ! ! ! !
yellow, flashing: TEACH-IN function, object detected
LED red flashing: normal mode: error, TEACH-IN function: no object detected ! ! ! !
permanently: TEACH-IN mode, object uncertain
Series
-F64

15 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! !
Series

-D1
Resolution 0,13 mm 0,11 mm 0,5 mm 0,47 mm

Load impedance 1 kOhm ! !
0 ... 300 Ohm ! !
Series
LUC

Input type 1 TEACH-IN input ! ! ! !
Double sheet
monitoring

Synchronisation 1 synchronous input, 0-level: -UB...+1 V, 1-level: +4 V...+UB ! !
input impedance: > 12 KOhm, synchronisation pulse: 0,1 ... 28 ms
1 synchronous input, 0 level: -UB...+1 V, 1 level: +4 V...+UB ! !
input impedance: > 12 KOhm, synchronisation pulse: 0.1 ... 8 ms
Power supplies
Control units/
33 Hz ! !
Multiplex operation 100 / n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
33 / n Hz, n = number of sensors ! !
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
Accessories
Material
Housing ABS ! ! ! !
Mass 100 g ! ! ! !
Dimensions UB...-F54-...-V15
-12GM
Series
120 120
105 105
94
-18GK/-18GM
94
Series
32
21
32
21
Series
-30GM
3.5
3.5
VariKont
Series
25
25
3.5
3.5
Series
-FP
UB500-F54-... UB2000-F54-...
Series
-F12
Series
-F42

(version I) (version U)
Series
1 (BN) 1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB + UB
2 (WH) 2 (WH)
Teaching input Teaching input
U 5 (GY) U 5 (GY)
Synchronous Synchronous
4 (BK) 4 (BK)
Analog output Analog output
3 (BU) 3 (BU)
- UB - UB
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curve Characteristic response curve Programmed analogue output function
Rising ramp
Double sheet
A1 < A2:
monitoring
0.20 0.5
object range
0.15
0.4 A1 A2
0.3 Falling ramp
0.10
0.2
A2 < A1:
1
0.05
0.1
2 2 1 A2 A1
Power supplies
0.00
Control units/
0.0
-0.1
-0.05
-0.2
-0.10
-0.3
-0.15
-0.4
-0.20 -0.5
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
Accessories
X X
UB500-F54-... UB2000-F 54-...
Ultrasonic sensor UB...-F54-H3-V1
-12GM
Series
Separate evaluation
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UB2000-F54 -H3-V1
UB500-F54-H3-V1
Model number
Series
-F42

80 ... 2000 mm !
50 ... 500 mm !
Unusable area !
0 ... 30 mm 1)
Series
!
-F43
0 ... 80 mm 1)
approx. 380 kHz !
30 mA
Series
No-load supply current ! !

-F54
Output type 1 pulse output for echo run time, short-circuit proof ! !
open collector pnp with pulldown resistor = 22 kOhm
level 0 (no echo): -UB
level 1 (echo detected): (+UB-2 V)
Series
-F64
Temperature influence the echo propagation time: 0,17 % / K ! !

Input type 1 pulse input for transmitter pulse (clock) ! !
0-level (active): < 5 V (UB > 15 V)
1-level (inactive): > 10 V ... +UB (UB > 15 V)
0-level (active): < 1/3 UB (10 V < UB < 15 V)
Series
1-level (inactive): > 2/3 UB ... +UB (10 V < UB < 15 V)

-D1
Pulse length !
20 ... 300 s (typ. 200 s) 2)
!
5 ... 100 s (typ. 50 s) 2)
Pause length 50 x pulse length ! !
Impedance 10 kOhm internal connected to +UB ! !
Series
LUC

Connection V1 connector (M12 x 1), 4-pin ! !
Double sheet
monitoring
Material
Housing ABS ! !
Mass 110 g ! !
Power supplies
Control units/
Function
The sensing range is determined in the downstream evaluation electronics (e. g. the units UH3-KHD2-4E5, UH3-KHD2-4I or UH3-T1-KT). PLC
modules or other existing evaluation units can also be substituted for these units offered by Pepperl+Fuchs.
The object distance in pulse-echo mode is obtained from the echo time.
1)
The unusable area (blind range) BR depends on the pulse duration Ti .
Accessories
2)
The sensors detection range depends on the pulse duration Ti .
Dimensions UB...-F54-H3-V1
-12GM
Series
120 120
105 105
94
-18GK/-18GM
94
Series
32
21
32
21
Series
-30GM
3.5
3.5
VariKont
Series
25
25
3.5
3.5
Series
-FP
UB500-F54-... UB2000-F54-...
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
1 (BN)
-F43
+ UB
2 (WH)
U Clock
4 (BK)
Echo
3 (BU)
- UB
Series
2 = Emitter pulse input
-F54
4 = Echo propagation time output
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves

Distance Y [m]
Double sheet
monitoring
1.5
Distance Y [m]
0.3
1
0.2
0.5
0.1
Power supplies
1
Control units/
0 0
2 2 1
-0.1
-0.5
-0.2
-1
-0.3
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Distance X [m] -1.5

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
Accessories
Distance X [m]
UB500-F54-... UB2000-F 54-...
-12GM
Series
UB...-F54-... , output versions -E4 and -E5

-18GK/-18GM
Series
Sync hro nisa tio n

The sensor fea ture s a synchronisa tio n input for t he sup pression o f m utual inte rference. If t his in put is not used, the sen so r will operate using an internally
generated clock rate. The synchronisa tio n of mu ltiple sensors can b e re alised as follows:
Exte rnal synchron isation
The se nso r can be synchronised by the e xte rnal ap plication of a sq uare wave voltage. A synchronisa tion pulse at the synchronisa tion in put start s a
Series
-30GM
measuring cycle. Th e pulse must ha ve a duratio n greater than 1 00 s. T he mea su ring cycle starts with the falling ed ge of a synchronisat ion pulse . A
low leve l > 1 s or a n open synchronisa tion in put will result in the no rma l op erat ion of the sen sor. A high level at the synchronisatio n input disables the
se nso r.
Tw o operating mo des are available
1. Mul tipl e sen sors ca n be co ntrol led by th e sam e synch ron isati on si gna l. Th e sen sors ar e synch ron ised .
VariKont
Series
2. The syn chro ni sation pul ses a re sen t cycl ical ly to in divi du al se nsor s. The se nso rs ope rate in multi ple x m ode .
Internal synchronisa tio n
The synchronisa tion co nnections of up to 5 sensors capa ble of internal synchronisatio n are connected to one an other. When power is applie d, these
se nso rs will ope rate in mu ltiplex mode. T he response delay increases acco rding to th e numbe r of sensors t o be syn chronised. Synchron isation canno t
be performed du ring T EACH -IN and vice versa. T he sensors m ust be ope rate d in an unsynchro nised manne r to t each the sw itching po int.
Series
-FP
No te:
If the o ptio n for synchronisa tio n is no t used, the synchronisa tio n in put has to be connected to ground (0V) or th e sensor h as to be o pera ted via a V1
ca ble co nnector (4-pin).
Ad justin g o f s witch ing p oin ts
The ult rasonic se nsor fe ature s a sw itch output with two teachable switching points. T hese are set by app lying the su pply voltage -U B or + UB to the
Series
-F12
TEAC H-I N inp ut. The supp ly vo ltag e m ust b e a pplied to the T EACH -IN input fo r at lea st 1 s. LEDs ind icate wh ether th e sen sor has recognised the target
during the T EACH-IN p rocedu re. Sw it ching p oin t A1 is taught w ith -U B , A2 w ith +UB .
Five differe nt outp ut functions can be set
1. Win dow m ode , n orma lly- ope n func ti on
2. Win dow m ode , n orma lly- close d fun cti on
Series
-F42
3. One sw itchi ng p oin t, no rmal ly-o pen fu nctio n

4. One sw itchi ng p oin t, no rmal ly-cl ose d fu nctio n
5. De te ction of o bj ect prese nce
TEA CH-IN win d ow m od e, n orm ally-op en fu n ctio n
- Set targ et to ne ar switching point
Series
-F43
- T EACH -IN sw itch ing point A1 w ith -U B

- Set targ et to far switchin g point
- T EACH -IN sw itch ing point A2 w ith +UB
TEA CH-IN win d ow m od e, n orm ally-clo sed fu nc tio n
Series

-F54

- Set targ et to far switchin g point
TEA CH-IN o n e switc hin g po int, n orm ally-op en fu nc tio n
Series

-F64

- C over sensor with ha nd or rem ove all o bje cts from sensing range
TEA CH-IN o n e switc hin g po int, n orm ally-clo sed fu nction
Series

-D1

TEA CH-IN d etection of o bjec t p resen ce
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Default settin g of switc hin g po ints

A1 = un usable are a
A2 = no minal se nsing rang e
LED Disp lays
Power supplies
Control units/
Displays in dependence on operating mode Red LED Yellow LED Green LED
Object detected off flashes flashes
No object detected flashes off flashes
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) on off flashes

Normal operation off switching on
Accessories
state
Fault flashes previous off
state
-12GM
Series
UB...-F54-... , output versions -I and -U
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Syn ch ron isation
T he se nso r features a synchron isation in put for the suppression of mutu al interferen ce . If this input is not used, the sensor w ill ope rate using an int ernally
gen erat ed clo ck rate. T he synchron isation of multip le sen sors can be realised as follow s:
External synchronisa tio n:
T he sensor ca n be synchron ised b y t he external applicat ion of a square w ave vo lta ge. A synchron isation pu lse at the synch ronisation input sta rts a
Series
-30GM
me asu ring cycle. T he p ulse m ust have a du ration g reate r tha n 100 s. The measuring cycle starts w ith the falling edge o f a synch ronisation pulse. A
low level > 1 s or an o pen synch ronisation input will resu lt in th e normal operation of t he sensor. A high level a t the synchron isation inpu t disab les th e
sensor.
T wo o pera ting modes are available:
1 . M ultip le se nso rs can b e con tro lle d by the s ame syn chro ni sation sign al . The se nso rs are syn chro nis ed.
VariKont
2 . Th e synch ron isa ti on p ulse s are se nt cyclic all y to i ndi vid ua l sens ors. Th e sen sors op era te in mu ltipl ex mo de.
Series
Inte rnal synchron isation:
T he synchronisation conne ctions of up to 5 se nso rs capable of inte rnal synchron isation a re conn ect ed to on e anoth er. Wh en pow er is app lied, th ese
sensors w ill operate in m ultiplex mod e.
T he response delay increases accord ing to the number of sensors to be synchro nised .
Synchro nisation cann ot be performed during TEAC H-IN and vice versa. T he sensors mu st be operated in an unsynchro nised m anner to teach th e eva-
Series
luation limit s.
-FP
N ote:
If th e option fo r synchron isation is not used , the synchron isation input has to be con nected to grou nd (0 V) or the sen sor has to b e operated via a V1
cable conne cto r (4-pin).
A dju sti ng th e eva luatio n ran ge (an alo gu e o utpu t)
Series
-F12
T he ultraso nic sensor has an a nalogue ou tput w ith prog ramm able evaluation limit s. T hese a re set by ap plying th e supply voltag e -U B or +UB to the
T EACH -IN input. T he supply voltage must be applied to the TEAC H-IN input for at least 1 s. LED s indica te wheth er the sensor has re cog nised the ta rget
during the TEACH -IN procedure. Th e lower evaluation lim it A1 is tau ght w ith -U B , A2 with + UB .
T wo d iffe rent o utput fu nction s can be set:
1 . A nal og ue va lue incre ase s with ri sing dista nce to ob je ct (ri sing r amp)
2 . A nal og ue va lue fa lls w ith risi ng d istan ce to obj ect (fa ll ing ra mpe )
Series
-F42
T EAC H-IN risin g ra mp (A 1 > A 2)
Positio n object at lower evalua tio n limit
T EACH -IN low er limit A1 w ith - UB
Positio n object at up per evaluation limit
Series
-F43
T EACH -IN upper limit A2 with + UB
T EAC H-IN fa lling ram p (A1 > A ):
Positio n object at lower evalua tio n limit
T EACH -IN low er limit A2 w ith + UB
Series
-F54
Positio n object at up per evaluation limit
T EACH -IN upper limit A1 with - UB
L ED D ispla ys
Series
-F64
Displays in dependence on operating mode Red LED Yellow Green
LED LED
Object detected off flashes flashes
Series
No object detected flashes off flashes
-D1
Object uncertain (TEACH-IN invalid) on off flashes
Normal mode (evaluation range) off on on
Fault flashes previous off
state
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -F64
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Model number Connection type Detection range Page
Series
-F43
UBE500-F64-SE0 cable 500 mm 172
UBE500-F64-SE0-V3 M8 connector, 3-pin 500 mm
UBE500-F64-SE2 cable 500 mm
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Through-beam ultrasonic barrier UBE...-F64-...
-12GM
Series
Reliable detection of transparent materials

-18GK/-18GM
Small angle of divergence

Series
Small, compact design

Plastic housing
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UBE1500-F64-SE0-V3
UBE1500-F64-SE2-V3
UBE500-F64-SE0-V3
UBE500-F64-SE2-V3
UBE1500-F64-SE0
UBE1500-F64-SE2
Model number
UBE500-F64-SE0
UBE500-F64-SE2
Series
-F42
Sensing range 0 ... 1500 mm , distance emitter-receiver 20 mm ... 1500 mm ! ! ! !

0 ... 500 mm , distance emitter-receiver 15 mm ... 500 mm ! ! ! !
Reference target receiver ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Transducer frequency 200 kHz ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LED yellow indication of the switching state (receiver) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
-F43
Operating voltage 18 ... 30 V DC , ripple 10 %SS ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

No-load supply current 20 mA receiver ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
12 mA emitter
Output type 1 switch output E0, npn NO ! ! ! !
1 switch output E2, pnp NO ! ! ! !
Series
-F54
Rated operational current 200 mA ! ! ! !

50 mA ! ! ! !
2 V ! ! ! !
Switching frequency 100 Hz ! ! ! !
120 Hz
Series
! ! ! !
-F64
Switch-on delay < 5 ms ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Ambient temperature 0 ... 60 C (273 ... 333 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Storage temperature -40 ... 85 C (233 ... 358 K) ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Protection degree IP54 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Series
Connection V3 connector (M8 x 1), 3 pin ! ! ! !

-D1
2 m, PVC cable ! ! ! !
emitter: 2 x 0.34 mm
receiver: 3 x 0.34 mm
Material
Series
Housing PA 6.6 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
LUC
Mass 80 g per device ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Fu nc tio n
Double sheet
monitoring
A through-beam ultrasonic barrier always co nsists of a single e mit ter a nd a single rece iver. T he function o f a through-beam ultrason ic barrier is b ase d
in the interrup tion of the sou nd transmission to the rece iver by the ob ject to be dete cte d.
Th e emitter sends a n ultra son ic signal tha t is evalu ated b y the receiver. If the signal is interrupte d or mute d by th e object to be d etected, t he receiver
switch es.
No e lectrical connections are required betwe en the e mitter a nd rece iver.
Th e function of th roug h-be am u ltrasonic barriers is n ot de penden t on the posit ion of their installation. We reco mmend , how ever, to install the emitter
Power supplies
Control units/
below in th e case of vert ical inst allations to p revent t he accumulation of dust particles.
Ins talla tio n tol eranc es
Th e in sta llation tolerances of the ce ntra l axes of the emitter and receiver m ay not exceed th e va lue s spe cified in the illust ration.
Detection o f thin fo ils
Fo r the detection of th in foils (< 0.1 m m), install the th roug h-be am ultra son ic barrier at an angle of > 10 from pe rpen dicular to the foil.
Cau tio n
Accessories
Moun t or replace emitter and receiver o nly in pairs. Bo th device s a re o ptim ally matche d to each o ther by the ma nufacturer.
Dimensions UBE...-F64-...
-12GM
Series
25 25
17 17
LED LED (receiver only)
-18GK/-18GM
Series
32
40
32
40
Series
-30GM
3.5
VariKont
Series
3.5
12
12
Series
-FP
18
18
24 24
Series
-F12
UBE...-F64-SE.-V3 (connector version) UBE...-F 64-SE. (cable version)
Series
-F42

Receiver: version E0, npn Receiver: version E0, npn
Series
1 BN
-F43
(BN)
+UB +UB
U 4 (BK) U BK
3 (BU) BU
-UB -UB
Series
Receiver: version E2, pnp Receiver: version E2, pnp
-F54
1 (BN) BN
+UB +UB
U 4 (BK) U BK
3 (BU) BU
-UB -UB
Series
-F64
Emitter: Emitter:
1 (BN) BN
+UB +UB
U U
3 (BU) BU
-UB -UB
Series
-D1
Diagrams
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Characteristic response curves Mounting/Adjustment Thin foil detection
Angle [degrees] Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
10
Double sheet
monitoring
20 20

A
10 10
0.0 0 0 -0
0.1 0.25
Power supplies
-10 -10
Control units/
Parallel displacement Angle displacement

0.5
0.2
A 8 mm 5
-20 -20
0.3 0.75
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 1 1.25 1.5 1.75
Distance [m] Distance [m]

Accessories
UBE500-F 64-... UBE1500-F64-...
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series -D1
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
UC500-D1-3K-V7 500 mm 176
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic sensor UC500-D1-3K-V7
-12GM
Series
Specially for level monitoring in vessels

Large operating voltage range
10 V DC ... 252 V DC
-18GK/-18GM
20 V AC ... 252 V AC
Series
3 relay outputs
Parameter assignment via DIP-switches
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UC500-D1-3K-V7
Model number
Series
Output type 3 relay outputs, normally open/closed, selectable !

-F42
Contact loading 252 V AC/150V DC, 3 A (ohm. load) !

Lifetime !
Electrical: 105 switching cycles at resistive load
(3 A / 252 V AC or 3 A / 30 V DC)
min. contact load: 100 A / 100 mV DC
mechanical: 20 x 106 switching cycles
Series
-F43
Range hysteresis 20 mm !
Temperature influence <4 % !
Series

-F54
Response delay > 10 s, relay !

< 1 s, LEDs
LED green/yellow LED 2: overfill warning and normal operation !
LED 3: normal operation and underfill warning
Series
-F64
LED red LED 1: overfill indication !

LED 4: underfill indication
DIP-switch setting of the switch points/operating modes !
Operating voltage 10 ... 252 V DC !
20 ... 252 V AC , 47 ... 63 Hz
No-load supply current < 30 mA with UB = 30 V DC !
Series
-D1
< 110 mA at UB = 10 V DC
< 25 mA at UB = 220 V AC
Series
!
LUC
Connection Cable connector 90 V7, (7-pin)

Material
Housing cover: PC !
housing: PBT
threaded flange: stainless steel
Double sheet
monitoring
installation connector/cable socket: PETP

Mass 700 g !
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UC500-D1-3K-V7
-12GM
Series
75
65
-18GK/-18GM
Series
68
Series
-30GM
39
28
Accessories
M30x1,5
VariKont
Series
64,5
146
158
Series
-FP
50
65
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
1
U UB
2
UB
3
Series
-F54
4
A1
5
A2
A3 6
Series
-F64
Series
Diagrams -D1
Series
LUC
Characteristic response curves Indicators/operating means
Angle [degrees]
LED S4 = OFF S4 = ON
Double sheet
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
monitoring
1 (red) full full

20
2 (green/yellow) high normal
3 (green/yellow) normal low
10
4 (red) empty empty
2
Power supplies
1
Control units/
0.0 -0
0.1
ON
1
-10
0.2
switch output
2
0.3 -20
adjustment
3
0.4
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Distance [m]
overspill warning run-dry warning
4
Accessories
normal operation TEACH-IN mode

5

UC500-D1-3K-V7
-12GM
Series
Safety notes:
The supply circuit is separated from the relay circuit by basic insulation.
-18GK/-18GM
Series
The cover may only be opened by specially trained personnel. Degree of contamination 2 is permis-
sible when the cover is open. Ensure that the sealing ring of the cover is in good condition.
Safety class II is only guaranteed when using the accessorial cable box and the associated mounting
screw with plastic head. When operating this device with operating voltage exceeding 42 V, you must
Series
-30GM
replace the metal mounting screw by the supplied plastic head mountig screw to avoid electric treat-
ment. The cable box may only be separated from the unit when the power is off.
CAUTION:
VariKont
Series
The UC500-D1-K3-V7 ultrasonic sensor is not suitable for use in environments subject to explosion hazards.
Conformity: EN 60947-5-2
Series
Housing insulation: Safety class II

-FP
Degree of contamination: 4
Overvoltage category: III
TEACH-IN of switching points:
Series
-F12
One switching point can be taught for each of the 3 switch outputs. Set DIP switch 5 to ON to put the sensor in TEACH-IN
mode. The sensor indicates TEACH-IN mode with two lit red LEDs. The green-yellow LEDs are off.
Next, position a suitable target object at the desired switching point in front of the sensor and switch the DIP switch associated
with the relevant switch output (switches 1-3). The sensor will now be flashing yellow or green in addition to the lit red LEDs.
Flashing green indicates that the target object was detected; flashing yellow signals that it was not detected. The measured
Series
-F42
switching point will be transferred to RAM when the associated DIP switch is switched back while the LED is flashing green.
Only the red LEDs should now be lit. This signals the user that the DIP switches 1-3 have been restored to their original posi-
tions. The other switching points are set in the same manner. The TEACH-IN procedure is completed by setting DIP switch 5
back to the OFF position. The measured switching points will then be transferred to the nonvolatile EEPROM.
Series
Under normal circumstances, switching point A1 should be less than A2, and A2 less than A3. If this is not observed, the sensor
-F43
will automatically exchange the switching points after the TEACH-IN procedure is complete so that A1 < A2 < A3. This ensures
that the LEDs respond correctly and that the shortest switching point is assigned to relay 1, the middle distance to relay 2 and
the longest distance to relay 3.
If DIP switch 4 is switched during TEACH-IN, the default value for the switching point will be set rather than a target object. The
Series
-F54
default values for the switching points are 60 mm for A1, 220 mm for A2 and 270 mm for A3.
Display during TEACH-IN:

Series
-F64
DIP1-3 one or more DI P switches changed in normal state

TEACH-IN active TEACH-IN complete
DIP4 normal state changed normal state changed

Series
-D1
TEACH-IN of object distance default parameter
State object detected object not default active

detected
Series
LUC
LED 1, red lit lit lit lit lit
LED 2, green/yellow flashes green off lit green off lit green
Double sheet
monitoring
LED 3, green/yellow off flashes yellow lit yellow off lit yellow
LED 4, red lit lit lit lit lit

Power supplies
The relays switch to the "safe state" (all relays open, regardless of close/open function) during TEACH-IN.
Control units/
Setting the switching behaviour:

In normal mode (DIP switch 5 OFF), the DIP switches 1 to 3 can be used to set the switching behaviour of the switch outputs
1 to 3. If the associated DIP switch is ON, the associated switch output has a close function; if the switch is set to OFF the
output has an open function. Close function means that the relay trips when the object distance is less than the associated
switching point; in the case of open function, the relay trips when the object distance is greater than the switching point.
Accessories
The relays switch to the "safe state" (all relays open, regardless of close/open function) in the event of a failure
Setting the display modes:
Two display modes can be selected with DIP switch 4:
UC500-D1-3K-V7
-12GM
Series
Display mode 1: DIP switch 4 ON, underfill warning:
-18GK/-18GM
Object distance x x < A1 A1 < x < A2 A2 < x < A3 x > A3
Series
LED 1, red (full) flashes off off off
LED 2, green/yellow (normal) off lit green off off
LED 3, green/yellow (low) off off flashes yellow off
Series
-30GM
LED 4, red (empty) off off off flashes
In this mode LED 1 (red) serves as the overfilling indicator, LED 2 (green) indicates the normal state, LED 3 (yellow) serves as
the preliminary warning that the container is nearly empty and LED 4 (red) signalises the "container empty" state.
VariKont
Series
Display mode 2: DIP switch 4 OFF, overfill warning
Object distance x x < A1 A1 < x < A2 A2 < x < A3 x > A3

LED 1, red (full) flashes off off off
Series
-FP
LED 2, green/yellow (high) off flashes yellow off off
LED 3, green/yellow (normal) off off lit green off
LED 4, red (empty) off off off flashes
Series
-F12
In this mode LED 1 (red) serves as the overfilling indicator, LED 2 (yellow) serves as the preliminary warning that the container
is nearly full, LED 3 (green) indicates the normal state, and LED 4 (red) signalises the "container empty" state.
The relays switch to the "safe state" (all relays open, regardless of close/open function) in the event of a failure.
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series LUC
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
LUC4T-G5P-IU-V15 4000 mm 182
LUC4T-G5S-IU-V15
Series
-F43
LUC4T-N5P-IU-V15
LUC4T-N5S-IU-V15
Series
Type code/ordering information
-F54
L U C 4 T I U V15
Series
-F64
Connection type (electrical)
V15 V15-connector (M12 x 1) 5-pin
Electrical output
Series
IU 4 mA ... 20 mA und 0 V ... 10 V
-D1
Material of process connection
S Stainless steel 1.4571

P Polypropylene
Series
LUC
Pr ocess connection
G5 screwed connection G1 A
Double sheet
monitoring
N5 screwed connection 1 NPT
Membrane surface material

T PTFE
Measuring range
Power supplies
Control units/
4 0,3 m ... 4 m
Accessories
Ultrasonic level sensor LUC4T-G5.-IU-V15
-12GM
Series
Fixed target suppression

Simple calibration
-18GK/-18GM
Function monitoring
Series
Fail-safe behaviour in the event of no echo

Output signal 4 mA ... 20 mA/0 V ... 10 V
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
LUC4T-G 5P-IU-V15
LUC4T-G 5S-IU-V15
LUC4T-N5P-IU-V15
LUC4T-N5S-IU-V15
Model number
Series
-F42
Output type 1 analogue output 4 ... 20 mA, RL 500 Ohm, error 21 mA ! ! ! !

1 voltage output 0 ... 10 V, RL 1000 Ohm, error 10.5 V
Resolution 2 mm ! ! ! !
Deviation of the characteristic curve 0,5 % of upper limit of measuring range ! ! ! !
Sensing range 0,3 ... 4 m , with fluids ! ! ! !
Series

-F43
Standards EN 60947-5-2 ! ! ! !
LED green power on ! ! ! !
LED red 2 Hz flashing: error ! ! ! !
Power consumption 1200 mW ! ! ! !
Series
-F54

Mounting screwed connection G1A ! !
Series
screwed connection 1" NPT

-F64
! !
Material
Housing PBT, stainless steel 1.4571 ! !
PBT, polypropylene ! !
Transducer PTFE (diaphragm surface) ! ! ! !
Mass 220 g ! ! ! !
Series
-D1
Dimensions
Series
LUC
V15 connector
Double sheet
monitoring
76
Power supplies
50
Control units/
G1A
or
1" NPT
44
Calibration and
configuration connector
LED LED
Accessories
Disturbance (red) Power on (green)
M12x1
Electrical connection Diagrams LUC4T-G5.-IU-V15
-12GM
Series
Characteristic response curves
1 (BN)
-18GK/-18GM
+ UB Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30
4 (BK) 4...20 mA 20
Series
U 2 (WH) 0...10 V
3 (BU)
- UB
5 (GY) 10
n.c.
Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2. 1

2
Series
-30GM
0.0 0
0.5
1.0 -10
1.5
VariKont
Series
2.0 -20
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Distance [m]

Series
-FP
Additional information
Series
-F12
Product description:
The LUC4T-... ultrasonic sensor is especially designed to measure the fill level of liquids. With its Teflon-coated surface, the
sensor is outstandingly suited for use with corrosive liquids. The masking of fixed objects permits the sensor to be deployed
in locations in which struts or other internal structures extend into the measuring field.
Series
-F42
Sensors of the LUC4T-... series feature a 4 mA ... 20 mA current and 0 V ... 10 V voltage output as standard. The outputs
have fail-safe behaviour in the event of a fault.
Function
The ultrasonic converter sends out an acoustic pulse. This pulse is reflected by the contents of the container and registered
Series
-F43
by the converter after traveling the measurement distance.
A microprocessor evaluates the echo signals and determines the fill level.
Sources of interference such as weld seams, fixed installations, etc. are suppressed reliably via the masking of fixed objects.
Temperature-related changes of the velocity of sound are compensated.
Series
-F54
Measuring system:
A measuring system consists of a LUC4T-...-IU-V15 ultrasonic level sensor and a DA5... . display unit or power supply. The
LUC4T-...-IU-V15 ultrasonic level sensor can also be connected directly to a PLC.
Series
Compensation:
-F64
Compensation (not installed) Compensation (installed) Plug posit ion
1. Empty TEACH-IN 1. Empty TEACH-IN T
simulation of 0 % level approach 0 % level in container (wait 15 s)
Series
-D1
(wait 15 s)
Accept empty value Accept empty value A1
Empty value accepted (red LED flashing) Empty value accepted (red LED flashing) A1
Empty TEACH-IN complete Empty TEACH-IN complete T
Series
LUC
2. Full TEACH-IN 2. Full TEACH-IN T

simulation of 100 % le vel (wait 15 s) approach 100 % level in container (wait
15 s)
Double sheet
Accept full value Accept full value A2

monitoring
Full value accepted (red LED flashing) Full value accepted (red LED flashing) A2
Full TEACH-IN complete Full TEACH-IN complete T
TEACH-IN complete TEACH-IN complete T
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Series UDC / UDB
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
Model number Description Page
-F42
UDC-18GM-400-3E3 Optimised for double sheet detection 186
with integrated evaluation unit
UDC-18GMA-400-3E3 Optimised for double sheet detection 190
Series
-F43
with integrated evaluation unit
Angled sensor head version
UDB-18GM35-3E2 Optimised for double sheet detection 194
UDBL-18GM35-3E2 Optimised for label detection 196
Series
-F54
UDBK-18GM35-3E2 Optimised for jointing/splice detection 198
Applications:
Series
-F64
The ultrasonic double-sheet monitor is deployed in all situa- - Deployment in letter-opening machines to verify the com-
tions in which the automatic distinction between single and plete emptying of the opened envelopes.
double sheets is required in order to protect machines or
avoid waste production. - Deployment in document counters, in which the ultrasonic
Series
double-sheet monitor ensures that bank deposit slips, for
-D1
For example: example, are properly counted.
- Deployment in printing machines, in which the ultrasonic - Deployment in packaging machines for the detection of
double-sheet monitor prevents damage to the complex splices in aluminium packaging foil and proper regulation
Series
LUC
mechanics by the inadvertent feed of two sheets or en- of the machine speed.
sures that the second sheet does not remain in the ma-
chine. - Detection of air, single and double sheet in paper process-
Double sheet
ing machinery.
monitoring
- The monitoring of bonding sheets in labeling machines, in

which the application of the sheets to a base material is de-
tected and counted.
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic double sheet monitor UDC-18GM-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Ultrasonic system for reliable detection of no, one, or two overlapping sheet
materials, preferably papers
No TEACH-IN required
-18GK/-18GM
Series

Insensitive to printing, colours and shining surfaces
Material weight from 10 g/m2 up to over 2000 g/m2
Very wide material spectrum, finest papers up to thin sheet metals as well
Series
-30GM
as plastic- and metal foils

Perpendicular or inclined sensor mounting relative to the sheet plane pos-
sible
VariKont
Series
U
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UDC-18G M-400-3E3
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 20 ... 60 mm , optimal distance: 45 mm !

LED green indication: single sheet detected !
LED yellow Display: No sheet detected (Air) !
Series
-F43
LED red indication: double sheet detected !

No-load supply current < 80 mA !
Time delay before availability < 500 ms !
Output type 3 Switch outputs pnp, normally-closed !
Series
Rated operational current 3 x 100 mA , short-circuit/overload protected !

-F54
Voltage drop 2 V !
Switch-on delay approx. 25 ms !
Switch-off delay approx. 25 ms !
Pulse extension min. 120 ms parameterisable !
Input type Function input !
Series
-F64
0-level: -UB ... -UB + 1V

1-level: +UB - 1 V ... +UB
Pulse length 100 ms !
Impedance 230 k !
Series
-D1

Connection 2 m, PVC cable 0.14 mm !
Series
LUC

Mass 150 g !
Double sheet
monitoring
Electrical connection, diagrams, additional information

Standard symbol/Connection: Mounting/Adjustment Mounting/Adjustment Thin foil detection
Double sheet control < +/- 1
Recommended distances (for very thick papers)
(BN)
Power supplies
b
Control units/
+UB
(PK)
Function input = 35
a = 5 ... 15 mm
(WH)
Output single sheet b 10 mm s < +/- 1 mm
d = 40 ... 45 mm
(BK)
s
Output double sheet

U b
(GY)
Output air
(BU)
-UB

d
a
Accessories
Dimensions UDC-18GM-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Evaluation unit with
receiver unit
-18GK/-18GM
Series
wires 70 mm with LEDs 4
wire end ferrules 24
l=2m
M18x1
Series
-30GM
45
72
74
VariKont
Series
l = 0.5 m
Emitter unit
24
Series
15
-FP
M18x1
70 500 22
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Description of sensor functions
The ultrasonic double sheet monitor is used for double sheet detection in all situations in whic h the automatic distinction between double
and single sheets is required in order to protec t machines or avoid waste produc tion. The double-s heet monitor is based on the ultrasonic
Series
-F43
through-beam princ iple. The following can be detected:
- No sheet, i.e. air,
- Individual sheet
- Double sheet
Series
A microprocessor system ev aluates the signals. T he appropriate switc h outputs are s et as a result of the evaluation. Changes in ambient
-F54
conditions such as temperature and humidity are compensated for automatically. The interfac e electronics is integrated into a c ompact
M18 metal hous ing together with a s ensor head.
Switching on
Series
-F64
The s ensor is equipped with 6 c onnec tions . The functionality of the connections is desc ribed in the following table. T he func tion input
(PK) is used to assign parameters to the sens or. (See Output pulse ex tens ion, Alignment aid and Program selection). During normal
operation, the func tion input m us t alw ays be securely connected with +UB or -U B, to avoid poss ible interference or improper functionality.
Colour Switching on Comments
Series
-D1
BN +UB
WH Switch output for single sheets Pulse width corresponds to the event
BK Switch output for double sheets Pulse width corresponds to the event
GY Switch output for air Pulse width corresponds to the event
Series
LUC
PK -UB/+UB Function input for parameter assign-

ment/pulse prolongation
BU -UB
Double sheet
monitoring
Normal mode
The sens or is working in normal mode if the function input (PK) is applied to -U B or +UB when the power sourc e (Power-On) is supplied,
as s hown in the output pulse extension table (s ee below).
Displays:
Power supplies
Control units/
LED yellow : Detection of air

LED green: Detection of single sheets
LED red: Detection of double sheets
Switch outputs:
The switch outputs are only active in normal operation!
White: WH Single sheet output
Blac k: BK Double sheet output
Accessories
Gray: GY Air output
UDC-18GM-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Output pulse extension

Sw itching the function input (PK) on to -UB or +UB makes it pos sible to select a minimum pulse width of 120 ms for all output pulses
-18GK/-18GM
of the three sw itch outputs.

Series
Switching on (PK) Operating behaviour (after Power-On)

-UB No output pulse extension for switch outputs
+UB Output pulse extension of all switch outputs to at least 120 ms
Series
-30GM
Please note:
This can result in a c ondition in which more than one switch output is switched through!
Display Mode
VariKont
The selected param eter ass ignment of the s ensor can be displayed by switc hing the function input (PK) to voltage-free during normal
Series
operation. The green LED displays the program number (the number of flashing pulses (1 ... 4) = the program number).
The outputs are inactiv e during this time.
If the function input (PK) is switc hed to voltage-free when power is supplied (Power-On), the s ensor will also w ork in dis play mode.
If the unit is switc hed to v oltage-free w hile the function input (PK) is in operation due to an error (broken cable, coming loose because
Series
-FP
of vibration), display mode acts as a fault display .
Parameter assignment
The sensor is equipped with 4 programs for different ranges of application. T his makes it possible to work with a w ide range of material.
Series
The us er can selec t the program best suited for a s pecific application.
-F12
The default setting, Progr am 1, is design ed so that no change in the setting is required for mo st app lications.
Programs
Program number Notes: Range of materials
Series
-F42
1 Default setting, standard paper 20 - 1200 g/m 2

2 Thick paper, cardboard, fine corrugated > 100 g/m 2
boards (DIN 55 468--1)and thin sheet metal**
3 Thin paper 20 250 g/m2
Series
-F43
4 Extremely fine paper < 40 g/m 2

*) The measurements were made under the following conditions: d = 45 mm, a = 10 mm, = 0
*) The measurements were made under the following conditions: d = 45 mm, a = 10 mm, = 35
Series
-F54
Procedure for assigning parameters

It is possible to s witch to additional parameter as signment modes from the dis play mode:
Alignment mode -->
Program selec tion mode -->
Series
Alignment aid mode --> (for check ing)

-F64
When the func tion input (PK) is applied to -UB (for > 500 ms), the mode changes. When the "Program selec tion mode is activ e,
switc hing on function input (PK) on to +U B (for > 500 ms) s elects the next program lev el.
Disconnecting the power supply causes the system to exit the current mode with the selected program change.
Series
The switc h outputs are not active w hile parameters are being assigned to the sensor!
-D1
... and function input (PK)

connected to +UB or -UB activate/deactivate
-UB +UB output pulse
Series
Power ON Normal mode

LUC
prolongation
... and function input
(PK) unconnected
Indication mode Indication mode Function input

Double sheet
monitoring
(PK) unconnected
-UB
-UB
Alignment aid Program select
Power supplies
Control units/
(yellow LED) (green LED)
+UB +UB
no function toggle cyclically
next program
Accessories
UDC-18GM-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Modes
Alignment aid
-18GK/-18GM
Series
During installation, the DSM can provide an adjustment aid for optimal alignment of the emitter to the receiver.
If the s ensor detects an area of air (y ellow LED is lit) the DSM w ill begin to display the intensity of the measured amplitude signal:
- If the signal is weak, the yellow LED will flash at a slow rate
- As the int ensity of the signal increases, the rate at which the LED flashes becomes faster
- At optimal alignment (maximum signal intensity), the yellow LED is continuously lit.
Series
-30GM
The single sheet function (green LED) and double sheet function (red LED) continues to be active. This makes it possible to check for
correc t func tionality of the double sheet c ontrol.
Program selection
In the program selec tion mode, the current program is display ed by the green LED (number of flashing pulses = program number).
VariKont
Series
Applying the adjus tment input (PK) to +UB (for > 500 ms) caus es the nex t program to be selec ted in cyclic s equenc e (program 1
follows through to program 4).
Notes:
Series
A complete dev ice consists of an ultrasonic emitter and an ev aluation unit with an ultrasonic emitter. The sens or heads are optimally
-FP
adjusted to each other when they leav e the factory. Therefore, they must not be used separately or ex changed with other dev ic es of
the same type. The plug c onnector on the emitter/receiver c onnection c able is only intended to be used for easier mounting, not to
replace units.
Very light papers (for example handkerchiefs) or perforated papers are not always s uitable for double sheet detec tion because of their
Series
-F12
physical charac teris tics.
If two or more double sheet controls are used in the immediate vic inity of eac h other, there may be mutual interference between them,
which can res ult in improper functionality of the devices. Mutual interference can be prev ented by introduc ing suitable c ountermeas u-
res when planning s ystems .
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic double sheet monitor UDC-18GMA-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Ultrasonic system for reliable detection of no, one, or two overlapping sheet
materials, preferably papers
No TEACH-IN required
-18GK/-18GM
Series

Insensitive to printing, colours and shining surfaces
Material weight from 10 g/m2 up to over 2000 g/m2
Very wide material spectrum, finest papers up to thin sheet metals as well
Series
-30GM
as plastic- and metal foils

Perpendicular or inclined sensor mounting relative to the sheet plane pos-
sible
Automatic compensation of the single-sheet value in the case of slowly
VariKont
Series
changing ambient conditions
U
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UDC-18G MA-400-3E3
Model number
Series
-F42
Sensing range 20 ... 60 mm , optimal distance: 45 mm !

LED yellow Display: No sheet detected (Air) !
Series
-F43

Time delay before availability < 500 ms !
Output type 3 Switch outputs pnp, normally-closed !
Rated operational current 3 x 100 mA , short-circuit/overload protected !
Series
2 V
-F54
Voltage drop !
Switch-on delay approx. 25 ms !
Switch-off delay approx. 25 ms !
Pulse extension min. 120 ms parameterisable !
Input type Function input !
0-level: -UB ... -UB + 1V
Series
-F64
1-level: +UB - 1 V ... +UB

Impedance 230 k !
Series

-D1

Connection 2 m, PVC cable 0.14 mm !
Series
LUC
Mass 150 g !
Double sheet
monitoring

Double sheet control
Mounting/Adjustment Mounting/Adjustment
Recommended distances (for very thick Papers)
(BN)
Power supplies
= 35
Control units/
+UB
(PK) b
Function input
a = 5 ... 15 mm b
(WH)
Output single sheet b 10 mm
(BK)
Output double sheet
U
(GY)
Output air
(BU)
-UB
a
a
Accessories
Dimensions UDC-18GMA-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
wires 70 mm with Evaluation unit with
wire end ferrules receiver unit
LEDs
l=2m
Series
-30GM
M6
11
86
20
30
54
Emitter unit
6.3
VariKont
Series
M18x1
10
Series
-FP
36 10 45 18
87
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Description of sensor functions
The ultrasonic double sheet monitor is used for double sheet detection in all situations in whic h the automatic distinction between double
and single sheets is required in order to protec t machines or avoid waste produc tion. The double-s heet monitor is based on the ultrasonic
Series
-F43
through-beam princ iple. The following can be detected:
- No sheet, i.e. air,
- Individual sheet
- Double sheet
Series
A microprocessor system ev aluates the signals. T he appropriate switc h outputs are s et as a result of the evaluation. Changes in ambient
-F54
conditions such as temperature and humidity are compensated for automatically. The interfac e electronics is integrated into a c ompact
M18 metal housing together w ith a s ensor head. To ensure a reliable operation of the double sheet monitor, the detec tion threshold is
adapted dynamically to the detected paper thicknes s.
Series
-F64
Switching on
The s ensor is equipped with 6 c onnec tions . The functionality of the connections is desc ribed in the following table. T he func tion input
(PK) is used to assign parameters to the sens or. (See Output pulse ex tens ion, Alignment aid and Program selection). During normal
operation, the func tion input m us t alw ays be securely connected with +UB or -U B, to avoid poss ible interference or improper functionality.
Series
-D1
Colour Switching on Comments
BN +UB
WH Switch output for single sheets Pulse width corresponds to the event
BK Switch output for double sheets Pulse width corresponds to the event
Series
LUC
GY Switch output for air Pulse width corresponds to the event
PK -UB/+UB Function input for parameter assign-
ment/pulse prolongation
Double sheet
BU -UB
monitoring
Normal mode
The sens or is working in normal mode if the function input (PK) is applied to -U B or +UB when the power sourc e (Power-On) is supplied,
as s hown in the output pulse extension table (s ee below).
Power supplies
Control units/
Displays:
LED yellow : Detection of air
LED green: Detection of single sheets
LED red: Detection of double sheets

Switch outputs:
The switch outputs are only active in normal operation!
White: WH Single sheet output
Accessories
Blac k: BK Double sheet output

Gray: GY Air output
UDC-18GMA-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
Output pulse extension

Sw itching the function input (PK) on to -UB or +UB makes it pos sible to select a minimum pulse width of 120 ms for all output pulses
-18GK/-18GM
of the three sw itch outputs.

Series
Switching on (PK) Operating behaviour (after Power-On)

-UB No output pulse extension for switch outputs
+UB Output pulse extension of all switch outputs to at least 120 ms
Series
-30GM
Please note:
This can result in a c ondition in which more than one switch output is switched through!
Display Mode
VariKont
The selected param eter ass ignment of the s ensor can be displayed by switc hing the function input (PK) to voltage-free during normal
Series
operation. The green and the red LED display alternately the program number and the operation mode.
LED green: Number of blinking pulses = program number
LED red: single flas hing = continous operation mode
double flashing = pulsed operation mode
Series
The outputs are inactiv e during this time.

-FP
If the function input (PK) is switc hed to voltage-free when power is supplied (Power-On), the s ensor will also w ork in dis play mode.
If the unit is switc hed to v oltage-free w hile the function input (PK) is in operation due to an error (broken cable, coming loose because
of vibration), display mode acts as a fault display .
Series
-F12
Parameter assignment
The sensor is equipped with 4 programs for different ranges of application. T his makes it possible to work with a w ide range of material.
The us er can selec t the program best suited for a s pecific application.
The default setting, Progr am 1, is design ed so that no change in the setting is required for mo st app lications.
Series
-F42
Programs
Program number Notes: Range of materials
1 Default setting, standard paper 20 - 1200 g/m 2
Series
-F43
2 Thick paper, cardboard, fine corrugated boards > 100 g/m 2

and thin sheet metal
3 Thin paper 20 250 g/m2
4 Extremely fine paper < 40 g/m 2
Series
-F54
Operation modes
The double sheet monitor offers the poss ibility to select between c ontinous operation mode and pulsed operation mode. Due to the
pulsed operation mode is pre-selected as the standard mode, most applications need no modification.
Series
Procedure for assigning parameters

-F64
It is possible to s witch to additional parameter as signment modes from the dis play mode:
Alignment mode -->
Program selec tion mode -->
Operation mode s election mode -->
Series
-D1
Alignment aid mode --> (for check ing)

When the function input (PK) is applied to -UB (for > 500 ms), the mode c hanges an the s torage of the current parameter. Within the
Modes "program s election" and "operation mode selection" y ou can sc roll through the programs or modes by applying +UB (for > 500
ms) to the function input (PK) .
Series
LUC
Disconnecting the power supply causes the system to exit the current mode with the selected program change.
The switc h outputs are not active w hile parameters are being assigned to the sensor!
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
UDC-18GMA-400-3E3
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
... and function input (PK)
Series
at +UB or -UB
Power ON Normal mode -UB +UB
selection
... and function input pulse prolongation
(PK) disconnected
function input
Series
-30GM
Display mode Display mode
(PK) disconnected
-UB store store

program mode
-UB -UB -UB
VariKont
Series
Alignment aid Program selection Mode selection
(yellow LED) (green LED) (red LED)
+UB +UB +UB

no function select next program change mode
Series
-FP
(cyclically)
Modes
Alignment aid
Series
-F12
During installation, the DSM can provide an adjustment aid for optimal alignment of the emitter to the receiver.
If the sensor detec ts an area of air (yellow LED is lit) after 3 s ec onds, the DSM will begin to display the intensity of the measured
amplitude s ignal:
- If the signal is weak, the yellow LED will flash at a slow rate
Series
-F42
- As the int ensity of the signal increases, the rate at which the LED flashes becomes faster
- At optimal alignment (maximum signal intensity), the yellow LED is continuously lit.
The single sheet function (green LED) and double sheet function (red LED) continues to be active. This makes it possible to check for
correc t func tionality of the double sheet c ontrol.
Series
Program selection
-F43
In the program selec tion mode, the current program is display ed by the green LED (number of flashing pulses = program number).
Applying the adjus tment input (PK) to +UB (for > 500 ms) caus es the nex t program to be selec ted in cyclic s equenc e (program 1
follows through to program 4).
Operation mode s election
Series
-F54
In the operation mode selection mode, the current program is displayed by the red LED.
single flashing: c ontinous operation mode
double flashing: pulsed operation mode
Applying the adjus tment input (PK) to +UB (for > 500 m s) causes an alteration of the operation mode.
Series
-F64
Notes:
A complete dev ice consists of an ultrasonic emitter and an ev aluation unit with an ultrasonic emitter. The sens or heads are optimally
adjusted to each other when they leav e the factory. Therefore, they must not be used separately or ex changed with other dev ic es of
Series
the same type. The plug c onnector on the emitter/receiver c onnection c able is only intended to be used for easier mounting, not to
-D1
replace units.
Very light papers (for example handkerchiefs) or perforated papers are not always s uitable for double sheet detec tion because of their
physical charac teris tics.
If two or more double sheet controls are used in the immediate vic inity of eac h other, there may be mutual interference between them,
Series
LUC
which can res ult in improper functionality of the devices. Mutual interference can be prev ented by introduc ing suitable c ountermeas u-
res when planning s ystems .
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Ultrasonic double sheet monitor UDB-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
Ultrasonic system for detection of single sheet, no sheet and double sheet.
Also detection of pasted double sheets.
Weights of paper from 30 g up to cartons weighing over 1200 g can be
-18GK/-18GM
detected.
Series
It is also possible to detect thin metal and plastic films.

Various materials and thicknesses are programmed in via a TEACH-IN sig-
nal.
Automatic compensation of the operating point in the case of slowly chan-
Series
-30GM
ging ambient conditions.

Signal output via short-circuit proof PNP switch outputs.
Very high processing speeds are possible.
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UDB-18G M35-3E2
Model number
Series
-F42

LED yellow indication: no sheet detected !
LED red indication: double sheet or pasted double sheets detected !
Series
-F43
Output type 3 switch outputs pnp, NO !

Rated operational current 3 x 200 mA !
Voltage drop 2 V !
Switch-on delay 5 ms !
Switch-off delay 5 ms !
Series
-F54
Input type 1 pulse input for TEACH-IN !

Impedance 10 kOhm !
Voltage 12 ... 30 V !
Series
-F64

Connection emitter: V1-Wconnector with 2.5 m cable !
receiver: 2.5 m fixed cable (not disconnectable)
S1,S2: 2 connectors V1-W, M12x1 (included with delivery)
Series
Housing Makrolon/nickel-plated brass !

-D1
Mass 370 g !
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring

Double-sheet-control
Characteristic response curves Mounting/Adjustment
1 Receiver
Power supplies
Control units/
+UB Angle [degrees]

90 80 70 60 50 40 30 (yellow cable)
2 20
S1 4
Double Single Relative position
sheet sheet 20 ... 45
10
3
-UB
U
mm
Paper position:
80
0.0 0 about 5 ... 15 mm above

...
the emitter
20
TEACH-IN key
2
+UB
d=
S2 -10
0.2
Accessories
4
-20
No sheet
0.4
-UB 0.6 0.8 1.0
Distance [m]
Emitter

(black cable)
Dimensions UDB-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
Connector Receiver 36 37
-18GK/-18GM
M12 x 1.5
Series
6.8
30
30
S1
M12 x 1
86
98
38
38
M12 x 1
Series
-30GM
S3 6.8 S2
VariKont
Series
18.5 64 18.5
Connector Emitter
4 Ultrasonic-Transducer (Emitter)
2.5 m
24
Series
-FP
M18 x 1
35
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
De scrip tio n o f th e sen sor fu nction s
In additio n to the printin g industry, the ultrasonic double-she et mon ito r is deployed in all situations in w hich the a utomatic distin ction betw een single and
dou ble she ets is req uired in order to p rotect ma ch ine s or avoid waste production. T he double-sheet mon itor is ba sed on the ultra so nic through-beam prin-
cip le. The follow in g can be d etected:
- No sh ee t
Series
-F43
- In di vidu al sh ee t
- Do ubl e she et or pa ste d do ub le sh eet
A microp rocessor system evaluates the signals. T he appropria te switch outputs are set as a result of the evaluation. C hang es in am bient conditions su ch
as tempe ratu re and hu midity are autom atically comp ensated. T he evaluation electronics a re installed in a cuboid plastic housing separate from the sensor
hea ds.
Series
-F54
Mea surin g system
A complete system con sists of an u ltrasonic emitter, an ultraso nic receiver and an evaluation u nit. The se units have been optimally tu ned to one ano ther
at th e factory a nd may no t be used sep arate ly.
Al ign me nt
Series
When adjustin g the em itt er an d receiver, take care to alig n them as p recise ly as possible .
-F64
Distance of the sensor heads: d = 20 mm ... 80 mm
Angu lar tolerance: < + /- 2
Maximum offset: s < + /- 2 mm
T o ensure t heir correct function, the sensor heads must be aligned at an a ngle of 20 ... 45 from ve rtical on to the pape r surfa ce . The pa per is guided over
Series
the emitter at a distance o f 5 m m ... 15 mm. The emitter is in sta lled below in ord er to prevent dust dep osits. In sta ll th e sensor head s using the included
-D1
plastic nu ts. T he sound con e must be completely co vered by the pa per. T his means that th e se nso r head s m ust b e installed abo ve t h e sh eet of pap er and
at least 10 mm aw ay fro m the side ed ge of th e paper.
Max imu m fee d sp eed of the s heet (app rox imate val ue) Series
LUC
v m ax [m /s] = overlap pin g of sheets [m m] / 5 m s (overlapping > 20 m m)
T EACH -IN
1. After the o pe ratin g volta ge h as be en a ppl ie d, a sing le sh ee t can be fed i n as the firs t she et. It wil l au to matica ll y b e pro gra mmed a s a refere nce va lu e by the syste m.
Double sheet
monitoring
2. If a sin gl e she et of pa per i s loc ated b etwe en th e ul tra son ic em itte r and rece ive r w he n the o pe ratin g vol ta ge is turne d o n, it wil l au to mati call y be p rog ramme d as a refere nce valu e by
th e system.
Au tom ati c learn ing fo r thin ne r typ es o f s heets

If you are inserting a thinner typ e of sh eet, you can dispe nse with the use of the T EACH -IN signal to progra m the system . In ord e r to do this, a sing le sheet
of p aper must be b etwee n the em itte r an d receiver for a t le ast 10 s.
Power supplies
Control units/
Au tom ati c learn ing fo r thick er typ es o f shee ts

If you a re inserting a thicker type of she et but still no t one th at will result in double-sh eet outp ut, you can dispense w ith le a rning b y m eans of the TEAC H-
IN signa l. In ord er to do this, a sin gle sh eet of p aper must be b etwee n the e mitt er an d re ceiver for a t le ast 10 s.
T EACH -IN fo r n ew typ e o f sh eet

If you are insertin g a n ew type of sheet that w ill result in do uble-sheet ou tput, the syst em must be rep rogramm ed. To d o t his, a sing le shee t m ust b e p laced
betw een t he emitter and receive r. Afte r the TEAC H-IN signal has been applied, the corre sp onding reference valu e will be acce pted.
Accessories
Ca ution !
T he p ape r sh eets may n ot to uch th e sens or he ads d urin g o pera tio n. De pen di ng o n p hy sical co nd itio n s, re flec tio ns o n th e ed ge o f a sing le sh eet
m ay resu lt in d o ub le-s heet o utpu t. Th is is n ot an error, and can b e ma sked ou t i n the hig he r-leve l con tro l sys tem .
Sensor system s for ult rasonic doub le-sheet m onitoring can also be de livere d with a cust omised time response for op tima l adaptat ion to specific ap plica-
tions.
Ultrasonic label control UDBL-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
Ultrasonic system for detection of labels, carrier materials and double

sheets.
-18GK/-18GM
detected.
Series

nal.
No automatic switching treshold tracking in the case of slowly changing
Series
-30GM
ambient conditions.
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UDBL -18GM35-3E2
Model number
Series
-F42

LED green indication: carrier material detected !
LED yellow indication: label detected !
Series

-F43
Time delay before availability 5 minutes !

Voltage drop 2 V !
Series
-F54
Impedance 10 kOhm !
Voltage 12 ... 30 V !
Series
-F64

Series

-D1

Mass 370 g !

Series
LUC
Double sheet control
1 Receiver
+UB Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 (yellow cable)
Double sheet
monitoring
2 20
S1 4
Double Base Relative position
sheet material 10 20 ... 45
3
-UB
U
mm
Paper position:
80

TEACH-IN key
...
2 the emitter
+UB
20
d=
Power supplies
Control units/
S2 4 -10
0.2
Label
-UB
-20
0.4
0.6 0.8 1.0

Distance [m]
Emitter

(black cable)
Angular alignment
< +/- 2
Accessories
Sensor offset
s < +/- 2 mm
s
Dimensions UDBL-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
M12 x 1.5
Series
6.8
30
30
S1
M12 x 1
86
98
38
38
M12 x 1
Series
-30GM
S3 6.8 S2
VariKont
Series
18.5 64 18.5
Connector Emitter
2.5 m
24
Series
-FP
M18 x 1
35
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Ultrasonic doub le-sheet monitorin g to dete ct labels is used in all situations in which an a utomat ic d istinctio n m ust be mad e be tween labels an d carrier
mat erial as w ell a s double she ets in order to p rotect machines or avoid w ast e production. T he double-she et mo nit or is ba sed on the ultrasonic thro ugh-
bea m principle. T he follo wing can be detected:
- Base m ateria l
Series
- La bel
-F43
- Do ubl e she et
A microprocessor system evaluates t he signals. T he appropria te sw itch outpu ts are set as a result of the evaluation. T he e va lua tion electronics are installed
in a cuboid p lastic housing separate from th e sensor h eads.
Mea surin g system
Series
-F54
Al ign me nt
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Max imu m fee d sp eed of the s heet (app rox imate val ue)
De pends on the label and gap w idth as well as the ma terials in question.
Approxim ate value 10 m/s while maintaining th e req uired m inimum sizes.
Series
LUC
c 35mm
g 2mm
LB 15mm
Label
Label
LB
c
LL 15mm
Double sheet
monitoring
LL g
T EACH -IN
Power supplies
Control units/
Before start ing a valid TEAC H-IN a wa rm up p eriod of ap prox. 5 min must be m ain tain ed. After the warm up pe riod and a short-tim e reset of the op erat ing
voltage a valid value is automat ically ta ught in, provid ed that a carrie r ma terial and labe l is betw een em itt er an d receiver.

If a new typ e of labe ls is used, th e TEAC H-IN p rocedu re m ust be carried o ut. T o do t his, a la bel with carrier materia l is put betwe en em itte r an d re ceiver
and the tea ch-in is p erformed with re fere nce to the lab el. After h aving applie d the T EACH -IN -signal the value is adopt ed auto matica lly.
Ca ution !
Accessories
tions.
Ultrasonic splice control UDBK-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
Ultrasonic system for detection of single and pasted double sheet.

detected.
-18GK/-18GM
Series

nal.
Automatic compensation of the operating point in the case of slowly chan-
ging ambient conditions.
Series
-30GM

VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UDBK-18G M35-3E2
Model number
Series
-F42

LED yellow indication: no sheet detected !
LED red indication: double sheet or contact spot detected !
Series

-F43

Voltage drop 2 V !
Series
-F54

Impedance 10 kOhm !
Voltage 12 ... 30 V !
Series
-F64
Series
-D1

Mass 370 g !

Series
LUC
Double-sheet-control
1 Receiver
+UB Angle [degrees]
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 (yellow cable)
2
Double sheet
20
monitoring
S1 4
Double sheets Single Relative position
or splices sheet 10 20 ... 45
3
-UB
U
mm
Paper position:
80

...
the emitter
20
TEACH-IN key
2
+UB
d=
S2 -10
Power supplies
Control units/
0.2
4
-20
No sheet
0.4
-UB 0.6 0.8 1.0
Distance [m]
Emitter

(black cable)
Angular alignment
< +/- 2

Accessories
Sensor offset
s < +/- 2 mm
s
Dimensions UDBK-18GM35-3E2
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
M12 x 1.5
Series
6.8
30
30
S1
M12 x 1
86
98
38
38
M12 x 1
Series
-30GM
S3 6.8 S2
VariKont
Series
18.5 64 18.5
Connector Emitter
2.5 m
24
Series
-FP
M18 x 1
35
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Ultrasonic double-sh eet m onitoring to det ect splice po int s is used in all situa tion s in which an autom atic distinction m ust be m ade b etwee n splice points
and doub le sh eets in order to prot ect machines or avoid w aste production. Doub le-sheet monitoring for splice p oin t dete ction is b ase d on the ultrasonic
through-beam principle. Th e follo wing can be detected:
- No sh ee t
Series
-F43
- In di vidu al sh ee t
- Spl ice p oin t o r d ou ble shee t
A microp rocessor system evaluates the signals. T he appropria te switch outputs are set as a result of the evaluation. C hang es in am bient conditions su ch
as tempe ratu re and hu midity are autom atically comp ensated. T he evaluation electronics a re installed in a cuboid plastic housing separate from the sensor
hea ds.
Series
-F54
Mea surin g system
Al ign me nt
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
F eed spe ed o f th e sh eet (ap pro xim ate valu e)
v m in = 0.03 5 m/s
Series
LUC
v m ax [m /s] = overlap pin g of sheets [m m] / 1 m s (ap prox. value, o ve rlapping > 20 mm )
T EACH -IN
1. After the o pe ratin g volta ge h as be en a ppl ie d, a sing le sh ee t can be fed i n as the firs t she et. It wil l au to matica ll y b e pro gra mmed a s a refere nce va lu e by the syste m.
Double sheet
monitoring
2. If a sin gl e she et of pa per i s loc ated b etwe en th e ul tra son ic em itte r and rece ive r w he n the o pe ratin g vol ta ge is turne d o n, it wil l au to mati call y be p rog ramme d as a refere nce valu e by
th e system.
Au tom ati c learn ing fo r thin ne r typ es o f s heets

If you are inserting a thinner typ e of sh eet, you can dispe nse with the use of the T EACH -IN signal to progra m the system . In ord e r to do this, a sing le sheet
of p aper must be b etwee n the em itte r an d receiver for a t le ast 2 s.
Power supplies
Control units/
Au tom ati c learn ing fo r thick er typ es o f shee ts

If you a re inserting a thicker type of she et but still no t one th at will result in double-sh eet outp ut, you can dispense w ith le a rning b y m eans of the TEAC H-
IN signa l. In ord er to do this, a sin gle sh eet of p aper must be b etwee n the e mitt er an d re ceiver for a t le ast 2 s.

If you are insertin g a n ew type of sheet that w ill result in do uble-sheet ou tput, the syst em must be rep rogramm ed. To d o t his, a sing le shee t m ust b e p laced
betw een t he emitter and receive r. Afte r the TEAC H-IN signal has been applied, the corre sp onding reference valu e will be acce pted.
Accessories
Ca ution !
tions.
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Control units/Power supplies
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Model number Description Page
UH3-KHD2-4E5 Control/evaluation unit with 4 switching outputs 202
UH3-KHD2-4I Control/evaluation unit with 4 analogue current outputs (4 mA ... 20 mA) 204
Series
-F54
UH3-T1-KT Control/evaluation unit with relay output for high power loads 206
DA5-IU-C Process indication device 208
DA5-IU-2K-C Process indication device 210
DA5-IU-2K-V
Series
-F64
WE77-RE2 Isolated switch amplifier with power supply und 2 relay outputs 212
KFA6-STR-1.24.500 Power supply 214
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Evaluation unit UH3-KHD2-4E5
-12GM
Series
External evaluation for ultrasonic sensors UB...-H1, -H2 and -H3

Modular concept: Installation of sensor on-site and evaluation in the control
cabinet
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Simultaneous operation of 1 to 4 ultrasonic sensors with ranges from 60

mm to 6 m
Freely selectable evaluation range
Multiplex operation - no mutual interaction, operation is possible in a very
confined space
Series
-30GM
Synchronous operation
Reference measurement for highest accuracy
VariKont
Series
4 switch outputs
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UH3 -KHD2-4E5
Model number
Operating modes with switch-over: !

Series
-F42
multiplex operation - consecutive activation of the channels

synchronous operation - activation of the channels simultaneously
Measuring frequency dependent on the operating mode, number and longest range of the active sensors (see page multiplex/synchronous !
operation
LED green sensor type / channel active (4 items) !
Series
-F43
NO/NC/REF (2 items)
switch point (1 item)
LED yellow channel number A1 ... A4 / object in operating range (4 items) !
No-load supply current 50 mA (without sensors) !
Series
Output type 4 switch outputs A1 ... A4 Imax = 500 mA, pnp, !

-F54
reverse-polarity protected, NO/NC operation

Repeat accuracy multiplex operation: 1 mm !
synchronous operation: 3 mm
Input type for 4 sensors for each of 4 connections +UB/-UB/clock (T)/echo (E) short-circuit proof with reverse-polarity protection !
attachable sensors:UB500/2000/4000/6000-...-H3 or -H1/-H2
Series
-F64

Connection terminal housing, suitable for 35 mm standard rail !
plug-in screw terminal 1.5 mm2
Series
Mass 230 g !
-D1
The UH3-KHD2-4E5 is an evaluation device for ultrasonic sensors with external interface electronics. Up to four sensors of
Series
LUC
type UB...-H3 or sensor pairs UB...-H1/-H2 can be connected to the device.
The evaluation unit issues the transmission pulses (cycle) for each sensor channel, then records the echo signal and forms the
sensing range according to the echo time. A switch output is associated with each channel.
Double sheet
monitoring
If the detected distance is less than the set switching point, the output of the associated channel is actuated according to the
selected open/close action. This is indicated by the yellow LED assigned to the channel.
Sensors with a variety of detection ranges can be deployed on the four evaluation channels. One of the channels can be pro-
grammed as a reference measurement for a temperature compensation.
Power supplies
Note:
Control units/
The maximum cable-length between evaluation unit and sensor must not exceed 20 m!
Accessories
Dimensions UH3-KHD2-4E5
-12GM
Series
40 Extendable 110
latches
-18GK/-18GM
Series
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
A1 A2 A3 A4
92.5
90
UB UB UB UB
Series
-30GM
500 2000 4000 6000
Multi n.o. n.c.
REF
Sync
dist. OK
3 sec = Prog.
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
-UB
Echo
U
Series
Emitter pulse
-F43
+UB
Channel 1 Channel 2
24 V DC
Series
-F54
+UB -UB + - + -
+UB
-UB
Series
AN
-F64
AN GND T E T E
Temperature sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
Series
A1 A2 A3 A4
-D1
UB UB UB UB
500 2000 4000 6000
Multi n.o. n.c.
REF
Series
LUC
Sync
dist. OK
3 sec = Prog.
Switch outputs: 13 14 15 16 17 18
Double sheet
19 20 21 22 23 24
monitoring
Channel 1
Reference potential -UB
A1 A2 T E T E
Channel 2
Power supplies
A3 A4 + - + -
Control units/
Channel 1
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

Accessories
Evaluation unit UH3-KHD2-4I
-12GM
Series

Modular concept: Installation of sensor on-site and evaluation in the control
cabinet
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Simultaneous operation of 1 to 4 ultrasonic sensors with ranges from 60

mm to 6 m (up to 15 m when operated as a through beam barrier)
Freely selectable measuring window
Multiplex operation - no mutual interaction, operation is possible in a very
confined space
Series
-30GM
Synchronous operation
Reference measurement for highest accuracy
VariKont
Series
4 analogue outputs 4 mA ... 20 mA (rising/falling slope can be set)

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UH3 -KHD2-4I
Model number
Operating modes with switch-over: !

multiplex operation - consecutive activation of the channels
Series
-F42
synchronous operation - activation of the channels simultaneously

Measuring frequency dependent on the operating mode, number and longest range of the active sensors (see page multiplex/synchronous !
operation
LED green sensor type / channel active (4 items) !
Series
current slope: increasing / decreasing / REF (2 items)

-F43
measuring window limits near / far (2 items)

LED yellow channel number A1 ... A4 / object in operating range (4 items) !
Output type 4 analogue outputs A1 ... A4, 4 ... 20 mA !
Series
-F54
rising/falling ramp
Repeat accuracy multiplex operation: 1 mm !
synchronous operation: 3 mm
Input type for 4 sensors for each of 4 connections +UB/-UB/clock (T)/echo (E) short-circuit proof with reverse-polarity protection !
attachable sensors:UB500/2000/4000/6000-...-H3 or -H1/-H2
Series
-F64

Connection terminal housing, suitable for 35 mm standard rail !
plug-in screw terminal 1.5 mm2
Mass 230 g !
Series
-D1
The UH3-KHD2-4I is an evaluation device for ultrasonic sensors with external interface electronics. Up to four sensors of type
Series
UB...-H3 or sensor pairs UB...-H1/-H2 can be connected to the device.

LUC
The evaluation unit issues the transmission pulses (cycle) for each sensor channel, then records the echo signal and forms a
current value proportional to the echo time (4 mA ... 20 mA). An analogue output is associated with each channel.
Double sheet
An evaluation window and a rising or falling current ramp can be selected in the detection section for each output. If the distance
monitoring
determined is within the programmed measuring window, the output of the associated channel will deliver a value between 4
mA and 20 mA. The yellow LED associated with the channel will be lit.
Sensors with a variety of detection ranges can be deployed on the four evaluation channels. One of the channels can be pro-
grammed as a reference measurement for a temperature compensation.
Power supplies
Control units/
Note:
The maximum cable-length between evaluation unit and sensor must not exceed 20 m!
Accessories
Dimensions UH3-KHD2-4I
-12GM
Series
40 Extendable 110
latches
-18GK/-18GM
Series
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
A1 A2 A3 A4
92.5
90
UB UB UB UB
Series
-30GM
500 2000 4000 6000
Multi
REF
Sync
nah fern
OK
3 sec = Prog.
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
-UB
Echo
Series
Emitter pulse
-F43
+UB
Channel 1 Channel 2
24 V DC
Series
-F54
+UB -UB + - + -
+UB
-UB
Series
AN
-F64
AN GND T E T E
Temperature sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
Series
A1 A2 A3 A4
-D1
UB UB UB UB
500 2000 4000 6000
Multi
REF
Series
LUC
Sync
nah fern OK
3 sec = Prog.
Analogue outputs: 13 14 15 16 17 18
Double sheet
19 20 21 22 23 24
monitoring
(4 mA ... 20 mA /
Channel 1
20 mA ... 4 mA)
Reference potential -UB
(4 mA ... 20 mA / A1 A2 T E T E
Channel 2
20 mA ... 4 mA)
Power supplies
Control units/
A3 A4 + - + -
(4 mA ... 20 mA /
Channel 1
20 mA ... 4 mA)
(4 mA ... 20 mA /
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
20 mA ... 4 mA)
Accessories
Evaluation unit UH3-T1-KT
-12GM
Series

-18GK/-18GM
Pull-in/Drop-out delay can be set

Series
Normally open/closed
Switch point can be selected in steps in the sensing range
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
UH3 -T 1-KT
Model number
Measuring frequency approx. 16 Hz !

Series
-F42
Rotary switch sensor select: setting the switch-point behaviour !

distance select: setting the operating distance
Output type changeover contact terminals 6 to 1 (NO) and 11 (NC) !
Contact loading AC: 8 A/250 V !
Series
-F43
Energised/De-energised delay 270-potentiometer: ON delay, between 0.2 s ... 8 s ( 10%) !

270-potentiometer: OFF delay, between 0.2 s ... 8 s ( 10%)
Input type for max. 3 ultrasonic sensors in !
direct detection mode: UB 500/2000/4000/6000, UJ 3000/6000
or for a through beam barrier: UB 2000 (e.g.)
Series

-F54
Storage temperature
Connection plug socket 11-pin, attached using 2 x M3 screws or snapped-on to 35 mm standard rail according to EN 50022 !
Base is included with delivery
Housing modular housing !
Mass 110 g !
Series
-F64
The UH3-T1-KT is a back-end unit for ultrasonic sensors with external evaluation logic. It features direct-detection and through-
Series
beam operating modes. All sensors of the types H3, H1 and H2 can be connected to the unit.
-D1
When an object is detected, a relay trips a change-over contact. The action and release delays can be adjusted independently
of one another. In direct-detection mode the unit generates a clock signal for the sensors and determines the object distance
on the basis of the echo time. A switching point can be set in steps in the detection range.
Series
LUC
In barrier mode the clock signal

starts the ultrasonic pulse from the device in the transmitter/sender. The receiver generates an echo signal when it picks up
the ultrasonic signal. If this echo signal is not received, the evaluation unit trips the output relay.
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions UH3-T1-KT
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
35 27 72
38
Series
-30GM
78
65
VariKont
Series
35
(99)
Connector socket
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
20 ... 30 VDC 4 2 +Power 20 ... 30 VDC
Series
-F54
GND 3 1
}
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Output (clock) 5 6 250 VAC/8A
Input 1 (echo) 7 11
Series
-F64
10 - Power GND
Input 2 (echo) 8
Series
-D1
Input 3 (echo) 9
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Digital display unit DA5-IU-C
-12GM
Series
Bright, high contrast 5-digit LED indicator

Leading zero suppression
-18GK/-18GM
Adjustable decimal point

Series
Maximum- and minimium-value display

Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
DA5-IU-C
Model number
Pre-selection none !
Data storage 6 !
10 storage cycles or 10 years, EEPROM
Series
Programming keypad-driven menu !

-F42
Type 7-segment LED display, red !

Number of decades 5 !
Display value digit height 8 mm !
Display interval -19999 ... 99999 !
Decimal point freely adjustable !
Series
-F43
Resolution 14 Bit !
Scale factor via linear characteristic curve !
Reset maximum value, manually !
Key interlock - !
Series
Power consumption 1,5 VA !

-F54
Impedance 1 MOhm !
Voltage max. 30 DC !
Analogue voltage input 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V DC !
Analogue current input 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA !
Series
-F64

Relative humidity 80 % (non-condensing) !
Mounting latch fastener/mounting frame !
Connection 7-pin screw terminal !
max. core cross-section 0.34 ... 1.5 mm2
Dimensions 48 mm x 24 mm x 65 mm
Series
!
-D1
Mass approx. 50 g !
Series
The DA5-IU-C permits a simple visual inspection by operating and maintenance personnel. It converts the analogue sensor output signal into
LUC
a readable form for this purpose. Depending on the task or setting, 4 ... 20 mA or 0 ... 100 % values can be displayed.
Scope of deliver y:
Double sheet
Process control unit DA5-IU-C

monitoring
Screw terminal, 7-pin

Clamp clip
Seal
1 sheet of adhesive symbols
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions DA5-IU-C
-12GM
Series
max. 19.3
48
-18GK/-18GM
Series
22 x 45
24
Series
-30GM
4
59 6.5
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Terminal
Series
-F43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No.
1 10 ... 30 V DC
2 0 V (GND)
3 0 V LATCH
4 LATCH
Series
5 Current input
-F54
6 0 V input signal
7 Voltage input
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Process control and indication equipment DA5-IU-2K-.
-12GM
Series
2 adjustable limit values

2 relay outputs
-18GK/-18GM
Operation via keypad

Series
Programmable characteristics
Resetting the outputs, automatic, manual or with external signal
Connection via plug-in screw terminals
Auxiliary power output for sensors (Only DA5-IU-2K-V)
Series
-30GM
Protection degree IP65 in accordance with DIN EN 60529 (front only)

Shock resistance in accordance with DIN EN 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance in accordance with DIN EN 60068-2-6
VariKont
Series
System hum suppression

Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
DA5-IU-2 K-C
DA5-IU-2 K-V
Model number
Pre-selection 2-fold ! !
Data storage ! !
106 storage cycles or 10 years, EEPROM
Series
-F42
Programming keypad-driven menu ! !

Type 7-segment LED display, red ! !
Number of decades 5 ! !
Display value digit height 14,2 mm ! !
Display interval -19999 ... 99999 ! !
Series
-F43
Decimal point freely adjustable ! !

Resolution 14 Bit ! !
Scale factor via characteristic curve with up to 24 value pairs ! !
Reset manually or external ! !
Key interlock with "high"-level at terminal "KEY" ! !
Series

-F54
90 ... 260 V AC !
Power consumption 2W !
7 VA !
Sensor supply 24 V DC , 100 mA !
Relay 2 x 250 V AC/ 300 V DC, 3 A, changeover contact ! !
Series
-F64
Impedance > 1 M for voltage measurement ! !

< 50 for current measurement
Analogue voltage input 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V DC, ! !
-10 ... 10 V DC
Analogue current input 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA ! !
Series
-D1

Relative humidity 80 % (non-condensing) ! !
Mounting mounting frame with latch fastener ! !
Connection 8-pin and 11 pin connectors with plug-in screw terminals ! !
Dimensions 96 mm x 48 mm x 90 mm ! !
Series
Mass 220 g ! !
LUC
The DA5-IU-2K-... permits a simple visual inspection by operating and maintenance personnel. It converts the analogue sensor output signal
into a readable form for this purpose. Depending on the task or setting, 4 mA ... 20 mA or 0 % ... 100 % values can be displayed.
Double sheet
monitoring
Scope of deliver y:
Process control unit DA5-IU-2K-...
Screw terminals
1 RM 5.08 8-pole terminal for power supply and outputs
Power supplies
Control units/
1 RM 3.81 11-pole terminal for measuring and control inputs

Clamp clip
Seal
1 sheet of adhesive symbols

Accessories
Dimensions DA5-IU-2K-.
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
max. 19
Series
96 15.5
44.9x91.9
Series
-30GM
48
VariKont
Series
Control panel cutout 4
67.1 6.5
Series
45+0.6
-FP
92+0.8
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
90 ... 260 V AC supply (...-V)
Series
-F43
10 ... 30 V DC 0 V DC (...-C)
Connector S1/... Connector S2/...
S2/7 S2/8
OUT 1
Ammeter input S1/1 S2/3
Series
S2/2 Relay 2
-F54
Reference earth S1/2
S2/1
Voltmeter input S1/3 OUT 2
S2/6
Indicator S2/5 Relay 1
Key lock-out "Key" S1/6
Series
S2/4
-F64
Reference earth for reset S1/7
Reset S1/8
Series
-D1
4 5 10 S1/11 S1/9
0 V DC
+24 V DC,
100 mA
not assigned
on S1
Auxiliary power output

Series
LUC
(only on DA5-IU-2K-V)
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Isolated switch amplifier WE77-RE2
-12GM
Series
2-channel isolated switch amplifier

Control circuit designed for the direct current versions of ultrasonic sen-
sors and proximity switches
-18GK/-18GM
Series
230 V AC/115 V AC mains nominal voltage

Switching frequency 10 kHz
Each with 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact
One LED status display for each output relay
Series
-30GM
Modular housing
For PNP-sensors the terminals 5 and 6, for NPN-sensors the terminals 6 and
7 are to short out
Mode of operation: input closed - energising the relay/input open - relay de-
VariKont
Series
energised
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
WE77 -RE2
Model number
Connection terminals 17, 18 !

Rated voltage 98 ... 126 V AC / 198 ... 253 V AC ,45 ... 63 Hz , switchable !
Series
Power consumption approx. 7 VA !

-F42
Voltage 24 V DC 20 % !
Current 160 mA at 60 C , short-circuit proof !
Contact loading AC: 250 V / 4 A / 500 VA / cos 0.7 !
DC: 220 V / 0.1 A; 60 V / 0.6 A; 24 V / 4 A
Energised/De-energised delay approx. 20 ms / approx. 10 ms !
Series
-F43
Connection terminals 10, 11, 12; 13, 14, 15 !

terminals 1+, 3-
Mechanical life !
107 switching cycles
Connection terminals 2; 4 !
Input signal high: 24 V DC 20 %, 37 mA !
low: < 1 V DC, 0.5 mA
Series
-F54
Construction type modular housing !
Series
-F64
Mounting snap-on to 35 mm standard rail or screw fixing !

Connection self-opening apparatus connection terminals, !
max. conductor cross section 1 x 2.5 mm2
Dimensions 60 mm x 70 mm x 110 mm !
Mass approx. 650 g !
Series
-D1
Series
When using proximity switches (sensors) in pnp-technique (switched high), the connections 5 and 6 have to be bridged
LUC
When using proximity switches (sensors) in npn-technique (switched low), the connections 6 and 7 have to be bridged.
Double sheet
monitoring
Mode of operation
Input Output
Power supplies
energised
Control units/
de-energised
Accessories
Dimensions WE77-RE2
-12GM
Series
25
4.8
-18GK/-18GM
Series
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30
70
Series
-30GM
30
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
VariKont
25 10
Series
60 110
Switch AC 115 V/230 V
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Switching Input Input Input supply
Series
I II
-F43
pnp npn
5 6 7 2 4 1+ 3-
Series
-F54

Series
~
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
11 12 10 14 15 13 16 17 ~ 18
Double sheet
monitoring
Output Output Supply voltage

I II
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Power supply KFA6-STR-1.24.500
-12GM
Series
Switched power supply

230/115 V AC supply voltage
-18GK/-18GM
24 V DC output voltage
Series
Max. output current 500 mA

No ground connection required
Removable terminals and Power Rail
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Technical Data
Series
-F12
KFA6-STR-1.24.50 0
Model number
Series
-F42
SIL/IEC 61508 no !
Fault message output no !
Explosion protection No Ex-protection !
Connection terminals 14, 15 !
Rated voltage 90 ... 253 V AC , 48 ... 63 Hz !
Series
Power loss 2,5 W !

-F43
Number of channels 1 !
Connection Power Rail or terminals 7+, 8- !
Current 500 mA at 60 C , permanent short-circuit protection (electronically) !
Voltage 24 V 0,5 V !
Power supply/Output safe isolation acc. to DINVDE 0106, rated insulation voltage 253 Veff !
Series
-F54

Mass approx. 140 g !
Series
-F64
Function
Series
-D1
The output voltage of the power supply is regulated and remains stable regardless of the size of the power supply and the load
current.
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Dimensions KFA6-STR-1.24.500
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Power supply
Series
-F43
14 15
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
green
Series
-D1
+ -
7+ 8-
Series
LUC
Output Power Rail
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
Accessories
Notes
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/

Accessories
Accessories
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Type Description Page
Kabeldosen Ready-to-use and customisable 218
Series
-F43
MH 04-3505 Mounting aid for series -FP sensors 223
MH 04-2681F Mounting aid for series VariKont (+U1+ und +U9*) sensors 223
OMH 04 Mounting bracket for series -18GM sensors 224
Series
-F54
MHW 11 Mounting bracket for series -FP und -F42 sensors 224
MH-UDB01 Rotatable mounting bracket for ultrasonic double sheet monitors 224
BF12, BF18, BF30 Mounting flanges for series -12GM, -18GM and -30GM sensors 225
Series
-F64
M105 Mounting flanges for series -30GM sensors 226
BF18-F/BF30-F Mounting flanges for series -18GM and -30GM sensors 226
PA02 Mounting flanges for series -FP sensors 227
Series
-D1
BF 5-30 Universal mount for 5 mm ... 30 mm sensors 228
UVW90-K18 Redirection mirror for series -18GM and -30GM sensors 229
UVW90-K30
UVW90-M30 Focussing redirection mirror for ser ies -30GM sensors 229
Series
LUC
UC-30GM-TEMP External temperature probe 230

LUC4-Z30-G2V External temperature probe 230
Double sheet
monitoring
LUC4-Z30-N2V
FP100 Remote potentiometer for through beam barrier UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V1 230
USB-0,8M-PVC ABG SUBD9 Interface adapter USB/RS 232 231
UC-F43-R2 RS 232 interface for series -F43 sensors 231
Power supplies
Control units/
UC-30GM-R2 Interface cable for series -30GM sensors 232

UC-FP/U9-R2 Interface cable for series VariKont und -FP sensors 232
UC-30GM-PROG Extension cable for the programming of UC...-30GM-... and LUC4T-... series sensors 232
UB-PROG2/UB-PROG3 Programming units for all UB...-sensors with -V15 connector, where the TEACH- 233
input is at connector-pin 2 (UB-PROG2) or at connector-pin 5 (UB-PROG3).
Accessories
ULTRA 2001 Service program for easy programming of ultrasonic sensors with RS 232 interfaces 234
Accessories - cables, plugs, mating connectors
-12GM
Series
A ccesso ri es - cabl es, p lug s, m ati ng conn ect or s
Non pre-wired connectors in M8, M12, M18 and Rd24 x 1/8:

-18GK/-18GM
Wire cross-
Design
Nu mber of
Series
Order designatio n Design Connectin g techniq ue section F ig.

p ins
(m m2 )
V3-GM Socket, straight Insulation piercing 3-pin 0.25 ... 0.34 1

M8
V3-WM Socket, angled Insulation piercing 3-pin 0.25 ... 0.34 2

Series
-30GM
V3S-GM Connector, straight Insulation piercing 3-pin 0.25 ... 0.34 1
V1-G 1) Socket, straight 4-pin max. 2.5 3
V1-W 1) Socket, angled Screw terminal, PG7 4-pin max. 2.5 4

VariKont
Series
cable gland
V1S-G Connector, straight 4-pin max. 2.5 -
V1S-W Connector, angled 4-pin max. 2.5 -
V1-E-LED LED board (npn) suitable for mounting in - - -

Series
-FP
V1-E2-LED LED board (pnp) V1-G and V1-W - - -

M12
V1-G-Q2 Socket, straight Insulation piercing 4-pin 0.34 ... 0.75 5
V1S-G-Q2 Connector, straight Insulation piercing 4-pin 0.34 ... 0.75 -

Series
-F12
V1-WV2A-PG9-Y42685 2) Socket, angled Screw terminal 4-pin max. 2.5 7
V15-G-PG9 1) Socket, straight Screw terminal 5-pin max. 0.75 -
V15-W-PG9 1) Socket, straight Screw terminal 5-pin max. 0.75 -

Series
-F42
V15-WV2A-PG9-Y117132 2) Socket, angled Screw terminal 5-pin max. 2.5 7
Socket with central screw,

V-W Screw terminal 5-pin max. 2.5 -
angled
Series
-F43
Socket with central screw, Screw terminal, with inte-

V-W-E2 5-pin max. 2.5 -
with central screw
angled grated LED

V-W-N Screw terminal 5-pin max. 2.5 -
angled
Series
-F54

V7-W Screw terminal 7-pin max. 2.5 6
angled
Series
-F64
Fig. 31) Fig. 41)

Series
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 5

-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Fig. 6 Fig. 7 2)
Power supplies
Control units/
1 ) not suitable for UC...-30GM...

2 ) suitable for UC...-30GM...
1 7.8.05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
Technical data for connector with integrated cable
-18GK/-18GM
Connector and sockets
Series
Number of pins 2-, 3-, 4- or 5-pin
Locking Screw locking
Series
-30GM
Self-locking via O-ring in cap nut
Colour of handle green
Material of handle PUR
VariKont
Series
Material of contacts CuSn/Au
Material of contact surface Au
Material of cap nut CuSn/Ni
Series
Material of sealing ring NBR
-FP
protection class in accordance with DIN 40050 IP68 in screwed state
Max. operating voltage 60 V DC or 250 V AC (for V13-...-types)
Series
-F12
Max. operational current 4A
Volume resistance < 5 m
Insulation resistance in acc. with VDE 0295
Series
-F42
Test voltage 1500 Veff. AC, 50 Hz
Cable
Series
-F43
Cable structure finely stranded, flexible
Cables for M12 connection: 0.34 mm2

Wire cross-section but NAMUR mating connectors: 0.50 mm2
Cables for M8 connections: 0.25 mm2
Series
-F54
Colour of sheath grey
moving: -5 C bis +70 C

Temperature range for PVC conductors
non-moving: -30 C bis +80 C
Series
-F64
moving: -5 C bis +70 C
Temperature range for PUR conductors 1)
non-moving: -30 C bis +105 C
Minimum permissible bending radius > 10 x conductor diameter, appropriate for conveyor chains
Series
4.6 mm for M8 and 4.8 mm for M12,
-D1
Sheath diameter
but 5.2 mm in 5-pin variant
PVC or in the case of halogen free cable

Material of core insulation
synthetic material on polyester base
Series
LUC
2-pin: BN, BU
3-pin: BN, BU, BK
Core colours in acc. with VDE 293
4-pin: BN, BU, BK, WH
5-pin: BN, BU, BK, WH, GY (GN/YE bei PE)
Double sheet
monitoring
1)
Please note reduced mechanical values for PUR cables at temperatures over +80 C.
Power supplies
Control units/
1 7.8.05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
Core colours and connection assignment (EN 60947-5-2)

-18GK/-18GM
Plug connector -V1 Plug connector -V15 Plug connector -V3

Colour assignment of ready-to-use (Circular connection M12) (Circular connection M12) (Circular connection M8)
Series
cable sockets V1, V15, V3:

1 1
Pin Colour Abbrev. 4
1 Brown BN
4 2 4 2 3 1
2 White WH
Series
-30GM
3 Blue BU
5
4 Black BK 3 3
5 Grey GR
VAZ-FK-CL1
VAZ-2FK-B1
VAZ-T1-FK-V1 Top view of plug side
VariKont
Series
VAZ-G6F-V1
VAZ-G6F-W2M
VAZ-T1-FK-PG9
VAZ-T1-FK-PG13.5
Colour assignment ready-to-use
Mating connectors V17, V7 and : Plug connector -V17 Plug connector -V7
(circular connector M12x1) (circular connector PG 13,5)
Series
-FP
Pin Colour Abbrev. 3 6

4 1
1 White WH 2 5
2 Brown BN 5
3 Green GN 8
4 Yellow YW
Series
1 4
-F12
6 7 2 3
5 Grey GR
6 Pink PK
7 Blue BU Top view of plug side
8 None
Series
(screening)
-F42
Mating connectors M8 type with metal cap nut 1)

Series
-F43
Suitable for sensors

with 2, 3 or 4 wires
Series
4 (BK)
-F54
4 2
(BK) (WH)
3 1
(BU) (BN) 3 1
(BU) (BN)
Series
-F64
Design
Cable- No. of Design Design
Length 2 angled
sheath wires (mm ) straight angled
with 2 LEDs
Series
2m 3 0,25 V3-WM-E2-2M-PUR
-D1
PUR, grey 5m 3 0,25 V3-GM-5M-PUR V3-WM-5M-PUR V3-WM-E2-5M-PUR
10 m 3 0,25 V3-WM-E2-10M-PUR
Series
2m 3 0,25 V3-GM-2M-PVC V3-WM-2M-PVC

LUC
PVC, grey 5m 3 0,25 V3-GM-5M-PVC V3-WM-5M-PVC
10 m 3 0,25 V3-GM-10M-PVC V3-WM-10M-PVC

Double sheet
monitoring
2m 4 0,25 V3-... mating connectors
PUR, grey 5m 4 0,25 V31-GM-5M-PUR V31-WM-5M-PUR
10 m 4 0,25 V31-... mating connectors

Power supplies
Control units/
2m 4 0,25 V31-GM-2M-PVC V31-WM-2M-PVC
PVC, grey 5m 4 0,25 V31-GM-5M-PVC V31-WM-5M-PVC
10 m 4 0,25 V31-GM-10M-PVC V31-WM-10M-PVC

1 ) M8
1 7.8.05
mating connectors with twist connect on demand.

Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
Cable connectors in M12 design for DC sensors
Suitable for DC sensors
-18GK/-18GM
with 2, 3 or 4 wires
Series
1(BN) 1(BN) 3
4
2
4 2 4 2 5
(BK) (WH) 8
Series
-30GM
(BK) (WH)
5
3(BU) (GR) 1
3(BU) 6 7
Design
Length angled
VariKont
sheath wires (mm2) straight angled
Series
with 2 LEDs
2m 4 0,34 V1-G-2M-PVC V1-W-2M-PVC
PVC, grey 5m 4 0,34 V1-G-5M-PVC V1-W-5M-PVC
Series
-FP
10 m 4 0,34 V1-G-10M-PVC V1-W-10M-PVC
2m 4 0,34 V1-G-2M-PUR V1-W-2M-PUR V1-W-A2-2M-PUR
V1-W-A2-5M-PUR
Series
PUR, grey 5m 4 0,34 V1-G-5M-PUR V1-W-5M-PUR V1-A0-5M-PUR
-F12
V1-W-E2/E3-5M-PUR
10 m 4 0,34 V1-G-10M-PUR V1-W-10M-PUR V1-W-A2-10M-PUR
2m 3 0,34 V15-... mating connectors V1-W-E2-2M-PUR
Series
-F42
V1-W-E2-5M-PUR
PUR, grey 5m 3 0,34
V1-W-E-5M-PUR
10 m 3 0,34 V1-W-E2-10M-PUR
Series
-F43
2m 5 0,34 V15-G-2M-PVC V15-W-2M-PVC
PVC, grey 5m 5 0,34 V15-G-5M-PVC V15-W-5M-PVC
10 m 5 0,34 V15-G-10M-PVC V15-W-10M-PVC
Series
-F54
2m 5 0,25 V15-W-2M-PUR
PUR, grey
5m 5 0,25 V15-W-5M-PUR
2m 7 0,25 V17-G-2M-PUR
Series
-F64
PUR, grey
5m 7 0,25 V17-G-5M-PUR
screened
10 m 7 0,25 V17-G-10M-PUR
Mating connectors in M12 design with cross-braided lead
Series
-D1
Suitable for DC sensors with 2, 3 or 4 wires
technique, cross-braided halogen free
lead or with PE Series
LUC
1(BN) 1(BN)
4 2 4 2
(BK) (WH) (BK) (WH)
Double sheet
monitoring
5
3(BU) (GN/YE)
3(BU)
Design
Length angled
sheath wires (mm2) straight angled
with 2 LEDs
Power supplies
Control units/
PUR, halo- 2m 4 0,34 V1-G-2M-PUR H/S V1-W-2M-PUR H/S V1-W-A2-2M-PUR H/S

gen free,
cross-
braided, 5m 4 0,34 V1-G-5M-PUR H/S V1-W-5M-PUR H/S V1-W-A2-2M-PUR H/S
orange
1 7.8.05
PUR, cross- 2m 4+1 0,34 V15-G-2M-PUR S/PE V15-W-2M-PUR S/PE V15-W-A2-2M-PUR S/PE
Accessories
braided with
Da te o f issu e
PE, orange 5m 4+1 0,34 V15-G-5M-PUR S/PE V15-W-5M-PUR S/PE V15-W-A2-5M-PUR S/PE
-12GM
Series
Mating connectors 7/8-16 UN 2A for AC sensors in series F42 (UB...-F42(S)-UK-V95)

Pin out/wire (colours
-18GK/-18GM
)
Series
5(WH) 1(BK)
4(BN) 2(BU)
Series
-30GM
3 (GN)
Design Design
Cable sheath Length Number of wires (mm2)
straight angled
VariKont
Series
PVC 2m 5 0,75 upon request V95-W-2M-PVC
Type code mating connectors

Series
-FP
V1 - W - E2 - 2M - PVC
Cable material - PVC

Series
-F12
- PUR
- PUR H/S, halogen free cross-braided
- PUR S/PE cross-braided, with PE
Series
-F42
Cable length 22 m
-5 m
- additional length on demand
Series
-F43
with/without LED - E2 (for 3-wire pnp), 2 LEDs

- E0 (for 3-wire npn), 2 LEDs
- E2/E3 (contact 2 + 4 link), 2 LEDs
Series
- A0 (for 4-wire npn), 2 LEDs

-F54
- A2 (for 4-wire pnp), 2 LEDs

- no designation = without LED
Series
Design -W angled
-F64
-G straight
-WM angled with cap nut
-WR angled with twist connect
Series
-GR straight with twist connect

-D1
Connection - V1 M12 x 1, 4-pin, DC

method
Series
LUC
- V1S M12 x 1, 4-pin, DC, connector

- V13 M12 x 1, 3-pin, AC
-V15 M12 x 1, 5-pin, DC
Double sheet
monitoring

- V16 Rd24 x 1/8, 7-pin, AC/DC
- V16S Rd24 x 1/8, 7-pin, AC/DC, connector
- V17 M12 x 1 7-pin, DC
Power supplies
- V18 M18 x 1, 4-pin, AC/DC

Control units/
- V3 M8 x 1, 3-pin, DC
- V31 M8 x 1, 4-pin, DC
1 7.8.05
- V7 Amphenol-Tuchel C164 639F 7S22

Accessories
- V95 7/8-16 UN 2A, 4-pin, AC

Da te o f issu e
-V with central screwed connection, 4-pin
Accessories - mounting aids
-12GM
Series
MH 04-3505 Horizontal axis
1)
-18GK/-18GM
2
x. 5
pro
Series
ap
7
65
Series
-30GM
65
VariKont
Vertical axis
Series
Series
-FP
The type 04-3505 mounting accessory simplifies the adjustment of ultrasonic sen-
sors of the -FP and -F42 series.
Mounting accessory for the simple ad- It permits the completely installed and wired sensor to be swiveled by up to 30 in
justment of -FP and -F42 series sensors 2 orthogonal axes.
Series
The sensor is locked in the desired position by tightening the mounting screws.
-F12
MH 04-2681F
Series
-F42
30
60
Series
-F43
90
Series
-F54
40
5.2
Series
-F64
30
Height in two-point installation approx. 28 mm
For ultrasound sensors (VariKont , +U9+ series) compliant with DIN 43694, EN
Series
-D1
Mounting accessory for the simple ad- 50025 oder EN 50037.
justment of VariKont series sensors The simple mounting is performed with traditional C-profile rails 1) as in
EN 50024 (15 x 30 x 1.5). For existing systems, the mounting accessories will also
fit on C-rails 1 that comply with the obsolete DIN 43662 standard (15 x 30 x 2). Gen-
Series
erous scope for adjustment in the x and y directions and 360 rotation simplify and
LUC
speed up installation and adjustment work. The adjustment of the sensor in the se-
lected position is performed using the switch mounting screws (included). Provision
has also been made for two-point mounting as an alternative to the C-rail. The re-
Double sheet
quired holes can be accessed through the central guide slot. M5 x 16 mm screws
monitoring
may be used for mounting.

Technical data:
Material Injection molded zinc, chromated
Permissible shock and b < 30 g, T < 11 ms
Power supplies
Control units/
Vibration loads f < 55 Hz, a < 1 mm

as per IEC 68-2-6 and IEC 68-2-27
Mass approx. 270 g
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
OMH 04 1.5 18.3

35
-18GK/-18GM
Series
15
35
Series
-30GM
9.5 30
62
VariKont
Series
Universal mounting for all cylindrical
12.2
18 mm sensors
Material
Angle: sheet steel, 60 19
Series
-FP
galvanised
Locking disc: sheet steel, For installation on 12 mm round rod or sheet material (thickness 1.5 mm ...
galvanised 3 mm). Suitable for -18GM series sensors.
Locking profile: aluminium, diecast
Series
-F12
MHW 11 125 14
65 0.1 7.5 6.5
Series
-F42
5.5
24
65 0.1
Series
80
-F43
14
12
6.5
15
Series
-F54
40 6
Mounting angle for -FP and -F42 series 40 12
sensors 30
2
Series
-F64
Material: Stainless steel

28
Series
-D1
MH-UDB01
Series
LUC

40
40

6.5
50
70
R25
Double sheet
monitoring
27.5
6.5
3
34
Power supplies
Control units/
68 18.2
Rotatable mounting angle with angle

scale for ultrasonic double-sheet moni-
1 8.08.20 05
tors.
Accessories

Da te o f issu e
70
85
-12GM
Series
CPZ18B03
18mm cylindrical
photoelectric sensor
-18GK/-18GM
(not included)
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
2X screw
10-32 UNF x 63.5
on 50.8 centers
Mounting flange with tumble
mechanism.
2X bracket
Series
For sensors with an M18 threaded
-FP
housing
Swivel nut
Rotation range: 360
Swing range: 10
Series
-F12
(Delivery of mounting flange does not
include sensor) 2X lock nut
18mm hexnut
(not included)
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
BF12
Series
BF18
-F54
E
BF30 F B
A
Series
-F64
C
Series
D
-D1
Series
LUC
A B C D E F suitable cylinder head screws

[mm] [mm] [mm ] [mm] [mm] [mm ]
Double sheet
monitoring
BF12 24 36 19 12 30 16 M4 x 20
BF18 30 44 23 18 40 26 M5 x 25
BF30 40 56 34 30 40 24 M5 x 40
Power supplies
Universal mounting brackets with trans-

Control units/
parent upper part for all cylindrical sen-

sors with 12 mm, 18 mm, or 30 mm.
Material: PBT
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
M105
-18GK/-18GM
Series
1-1/2" NPT
M30x1.5
58.5
44.7
23
Series
-30GM
Universal mounting for cylindrical sen-

sors with 30 mm for sensors with front- 6.5 26.8 49.4
VariKont
Series
57
end thread (UB/UC300. -500 and -2000.
Secure mounting
Easy installation
Robust design
Series
-FP
Chemical-resistant
Material: PTFE
(Delivery of mounting asseccories does
Series
-F12
not include sensor)
BF18-F
BF18-F 29
Series
BF30-F
-F42
30
24
14
Series
-F43
18
12
Series
-F54
4.2
4
7.81
4.1
Series
-F64
14
BF30-F 41 35
Series
-D1
33 29
Universal mounting for all cylindrical
sensors with 18/30 mm
The flange is mounted using the
35
oblong holes, the adjustment

Series
24
LUC
range is 8 mm at maximum.
Suitable screws for installation of 13
30
the mounting flange: M4
Double sheet
monitoring
4.2
4
Power supplies
Control units/
4.1
7.8
14
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
PA02
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
19
Series
-FP
22
Mounting flange for all block type -FP

series sensors
Series
-F12
Secure mounting
98
Easy installation
178
Robust design
Series
-F42
(Delivery of mounting flange does not
include sensor) Material: PVC
Series
-F43
Nut M12K-VE
Nut M18K-VE
Nut M30K-VE
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Plastic nuts with centering ring for vibra-
tion decoupled installation of cylindrical
Series
sensors with diameters of 12 mm,

LUC
18 mm and 30 mm.
These nuts should be used in applica-

Double sheet
monitoring
tions, where the sensor is fixed at the

front third of the housing, when ambient
temperatures of < 0 C can occur.
Material: PA
Power supplies
Packaging unit: 1 pair

Control units/
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
BF 5-30 25 29
360adjustment
-18GK/-18GM
Series
M4, internal hexagon
25
SW3
Series
-30GM
40-60 adjustable
Mounting head
11
Threaded pin, internal hexagon SW2
VariKont
Foot fixing
Series
16
Series
-FP
360 adjustment
Uiversal mounting for all cylindrical sen-
sors with 5 mm ... 30 mm
Series
-F12
Secure mounting 16
11.5
Easy installation
Flexible 360 adjustment of meas-
11
uring head and base
Series
-F42
Robust design
15
The BF 5-30 mounting flange is sup-
plied with two mounting heads (18 M4, internal hexagon
mm, 30 mm) and 4 sleeves (5 mm, SW3
Series
-F43
8 mm, 12 mm, 14 mm). 25

Series
-F54
Series
-F64
8
1
d
Series
-D1
Adapter bush
Mounting head 18
d= 5 mm, 8 mm, 12 mm, 14 mm

Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
50
3
Power supplies
Control units/
30
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
Mounting head 30
Accessories - sound deflectors
-12GM
Series
UVW90-K18 26.6
UVW90-K30
-18GK/-18GM
UVW90-K18
22
Series
15
45
Series
-30GM
41
3.2
9
VariKont
Series
41
Series
Sound deflector for cylindrical -18GM
-FP
and -30GM series ultrasonic sensors.
Clamp mounting UVW90-K30
34
90 sound deflection for difficult
Series
installation circumstances
-F12
24
Universal installation position
On the underside of the slope the sound

deflector has a hole over the complete 45
Series
-F42
width. Falling particle of dust can not
64
congregate in the focusing attachment.
5.5
The function is also guaranteed in dusty
environment.
15
Series
-F43
Material: PMMA
Series
-F54
UVW90-M30
Series
-F64
45
104
Series
-D1
53
10 17.5
40
Series
Thickness 2mm
LUC
Extended hole 5.5x23
Focusing attachment for cylindrical -

30GM series ultrasonic sensors.
Double sheet
monitoring
50
Universal installation options

90 sound deflection for difficult
installation circumstances
32
Universal installation position 50
Power supplies
Control units/
Focusing effect
Detection range increase (through
focussing)
- approx. 40% with UB/UC500
1 8.08.20 05
(with dimension L = 10 mm)

- approx. 20% with UB/UC2000
Accessories
(with dimension L = 35 mm +/- 5

mm)
Da te o f issu e
Accessories - external temperature probes, remote potentiometers
-12GM
Series
UC-30GM-TEMP 27
-18GK/-18GM
7.5
6
Series
10
Series
-30GM
3
500
External temperature probe

The external UC-30GM-TEMP temperature probe may be connected to ultrasonic
VariKont
For ultrasonic sensors of the

Series
sensors of the UC....-30GM-... and LUC4T-... series as an alternative to the sup-

UC...-30GM-... and LUC4T-... series plied temperature plug.
8 mm plug connector The use of the UC-30GM-TEMP permits the ambient temperature of the measuring
Single-hole mounting with position area to be monitored independently of the installation conditions of the sensor in or-
der to minimise temperature influences as effectively as possible.
locking
Series
-FP
LUC4-Z30-G2V
LUC4-Z30-N2V
Series
" NPT
-F12
G" or
Series
-F42
8 mm plug connection
cable length: 300 mm

Series
-F43
External temperature probe

For ultrasonic level sensors of the The external LUC4-Z30-G2V (with GA thread) or LUC4-Z30-N2V (with NPT
LUC4T-... and thread) temperature probes may be connected to ultrasonic sensors of the LUC4T-
Series
UC...-30GM-... series ... and UC...-30GM-... series as an alternative to the supplied temperature plug.
-F54
8 mm plug connector The use of the LUC4-Z30-... permits the ambient temperature of the measuring
area to be monitored independently of the installation conditions of the sensor in or-
Single-hole mounting in thread: der to minimise temperature influences as effectively as possible.
GA (LUC4-Z30-G2V)
Series
NPT (LUC4-Z30-N2V).
-F64
FP100
Series
-D1
82 55
Series
LUC
+ +
Double sheet
monitoring
82
80
- -
Remote potentiometer
Power supplies
Control units/
Potentiometer for the adjustment of the

sensing range of ultrasonic Cable 2 m
through-beam sensor
UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15.
1 8.08.20 05
The potentiometer connection occurs

Accessories
on the transmitter
Da te o f issu e
Accessories - programming aids
-12GM
Series
USB-0,8M-PVC ABG-SUBD9
Modern notebooks and PCs are often not equipped wit astandard RS 232 serial
-18GK/-18GM
interface.
Series
Anyhow, to allow the use of the multiple functions of the service program
ULTRA 2001, the interface adapter USB-0,8M-PVC ABG-SUBD9 offers a sim-
ple solution.
Series
-30GM
The interface adapter USB-0,8M-PVC ABG-SUBD9 provides a RS 232 serial in-
terface at a free USB port.
It can be connected to the USB port either directly or via the 800 mm USB cord,
Interface adapter USB/RS_232
VariKont
which is included in scope of delivery.
Series
Our interface cables can be connected to the 9 pin SUB-D connector in the ac-
customed way.
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
UC-F43-R2
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
RS 232 Sensor
5.5
Series
-F54
A1 A2
69
PEPPERL+FUCHS
Made in Germany
RS 232 interface UC-F43-R2 6
Part No. 102860
Series
For the sensors
-F64
Supply
UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17 and
5.5
UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17. M12x1
Simple insertion in the sensor con-

39 22
nection lead.
Series
-D1
The unit can be switched from the V17 cable connection socket and the V17 plug
connection on the sensor for the TEACH-IN procedure.
The parameterised functions are retained when the programming unit is removed
and/or the power is switched off.
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
Accessories - programming aids
-12GM
Series
UC-30GM-R2 3m
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Sensor side PC side

Series
-30GM
The UC-30GM-R2 interface cable enables the parameterisation of ultrasonic

sensors of types UC...-30GM-..R2-V15 using the ULTRA 2001 service software.
The cable creates a connection between the PC-internal RS 232 interface and
Interface cable
VariKont
the connector of the temperature/programming plug on the sensor.

Series
Series
-FP
UC-FP/U9-R2 100 2000

Series
-F12
wire-end ferrules Sensor side PC side

Series
-F42
The UC-FP/U9-R2 interface cable enables the parameterisation of VariKont and

FP series ultrasound sensors using the ULTRA 2001 service software. The cable
creates a conection between the PC-internal RS 232 interface and the interface
Interface cable connections in the terminal space of the sensor.
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
UC-30GM-PROG 1m
Series
-F64
Sensor side Coded plug side
The UC-30GM-PROG extension cable permits sensors of the UC...-30GM-... and

LUC... series to be taught-in at inaccessible installation locations. The sensor-
Series
-D1
side end of the extension cable is connected to the sensor's temperature plug
socket. The sensor can be programmed with the temperature plug at the other
Extension cable
end of the cable.
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
Accessories - ULTRA 2001 service software
-12GM
Series
UB-PROG2
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Adhesive label
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Programming device
max. 5 cm
For ultrasonic sensors series
UB300
Series
UB400 -12GM
-FP
UB500 -18GM40 -E4
Pa
2
G
r
tN
O
o.
PR
1
UB800 -18GM75 -E5
02
B-
86
U
-V15 teach in
0
UB1000 -30GM -I
40
UB2000 F42(S) -U
Series
UB4000 -F54 A1 A2
-F12
UB6000
... whose teach-in input is on pin 2. 40 22
Simple TEACH-IN of the switching
Series
distances A1/A2 or the measuring
-F42
The unit can be switched from the V15 cable connection socket and the V15 plug
window. connection on the sensor for the TEACH-IN procedure.
Simple selection of the output func- The switching distances/measuring window and output function can be taught in us-
tion: ing the A1 and A2 buttons.
Window mode, normally open/nor- The taught-in switching distances and functions are retained when the programming
Series
-F43
mally closed function. unit is removed and/or the power is switched off.
One switching distance, normally
open/normally closed function.
Monitoring of the detection range.
Series
-F54
UB-PROG3
Series
-F64
!40
Series
-D1
A1
teach in
Series
A2
LUC
Programming device
For ultrasonic sensors series
Double sheet
-E01
monitoring
UB500 -E23
-18GM75 -V15
22
UB1000 -E6
-E7
... whose teach-in input is on pin 5.
Adhesive label
Power supplies
Control units/
Simple TEACH-IN of the switching

distances A1/A2 or the measuring
window.
Simple selection of the output func-
tion: The unit can be switched from the V15 cable connection socket and the V15 plug
1 8.08.20 05
Window mode, normally open/nor- connection on the sensor for the TEACH-IN procedure.
The switching distances/measuring window and output function can be taught in us-
Accessories
mally closed function.

ing the A1 and A2 buttons.
One switching distance, normally
Da te o f issu e
The taught-in switching distances and functions are retained when the programming
open/normally closed function. unit is removed and/or the power is switched off.
Monitoring of the detection range.
-12GM
Series
ULTRA 2001 Why use PC software for parameterisation?

Service software Commands and parameters can be transferred to sensors via an RS 232 interface,
-18GK/-18GM
if present. These commands can be used to output measured values, configure the
WINDOWS user interface with up evaluation process, switching outputs and/or analogue output, set and query pa-
Series
to 5 independent windows. rameters and control the general unit functions. This provides the user with an aid
For all ultrasonic sensors with in adapting the sensor optimally to its specific application and visualising parame-
RS 232 interfaces. ters or measured results.
Convenient parameterisation of all
Series
-30GM
relevant sensor functions such as: Parameterisable sensors

- Evaluation process Series: sensor types:
-30GM UC...--30GM-..R2-V15
- Switching behaviour
VariKont UC...+U9+E6/E7+R2 and UC...+U9+IUE0/E2+R2
- Switching distances UJ3000+U1+...+RS
VariKont
Series
- Analogue output -FP UC6000-FP-...-R2-P5 and UJ6000-FP-...+RS

- Measuring window -F43 UC...-F43-2KIR2-V17
- Filter functions
- Fault management
Brief description
- etc.
Series
The program features a multilingual, menu-based user interface with comprehen-

-FP
to adapt the sensor optimally to its

sive help. It supports up to 5 independent windows. The windows can be displayed
specific application. or hidden, and their size and position on the screen can be adjusted as required.
Logging functions for sensor param- The size and position of the windows is retained by the program.
eter settings and recorded series of
Series
Show lt: Graphical display of the measured distance. The set switching distances
-F12
measurements.
are marked. Simulated LEDs display the switching states of the outputs.
Parameters: All parameters are editable here. Display and input fields permit com-
Software and manual as free down- mands or parameters to be changed at the click of the mouse without detailed
load: knowledge of the relevant commands or their syntax.
Series
-F42
Send command: Sensor parameters are set and queried here in the same manner
http://www.pepperl-fuchs.com as with a terminal program (alternative to the parameterisation window).
Port Monitor: Display of commands sent to the sensor and received by it.
Procedure: Distance: Display of the currently measured distance in mm.
- Select your product, which can be pa-
Series
-F43
rameterised by ULTRA 2001 at our The program and sensor parameters read out by the program can be saved to the
Products page. hard drive or a diskette. Measurement series can be started, the measurement data
- Click on "1830288.zip" in the Further queried periodically and output to a printer or saved to the hard drive/diskette.
documents section.
Series
- Save and unpack the file on your local

-F54
drive.
Use the appropriate interface or inter-

Series
-F64
face cable for communication between

PC and sensor (see page 231)
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
System requirements
The Ultra 2001 application will run on any PC or laptop. Windows 95/98/ME/NT4/
2000 or XP, an EGA or VGA graphic boards and a free RS 232 interface are re-
quired.
Power supplies
Control units/
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
-12GM
Series
-18GK/-18GM
Series
Series
-30GM
VariKont
Series
Series
-FP
Series
-F12
Series
-F42
Series
-F43
Series
-F54
Series
-F64
Series
-D1
Series
LUC
Double sheet
monitoring
Power supplies
Control units/
1 8.08.20 05
Accessories
Da te o f issu e
Standards
The proximity switches of Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH are devel- Standards for electromagnetic compatibility
oped and manufactured consistently according to applicable
standards. Moreover, draft standards are taken into account
during new development, redesign, and changes to existing EN 50081 Basic technical standard for
products radiation interference
Part 1, Residential areas
German standards Part 2, Industrial areas
EN 50082 Basic technical standard for

DIN VDE 0660 Part 208 interference resistance
Low-voltage switching devices, Part 1, Residential areas
auxiliar y power switches, sup- Part 2, Industrial areas
plement on inductive proximity
switches EN 61000-4 EMC, testing and measure-
ment procedures
DIN VDE 0660 Part 209 Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
Switching devices, low-volt-
age switching devices, supple- Standards for explosion protection
ment on contact-free position
switches for safety applica-
tions DIN EN 50014 Electrical equipment for
hazardous areas
DIN VDE 0660 Part 212 General requirements
(replaces DIN 19234) Meas-
urement, regulation, control - DIN EN 50020 Electrical equipment
Electrical path sensors - DC for explosion hazardous
inter vace for path sensors and areas
switching amplifiers Intrinsic safety "i"
EN 60079-10 Electrical equipment for

European standards gas explosion hazardous
areas
EN 60947-5-2 Low-voltage switching devices Classification of hazardous
Part 5: Control devices and areas
switching elements, main sec-
EN 60079-14 Electrical equipment for
tion 2: Proximity switches
gas explosion hazardous
EN 60947-5-6 Control devices and switching areas
elements, proximity sensors - Electrical systems in explosion
DC interface for proximity sen- hazardous areas (excluding
sors and switching amplifiers excavations)
(NAMUR)
Quality assurance standards
International standards
DIN ISO 9000-9004 EN 29000-29 004)
IEC 60947-5-2 Low-voltage switching devices Quality assurance (QA) for
and products and services
control devices, Part 5 Control
DIN ISO 9001 QA from development to
circuit devices and switching
production, installation, and
elements - Section 2, proximity
customer service
switches
Draft IEC 61934 Control circuit devices and Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH is DIN ISO 9001-certified.
switching elements DC inter-
face for proximity sensors and
Da te o f issu e 200 5-08 -17 - Senso rs 1 C atalo g
switching amplifiers (NAMUR)
The CE logo ALPHA
The CE logo is a declaration by the manufacturer that the so Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH is a member of ALPHA, an assocation
designated product conforms to the European standards and for the testing and certification of low-voltage devices, e. V.
directives that are applicable to the product. The following di- This association promotes individual responsibility on the part
rectives are applicable to Pepperl+Fuchs products: of manufacturers of such devices through unified testing
guidelines compliant with applicable standards, and thus sup-
89/336/EEC EMC directive (EN 60 947-5-2) ports high product quality. Through ALPHA's membership in
LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group), government-recog-
73/23/EEC Low-voltage directive (cf.
nised product certifications issued by ALPHA under certain
VDE 0160, product standard
conditions are also recognised in other European countries.
EN 60947-5-2)
Directive 94/9/EC Equipment and protective sys- Resistance of our housing materials to
tems intended for use in poten- chemical substances
tially explosive atmospheres
The following tabular listing of the chemical resistances of our
Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH certifies the conformance of their prod- housing materials gives some indications for the application of
ucts with applicable directives in a manufacturer declaratioin. our sensors in aggressive environmental conditions (next
page).
Chemical resistance
Chemically resistant to V2A ABS Epoxy PBT PC POM PP PPS PS PVC
Acetone + - - + - + + + - -
Formic acid 20 C 40% + 10% - - 85% O 40% 50%
Ammonia + 25% O 10% - + + + + O
Petrol + 25% + + O + - + - +
Benzene + - + + - + - + - -
Brake fluid - O - - - + + - - -
Butane - + + - + + + + - +
Butanol - - - - - + + - - 40 C
Calcium chloride - + - 10% + + + + + 60 C
Chlorobenzene 20 C - + - - + - - - -
Diesel oil - + + + O + 60 C + - -
Acetic acid 20 C 25% O + 10% 10% 70% + 50% 40 C
Formaldehyde + 30% 50% 30% - + 40% 37% 40% +
Frigen 113 - - - - + - - + - +
Fruit juice + - + - + + + - - +
Glycerine + + + + O + + + + 60 C
Heating oil - O + + O + 60 C + - -
Hydraulic oil - - - - + + 60 C - - +
Caustic potash - 50% O 3% - + 50% - 50% 60 C
Potassium chloride + - - - + + + - + 60 C
Potassium hydroxide + - - - - - + - - -
Linseed oil + + - - + + + - + +
Methanol + - + + - + + + - +
Methylene chloride + - - - - O O + - -
Lactic acid 20 C 80% + - + + + - 80% O
Mineral oils + - + + - + + + - +
Motor oils + + - + - + + + O -
Sodium carbonate + + - - + + + - + -
Sodium chloride + + - - + + + - + +
Sodium hydroxide 20 C + - - - - + - - -
Caustic soda 20 C 50% - 3% - + + - 50% +
Nitric acid 66% - - - 10% - 25% - 10% +
Hydrochloric acid - O - 10% 20% - + - 10% O
Lubricating oil + - + - + O/+ + - - -
Carbon disulphide + - - - - + + - - O
Sulphuric acid - 50% - 28% 50% - 80% 50% 50% 70%
Sea water (cold) + - + + - + + + - +
Seifenlauge + - + - O + + - - +
Detergent + - - - - - + - - -
Turpentine + - + - O - + - - +
Carbon tetrachloride + - - - O - - - - O
Toluene + - + + - + - + - -
Trichlorethylene + - - + - - - O - -
Water + + 68 C 68 C + + + + + 60 C
Tartaric acid 20 C + + - + 10% + - + 60 C
Xylene + - - + - + - + - -
Zinc sulphate - + - - + - + - - -
Citric acid 20 C + + - 10% + + - + -
Legend:
+: resistant / O: resistant under some conditions / -: not resistant / : unknown

..C: resistant up to ... C / ..%: resistant up to a ...% solution
Protective enclosures
(DIN VDE 0470 Part 1, EN 60529)
IP 6 7
Degree of protection against contact and foreign

Degree of protection against water
bodies
0 - Not protected 0 - Not protected
1 - Protected against contact with hazardous components

with the backs of the hand
1 - Protected against dripping water
- Protected against solid foreign bodies with a size
and diameter of 50 mm and above

2 - Protected against dripping water when housing
with fingers
is tilted up to 15
and diameter of 12.5 and above

with a tool 3 - Protected against sprayed water
and diameter of 2.5 mm and above

with a wire
4 - Protected against splash water
and diameter of 1.0 mm and above

5 - Protected against water jets
with a wire
- Dustproof

6 - Protected against strong water jets
with a wire
- Protected against dust
7 - Protected against temporary

submersion in water
8 - Protected against continuous

submersion in water
9 - Protected against water in high-pressure/steam-jet

cleaning operations
Notes:
Wherever a code number is not required, the letter "X" must

be used in its place.
Devices identified with a second digit 7 or 8 do not have to fulfil

the requirements of the second digits 5 or 6 unless they have
a double identification (e.g. IPX6/IPX7).
1 7.08.20 05
Da te o f issu e
Glossary Ambient temperature Detection width hysteresis

ABS According to the applicable standards, This denotes the separation of the
ultrasonic sensors must be operational switching points between lateral ap-
Acrylonitrile butadiene styrol
at temperatures from -25 C to +70 C. proach and removal of the measuring
Accuracy of measurement plate, i.e. between approach and re-
This corresponds to the standard tem- moval at right angles to the reference
Maximum value of the deviation from perature range of Pepperl+Fuchs sen- axis.
the ideal characteristic. This is given sors. The values appropriate to
for sensors used for distance meas- specific equipment are given on the Deviation of characteristic
urement and is based on the maximum relevant data sheet. curve
measuring range.
Blind range Accuracy of measurement
Actuation direction
"Unusable area" section Diffuse reflection
The objects can enter the sound beam
Cable length Reflection
from any arbitrary direction. All cata-
logue data on switching points relates Cables of up to 300 m length can be EMC classification
to objects approaching the sensor used for sensors with internal evalua-
along its axis. tion. A maximum length of 100 m can Electromagnetic compatibility is the
be used if the cable is used for com- ability of an electrical device to func-
Adjustment accessories tion satisfactorily in an electromagnet-
munication via the RS 232 interface.
Mounting accessories ic environment, without interfering with
The cable should be shielded in the other devices and without receiving in-
Adjustment range event of high interference levels. terference itself. The EMC classifica-
tion is obtained from tests for emission
The range within which the switching In the case of sensors without evalua-
and resistance to interference in vari-
point of a sensor can be set. tion (H1/2/3 sensors), the cable length
ous test gradings. Grade 3, for exam-
should not exceed 50 m.
ple, corresponds to a normal industrial
Air pressure environment.
CE symbol
During normal atmospheric variation, (see EN 60947-5-2 Annex X).
(5%) the speed of sound varies by The CE symbol is a declaration by the
about 0,6% in a fixed location. manufacturer, that the so designated Fault indicator (alarm)
The resulting changes in switching dis- product conforms to the European and
tances can normally be ignored. international standards and directives Many ultrasonic sensors from Pep-
that are applicable to the product. The perl+Fuchs are equipped with a red
Air temperature following standards and directives are LED to indicate faults. Faults are gen-
applicable to Pepperl+Fuchs products: erally due to the incorrect adjustment
The velocity of sound is strongly de- of the sensor or excessive levels of in-
pendent on the air temperature. This 89/336/EEC EMC-directive
terference.
may lead to a strong dependence of (see also IEC 801)
These are then indicated by the flash-
the base values of an ultrasonic sen- 73/23/EEC Low
ing red LED.
sor if the sensor is not temperature- voltage directive
In case of a fault, the last valid output
compensated. (see VDE 0160,
state is "frozen". Output states remain
EN 60 947-5-2)
in effect until the fault is corrected and
94/9/EC Devices and protec- the sensor is returned to normal oper-
Alarm tion systems ation.
for hazardous areas
Fault indicator Humidity
Concentration
Ambient conditions The velocity of sound increases by 2%
The sound cone has an opening angle from dry to saturated air. As a result,
Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensor op- of approx. 5 at a sound pressure level switching distances decrease by a
erate unaffected by dust, mist, rain, of -6 dB. Further concentration of the maximum of 2%. This can be disre-
snow and audible sound. Deposits on ultrasonics, e.g. by placing a tube in garded under normal circumstances.
the faces of the sensors are normally front of the transducer, is not possible.
prevented by the self-cleaning effect of Hysteresis
the oscillating decoupling layer. Detectable object
Range hysteresis
Standard measuring plate Detection width hysteresis
Impulse relay function

1 7.08.20 05
Time function for switching outputs in

which an output pulse of a specified
length is generated which is not affect-
Da te o f issu e
ed by the length of the switching event.
Timer function
Interference, mutual No load power consumption Protection class
Ultrasonic sensors operating simulta- This is the power consumption of the EN 40050 classifies the protection of
neously with overlapping detection ar- sensor itself under no-load conditions. electrical apparatus against touch,
eas may interfere with one another. penetration of objects or water through
For this reason, minimum distances Normally closed the housing, uncovering, and so on.
between the sensors must be main- The IP code consts of the letters "IP"
If the sensor does not detect an object,
tained. (International Protection) and two dig-
then the output is energised. When an
- If the sensors are transmitting in the its:
object is detected it is de-energised
same direction, the lateral safety dis-
(normally closed, n.c.). 1st digit:
tance corresponds to around half the
sensing range. Degree of protection against contact
Normally open and foreign objects
- In the case of opposed sensors, the
distance should amount to slightly If the sensor does not detect an object, 2nd digit:
more than the sum of the sensors' then the output is de-energised. When Degree of protection against entry of
sensing ranges. an object is detected it is energised water
(normally open, n.o.).
The use of synchronisable sensors is
Table "Protective enclosures"
recommended if these safety distanc- Objects
es cannot be maintained. Pulse extension
The specification of a sensing range is
Light emitting diodes normally based on a flat standard Time function by means of which the
measuring plate measuring 100 x 100 switching time can be extended, pro-
Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors are mm which is positioned at right angles vided it is shorter than the value of the
equipped with LEDs to signal a variety to the sensor axis. The sensing ranges pulse extension.
of states. for sensors for very small distances
are sometimes based on smaller Timer function
Please refer to the appropriate data
sheets for the significance of the indi- plates (see data sheets).
Solid materials, powders and liquids
Quality assurance
vidual LEDs.
can be detected. The standards DIN ISO 9000-9004
Linearity When working with poorly reflecting
materials (felt, cotton wool, foam rub- (EN 29000-29004) regulate the quality
Accuracy of measurement ber, coarse textiles), we recommend assurance (QA) of products and serv-
deploying ultrasonic sensors as reflex ices.
Measuring output sensors.
Hot materials (>100 C) are poor re- Pepperl+Fuchs is certified in accord-
Absolute: The measuring output indicates ance with
flectors.
the distance of the object from the face of
the sensor in millimeters. The output is ei- Section "Notes for installation DIN ISO 9001.
ther analogue (4 mA ... 20 mA, or 0 V ... 10 and operation"
V) or digital (parallel 8-bit or serial RS232). Range hysteresis
Relative: The measuring output gives the PBT
position of the object within the window This is the separation of the switch
area (A1/A2 or lower limit/upper limit). Polybutyleneterephthalate points between the condition when the
measuring plate approaches the sen-
Measuring range PC sor and the condition when it is moving
away from the sensor. The hysteresis
Evaluation range of measuring sen- Polycarbonate is given as a percentage of the operat-
sors. The starting value of the measuring distance (range).
ing range is determined by the "lower
PMMA
limit" the end value by the "far limit" of Range
Polymethylmethacrylate
the sensor.
Usable distance between the ultrason-
Probe
Mounting accessories ic transmitter and receiver (through-
Reflection sensor beam), sensor and reflector (interrupt-
The catalogue lists mounting brackets ed beam), or sensor and object (reflec-
and angles for use with sensors, which tion sensor).
can be adjusted relative to each other.
These items simplify adjustment and Sensing range
alignment of the sensors.
Rated operating current
No load current
This value represents the maximum
This represents the self current re- operating current for continuous oper-
1 7.08.20 05
quirement of the sensor and is meas- ation.

ured under conditions of zero load.
Da te o f issu e
Rated operating voltage Reflection Repeatability
The rated operating voltage is given in The term generally refers to the re- Repeat accuracy
terms of a maximum and minimum val- versal of the direction of waves at the
ue of the supply voltage. Satisfactory border between two media. Residual current
operation of the sensor is assured in A distinction is made between three
Current in the load circuit of the sensor
this range. types of reflection:
when in blocked state.
- Specular reflection: A reflection in
Rated operating voltage which virtually the entire incoming ra- Resolution
diation is reflected with the angle of
The rated operational voltage is given
incidence equaling the angle of re- The smallest change in the measure-
in terms of a maximum and minimum
flection, as in a mirror. ment variable that can be detected and
value of the supply voltage,
- Predominately specular reflection: A represented by a measuring sensor.
e.g. Ve = 10 V DC ... 30 V DC.
mirror reflection with a diffuse share,
Correct operation of the sensors is as- Response time
e.g. from roughened surfaces.
sured within this range.
- Diffuse reflection: A reflection in
which the incoming radiation is re- The shortest possible time between
Readiness delay two switching processes. The re-
flected evenly in all directions.
sponse time corresponds to half the
The readiness delay is the time that
The manner in which an ultrasonic switching frequency.
passes from switch-on of the operating
voltage to the point when a proximity beam is reflected depends on the ratio
of the wavelength to the roughness of Reverse polarity protection
switch is ready to operate.
the surface.
All Pepperl+Fuchs ultrasonic sensors
Reference axis are protected against incorrect con-
Section "Notes for installation
and operation" nection of the operating voltage.
Ideal line upon which the transmitter
and receiver (through-beam) or sensor Ripple
and object/reflector (reflection sensor
Reflective capability
or reflection barrier) are positioned. In The property of objects, depending on The alternating voltage which is super-
the case of single-head systems the surface nature and structure, to reflect imposed on the direct operating volt-
reference axis refers to the line of sym- ultrasonic waves to a greater or lesser age (peak to peak) is expressed as a
metry of the ultrasonic beam; in twin- extent, directionally or diffusely. The percentage of the arithmetic mean val-
head systems it is the central line be- non-reflected is absorbed or transmit- ues. Pepperl+Fuchs sensors conform
tween the ultrasonic beam axes of the ted. In the case of reflection sensors, to the standard EN 50008 in having a
transmitter and receiver. the attainable sensor range can be es- maximum ripple of 10%.
Reflection barrier (Type R) timated using reflection tables for com-

Sensing range
mon materials.
Ultrasonic sensor in interrupted beam Maximum usable distance between re-
mode.
Reflector range
flection sensor and object. The sensor
An object with good reflective proper- Range within which the reflector of an range depends on the intensity of the
ties within the sensing range serves as ultrasonic sensor in beam-interruption transmitted ultrasonic packets, the
a reference. Poorly reflecting objects mode must be positioned in order to be conditions along the measuring dis-
that enter the sensing range can be detected reliably. The reflector range tance, and above all the reflectance of
detected reliably in this operating extends from the end of the blind the object.
mode. range to the end of the sensing range.
Sensing range
Section "Sensor principle" Reflector Sensing range
Reflection sensors (Type D) A reflector is a flat plate with good re-
Range, within its object or reflector is
consist of an active unit with integrated flective properties which is positioned
detected with certainty. In EN 60947-
ultrasonic transmitter and within the sensing range at right an-
5-2, the terms range and sensor range
receiver. The sound waves are reflect- gles to the ultrasonic beam.
have been replaced by the term sens-
ed diffusely by the material to be de- The reflector acts as the reference ob-
ing range.
tected. ject for ultrasonic reflection sensors
used in interrupted-beam mode. This range is determined while apply-
Section "Sensor principle" ing rated operational voltage Ve at an
Sensor principle
ambient temperature of 20 C and a
Repeat accuracy relative humidity of 50 %. In through-
beam sensors, the receiver is moved
(also: repeatability) axially against the sensor; in reflection
Repeatability is determined in an 8 sensors, the measurement plate is
1 7.08.20 05
hour test at 23 5 C and at the rated moved. The control element must
operating voltage. The difference be- switch reliably in the sensing range sd.
tween two operating distances must
not exceed 10% of the nominal operat-
Da te o f issu e
ing distance.
Sensor principle Switch-off delay Tightening torque
Physical principle upon which the func- (previously: switch-off time) On fixed cylindrical sensors with
tion of a sensor is based. threaded housings, the recommended
Period of time required by the sensor tightening torque of 15 Nm should not
Setting from the point at which the object is re- be exceeded.
moved from the detection area, to the
The sensitivity of a number of ultrason- point at which switching occurs. Timer function
ic sensor types can be adjusted using (Switch-on delay is analogous to this)
a potentiometer to ensure that they are Parameterisable time function for the
optimally suited to their deployment. Switch-on delay switch output of a sensor.
Short circuit protection (previously: response time) Pulse extension

Period of time required by the sensor
Many ultrasonic sensors in the Pep- from the point at which the object en- Impulse relay function
perl+Fuchs range are provided with ters the detection area, to the point at
pulsing short circuit protection. If the Type D
which switching occurs. (Switch-off
limiting current value is exceeded, the delay is analogous to this). According to EN 60947-5-2, the desig-
output is periodically blocked and then
nation for a Diffuse mode sensor.
switched free again, until the short cir- Switch-on pulse suppression
cuit has been eliminated. Type R
This device, with which all sensors are
Standard measuring plate equipped, suppresses an output error According to EN 60947-5-2, the desig-
signal when operating voltage is ap- nation for a Reflective mode sensor.
Standard measuring plates permit plied, during the readiness delay inter-
comparative measurements of the val. Type T
switching distances and sensing rang-
es of a variety of proximity switches. Synchronisation According to EN 60947-5-2, the desig-
The following has been established for nation for a Through-beam sensor.
ultrasonic sensors: In order to avoid mutual interaction be-
tween neighbouring sensors, many Unusable area
Through-beam and double-sheet types use a synchronisation input. If
monitor: this is unused or on zero potential, Range in which a reflection sensor, for
- Receiver specified by manufacturer then the sensor operates asynchro- example, cannot detect an object.
(corresponds to the receiver of the nously or with its internal clock-pulse
"Sensing range" section
two-part sensor set) generator.
A positive synchronisation pulse initi- Unusable area
Reflection sensor: ates a measuring cycle. It is started
- Flat plate, 100 mm x 100 mm. with the falling pulse edge. Zone immediately in front of an ultra-
Pepperl+Fuchs can supply sensors sonic sensor in which an object or re-
Switching difference
with synchronisation inputs or outputs flector will not be detected.
Differences in sensor range due to var- which can be linked together for the
purpose of self-synchronisation with Section "Sensing range"
iations in the reflectance of the objects
each other. Adjustment range
to be detected. This specification re-
lates especially to ultrasonic sensors Voltage drop
in direct detection mode.
Many ultrasonic sensors from Pep- The voltage drop is measured across
Switching frequency f the active output of the sensor.
perl+Fuchs are provided with automat-
The switching frequency is the maxi- ic temperature compensation to
reduce the effect of air temperature
Watchdog function
mum number of relevant events in a
given interval that can be detected by fluctuations. In event of interruptions to the operat-
the sensor. It applies for a sensing ra- ing voltage or EMC effects, the watch-
Air temperature
tio of 50% and is indicated in Hertz dog function resets the internal
(Hz). Temperature effect microcontroller of the sensor to a de-
fined initialisation status, i.e. a reset of
Switching hysteresis The effect of temperature on the out- the sensor's internal program is per-
put parameters and switching points of formed.
The hysteresis is the difference in the
a sensor.
path between the switch-on and Window range
The data is given in mm/K.
switch-off point, when an object moves
toward or away from the sensor in the Through-beam sensor (Type T) The switching output becomes active
axial direction about a switching dis- when an object is located in the area
tance. This prevents a continual Through-beam sensors consist of two defined by the switching distances A1
1 7.08.20 05
changeover at the boundary of the re- separate, active devices, the ultrason- and A2.
gion. ic transmitter and the receiver.
see section "Sensor principle"

Da te o f issu e
Alphabetical Type Index
Model number Page Model number Page
BF 5-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 UB2000-F42S-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

BF12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 UB2000-F42S-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BF18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 UB2000-F42S-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BF18-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 UB2000-F42S-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BF30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 UB2000-F42-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BF30-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 UB2000-F54-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
CPZ18B03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 UB2000-F54-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
DA5-IU-2K-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 UB2000-F54-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
DA5-IU-2K-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 UB2000-F54-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
DA5-IU-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 UB2000-F54-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
FP100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 UB3000+U9+H3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
KFA6-STR-1.24.500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 UB3000-F42-UK-V95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
LUC4T-G5P-IU-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 UB300-18GM40A-E5-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
LUC4T-G5S-IU-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 UB300-18GM40A-I-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
LUC4T-N5P-IU-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 UB300-18GM40A-U-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
LUC4T-N5S-IU-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 UB300-18GM40-E5-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LUC4-Z30-G2V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 UB300-18GM40-I-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LUC4-Z30-N2V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 UB300-18GM40-U-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
M105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 UB4000-30GM-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MH 04-2681F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 UB4000-30GM-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MH 04-3505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 UB4000-30GM-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MH-UDB01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 UB4000-F42-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MHW 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 UB4000-F42-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Nut M12K-VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UB4000-F42-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Nut M18K-VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UB4000-F42-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Nut M30K-VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UB4000-F42-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
OMH 04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 UB4000-F42-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UB400-12GM-E5-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
UB1000+FP1+E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 UB400-12GM-I-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
UB1000-18GM75-BIT-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 UB400-12GM-U-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
UB1000-18GM75-E01-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 UB400-F42S-UK-V95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
UB1000-18GM75-E23-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 UB400-F42-UK-V95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
UB1000-18GM75-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 UB500+U9+H3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
UB1000-18GM75-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 UB500-18GM75-BIT-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
UB1000-18GM75-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 UB500-18GM75-E01-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
UB1000-18GM75-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 UB500-18GM75-E23-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
UB1000-18GM75-F-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 UB500-18GM75-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UB1000-18GM75-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 UB500-18GM75-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UB1000-18GM75-PWM-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 UB500-18GM75-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
UB1000-18GM75-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 UB500-18GM75-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
UB1500-F42S-UK-V95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 UB500-18GM75-F-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
UB1500-F42-UK-V95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 UB500-18GM75-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UB2000-30GM-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 UB500-18GM75-PWM-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
UB2000-30GM-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 UB500-18GM75-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UB2000-30GM-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 UB500-30GM-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
UB2000-F42-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-30GM-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
UB2000-F42-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-30GM-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
20 05-0 8-18
UB2000-F42-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-F42-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

UB2000-F42-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-F42-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
UB2000-F42-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-F42-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Da te o f ed ition :
UB2000-F42S-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-F42-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

UB2000-F42S-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 UB500-F42-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Alphabetical Type Index
Model number Page Model number Page
UB500-F42S-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC300-30GM-E7R2-K-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

UB500-F42S-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC300-30GM-IUR2-K-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
UB500-F42S-E6-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC300-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
UB500-F42S-E7-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC300-F43-2KIR2-V17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
UB500-F42S-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC-30GM-PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
UB500-F42S-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC-30GM-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
UB500-F42-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 UC-30GM-TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
UB500-F54-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 UC4000-30GM-E6R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
UB500-F54-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 UC4000-30GM-E7R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
UB500-F54-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 UC4000-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
UB500-F54-I-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 UC500+U9+E6+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
UB500-F54-U-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 UC500+U9+IUE2+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
UB6000-30GM-E4-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 UC500-30GM-E6R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
UB6000-30GM-E5-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 UC500-30GM-E7R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
UB6000-30GM-H3-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 UC500-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
UB6000-FP-H3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 UC500-D1-3K-V7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
UB800-18GM40A-E5-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 UC6000-30GM-E6R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
UB800-18GM40A-I-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 UC6000-30GM-E7R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
UB800-18GM40A-U-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 UC6000-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
UB800-18GM40-E5-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 UC6000-FP-E6-R2-P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
UB800-18GM40-I-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 UC6000-FP-E7-R2-P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
UB800-18GM40-U-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 UC6000-FP-IUE0-R2-P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
UB800-F12P-EP-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 UC6000-FP-IUE2-R2-P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
UBE1000-18GM40-SE2-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 UCC1000-30GM-E6R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
UBE1500-F64-SE0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UCC1000-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
UBE1500-F64-SE0-V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UC-F43-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
UBE1500-F64-SE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UC-FP/U9-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
UBE1500-F64-SE2-V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UDB-18GM35-3E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
UBE4000-30GM-SA2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 UDBK-18GM35-3E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
UBE500-18GK-SE0-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 UDBL-18GM35-3E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
UBE500-18GK-SE2-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 UDC-18GM-400-3E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
UBE500-F64-SE0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UDC-18GMA-400-3E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
UBE500-F64-SE0-V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UH3-KHD2-4E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
UBE500-F64-SE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UH3-KHD2-4I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
UBE500-F64-SE2-V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 UH3-T1-KT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
UBE6000+U1+SA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 UJ3000+U1+8B+RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
UB-PROG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 UJ4000-FP-E2-P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
UB-PROG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 UJ6000-FP-8B+RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
UC1000-30GM-E6R2-K-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ULTRA 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
UC1000-30GM-IUR2-K-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 USB-0,8M-PVC ABG-SUBD9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-T-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 UVW90-K18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
UC2000-30GM-E6R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 UVW90-K30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-T-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 UVW90-M30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
UC2000-30GM-E7R2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 VAZ-2FK-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UC2000-30GM-IUR2-T-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 VAZ-FK-CL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UC2000-30GM-IUR2-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 VAZ-G6F-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UC2000-F43-2KIR2-V17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 VAZ-G6F-W2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
20 05-0 8-18
UC3000+U9+E6+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 VAZ-T1-FK-PG13.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

UC3000+U9+E7+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 VAZ-T1-FK-PG9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UC3000+U9+IUE0+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 VAZ-T1-FK-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Da te o f ed ition :
UC3000+U9+IUE2+R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 WE77-RE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

UC300-30GM-E6R2-K-V15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH worldwide
Croatia Germany
Peppe rl +Fuchs Gm bH w orl dwi de
Zentrale weltweit EL-PRO D.O.O. Pepperl+Fuchs EXTEC

Worldwide Head Office (FA + PA Distributor) Schorndorfer Strae 55
Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH Fallerovo Setaliste 22 73730 ESSLINGEN
Knigsberger Allee 87 10000 ZAGREB Telephone +49 711 313455-0
68307 MANNHEIM Telephone +385 1 3680047 Telefax +49 711 315455-29
Telephone +49 621 776-0 Telefax +385 1 3667428
Telefax +49 621 776-1000 el-pro@htnet.hr Omnitron AG
info@de.pepperl-fuchs.com Aktiengesellschaft fr
Czech Republic optoelektronische Gerte
Pepperl+Fuchs s.r.o. Im Leuschnerpark 4
Sokolovsk 79 64347 GRIESHEIM
18600 PRAG 8 Telephone +49 6155 605314
Telephone +420 221115-540 Telefax +49 6155 6155 8740-12
Telefax +420 221115-550
info@cz.pepperl-fuchs.com Pepperl+Fuchs Drehgeber GmbH
Fhrenstrae 33
Denmark 78532 TUTTLINGEN
Pepperl+Fuchs A/S Telephone +49 7461 9298-0
Stamholmen 173 Telefax +49 7461 9298-22
2650 HVIDOVRE hwolf@de.pepperl-fuchs.com
Telephone +45 70104210
Telefax +45 70104211 Visolux, Zweigniederlassung
info@dk.pepperl-fuchs.com der Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH
Prinzenstrae 85
Austria Egypt 10969 BERLIN
Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH Pepperl+Fuchs Egypt (LLC) Telephone +49 30 61672-0
Industriestrae B 13 9 Abd Al Hamied Lotfy Street, Zone 8 Telefax +49 30 61672-468
2345 BRUNN/GEB. Nasr City
Telephone +43 2236 33441 CAIRO Great Britain
Telefax +43 2236 31682 Telephone +20 2 2721097 Pepperl+Fuchs GB Ltd.
info@at.pepperl-fuchs.com Telefax +20 2 2756096 77 Ripponden Road
mesmat@pepperl-fuchs.com.eg OLDHAM OL1 4EL, Lancashire
Bahrain Telephone +44 161 6336431
Texas Technical Services Finland Telefax +44 161 6246537
(FA + PA Representation) SensoNor Oy sales@gb.pepperl-fuchs.com
P.O. Box: 11302 Kartanontie 20
MANAMA 00330 HELSINKI Greece
Telephone +973 17789555 Telephone +358 9 4777200 Uteco A.B.E.E.
Telefax +973 17789666 Telefax +358 9 47772020 5 Mavrogenous Street
textech@batelco.com.bh joel.patrikka@sensonor.fi 18542 PIRAEUS
Telephone +30 10 4210050
Baltic States France Telefax +30 10 4212033
ELEKOMS Ltd. Pepperl+Fuchs SARL uteco@uteco.gr
Turaidas Str. 10 12 Avenue des Tropiques
LV-1012 RIGA, Latvija 91955 COURTABOEUF CEDEX Hungary
Telephone +371 7336444 Telephone +33 1 60921313 Pepperl+Fuchs Kft.
Telefax +371 7336448 Telefax +33 1 60921325 (FA)
elekoms@apollo.lv commercial@fr.pepperl-fuchs.com Kist Utca 16-18
H-8200 VESZPRM
Belgium Telephone +36 88 590 100
Pepperl+Fuchs N.V. Telefax +36 88 590 133
Metropoolstraat 11 mpozsgai@hu.pepperl-fuchs.com
2900 SCHOTEN
Telephone +32 3 6442500 Iceland
Telefax +32 3 6442441 Tlvusalan ehf.
sales@be.pepperl-fuchs.com Suourlandsbraut 20
Da te o f issu e 0 8/17/05 C atalo gue ? ?? 20 05
P.O. Box 8960

Bulgaria 128 REYKJAVIK
Process Control Telephone +354 5 500450
(PA Representation) Telephone +354 5 500454
Tzarichina Str. 1 Telefax +354 5 500402
1505 SOFIA
Telephone +359 2 703549
Telefax +359 2 703549
processcontrol@bulmail.net
Iran Norway Russia

Asan Sazan Farayand Elteco A/S Pepperl+Fuchs Russia
(FA + PA Representation) Postboks 96 Ul. 4-aya Magistralnaya, 11
Unit No. 17, No. 7, Taghavi St. Floodmyrveien 24 Bld. 1, 8 Floor
Soherevardi Shomali Ave. N-3900 PORSGRUNN 123007 MOSCOW
15686 TEHRAN Telephone +47 35 573800 Telephone +7 095 9958842
Telephone +98 21 845 8401 Telefax +47 35 573849 Telefax +7 095 2595872
Telefax +98 21 844 0915 firmapost@elteco.no info@pepperl-fuchs.ru
Ireland Oman Prosoft Ltd.

Insteco Ltd. Riyam Engineering & Services L.L.C (FA Representation)
The Coach House (FA + PA Representation) 108 Profsoyznaya Str.
Slane P.O. Box: 1931 119313 MOSCOW
Co Meath 112 RUWI Telephone +7 095 2340636
Telephone +353 41 9884288 Telephone +968 594960 Telefax +7 095 9783934
Telefax +353 41 9884292 Telefax +968 595536 root@prosoft.ru
riyam@omantel.net.om
Israel Saudi Arabia
Kama Ltd. Pakistan GAS Arabian Services Est.
20 Hametsuda St. Techno-Commercial (FA + PA Representation)
58190 AZOR Engineers-Representatives P. O. Box 10487
Telephone +972 3 5567747 18-24, Farid Plaza - Shadman 65 31961 AL-JUBAIL
Telefax +972 3 5567548 G.P.O. Box 937 Telephone +966 3 3472696
Kama@netvision.net.il 54000 LAHORE Telefax +966 3 3473480
Telephone +92 42 7584390
Italy Telefax +92 42 7581771 Slovakia
Pepperl+Fuchs ELCON SRL eswaat@brain.net.pk Pepperl+Fuchs s.r.o.
Via delle Arti e Mestieri, 4 Sokolovsk 79
20050 SULBIATE (Milano) Tariq Electric House 18600 PRAG 8
Telephone +39 039 62921 1, Wahab Arcade, Near Denso Hall (Czech Republic)
Telefax +39 039 6292240 M. A. Jinnah Road Telephone +420 221115-540
info@it.pepperl-fuchs.com 74200 KARACHI Telefax +420 221115-550
Telephone +92 21 2628409 info@cz.pepperl-fuchs.com
Kenya Telefax +92 21 2624460
Shankan Enterprises Ltd. teh@super.net.pk South Africa
P. O. Box 44432 P & F Products cc
NAIROBI Poland P.O. Box 2809; 60
Telephone +254 2 440093 INTEX Sp.zo.o. Fourth Ave.
Telefax +254 2 441820 ul. W. Pola 16 EDENVALE 1610
dks@kenyaonline.com 44-100 GLIWICE Telephone +27 11 6098188
Telephone +48 32 2307516 Telefax +27 11 4522026
Kuwait Telefax +48 32 2307517 info@pandf.co.za
Almeer Technical Services intex@intex.com.pl
Co. W.L.L. Spain
(FA + PA Representation) Portugal Pepperl+Fuchs, S.A.
P.O. Box 9240 Pepperl+Fuchs, S.A. Head Office
61003 AHMDAI Txori-Erri Etorbidea, 46 Txori-Erri Etorbidea, 46
Telephone +965 3986594 Polgono Izarza Polgono Izarza
Telefax +965 3980682 48150 SONDIKA (Vizcaya) 48150 SONDIKA (Vizcaya)
talal@almeer.com Telephone +349 4 4535020 Telephone +349 4 4535020
Telefax +349 4 4535180 Telefax +349 4 4535180
Netherlands sov@es.pepperl-fuchs.com sov@es.pepperl-fuchs.com
Pepperl+Fuchs B.V.
Het Wielsem 10 Qatar
5231 BWs-HERTOGENBOSCH Doha Petroleum Construction
Telephone +31 73 6409388 (FA + PA Representation)
Telefax +31 73 6444749 Co. Ltd. (DOPET)
sales@nl.pepperl-fuchs.com P.O. Box 1744

DOHA
Telefax +974 4606347
bhargav@dopet.com
Sweden Turkey United Arab Emirates

Pepperl+Fuchs AB Net Muhendislik Pepperl+Fuchs (M.E.) FZE
Bultgatan 40 b (FA Representation) P.O. Box 61398
442 40 KUNGLV Perpa Ticaret Merkezi A CA-1, Near Round About 8
Telephone +46 303 246070 Blok kat: 5 No:174/176 Jebel Ali Free Zone
Telefax +46 303 246089 Okmeydani ISTANBUL DUBAI
info@se.pepperl-fuchs.com Telephone +90 212 2109354 Telephone +971 4 8817016
Telefax +90 212 2109359 Telefax +971 4 8816935
Switzerland info@netmuh.com.tr info@ae.pepperl-fuchs.com
Pepperl+Fuchs AG
Sgeweg 7 STOKS Ltd. United Eastern Group
2557 STUDEN BE (PA Representation) (FA + PA Representation)
Telephone +41 32 3747676 Zmrtevler Mah. Visne Sokak No.5 P. O. Box 7615
Telefax +41 32 3747678 Maltepe ABU DHABI
info@ch.pepperl-fuchs.com 34852 ISTANBUL Telephone +971 2 6272737
Telefax +90 216 4591290 kanone@ueg.co.ae
Nils & Abbas Trading Co. L. L. C.

P. O. Box 26564
DUBAI
Telephone +971 4 3390044
Telefax +971 4 3388732
jens@nilsabbas.com
Belize Colombia
Zentrale USA JR Controls Industrial & Automation Instrumentos & Controles
USA Head Office (FA Representation) (PA Representation)
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. 100 Metros Norte de la Cruz Calle 39 No. 22 - 45
1600 Enterprise Parkway Roja Desamparados BOGOTA, D.C.
TWINSBURG OHIO, 44087 SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) Telephone +57 1 2088080
Telephone +1 330 4253555 Telephone +506 2597904 Telefax +57 1 2088060
Telefax +1 330 4254607 Telefax +506 2504558 cgomez@iycsa.com.co
sales@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Bermuda Sensortec
Address see (FA + PA Distributor)
USA Head Office Calle 95
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. #9A-08
BOGOTA, D.C.
Bolivia Telephone +57 14007018
Hiller Electric SA Telefax +57 14006945
Av. El Trompillo 573
Casilla 370 Alfatecnica Export
SANTA CRUZ (FA + PA Distributor)
Telephone +591 3 3524484 Calle 95
Telefax +591 3 3526404 #9A-08
mail@hillerelectric.com.bo BOGOTA, D.C.
Brazil Telefax +57 14006945
Pepperl+Fuchs Ltda.
Rua Agostino Pelosini, 73/81 H & D Export
Anguilla Vila Olga (FA + PA Distributor)
Address see CEP 09720-220 SAO BERNARDO Calle 95
USA Head Office DO CAMPO #9A-08
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Telephone +55 11 4339 9935 BOGOTA, D.C.
Telefax +55 11 4338 7547 Telephone +57 14007018
Antigua vendas@br.pepperl-fuchs.com Telefax +57 14006945
Address see
USA Head Office British Virgin Islands Costa Rica
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Address see Elvatron S.A.
USA Head Office (PA Representation)
Argentina Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. 400 Metros Norte de la Agencia
Bruno Schillig S.A. del Banco de Costa Rica
Arenales (Dip. Ortiz) 4030 Canada La Uruca SAN JOSE
1602 Florida, BUENOS AIRES Address see Telephone +506 2961060
Telephone +54 11 47301100 USA Head Office Telefax +506 2190298
Telefax +54 11 47617244 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. elkin.suarez@elvatron.com
schillig@schillig.com.ar
Cayman Islands Euro-Tec S.A.
Aruba Address see (PA Distributor)
Address see USA Head Office Apartado Postal 477-1250
USA Head Office Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. SAN JOSE
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Telephone +506 3847869
Chile Telefax +506 2961542
Bahamas Desimat Ingenieria Ltda. eurotec@sol.racsa.co.cr
Address see (FA Representation)
USA Head Office Rut.: 78.131.420-K JR Controls Industrial & Automation
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Av. Puerto Vespucio 9670 (FA Representation)
Loteo Industrial Puerto Santiago 100 Metros Norte de la Cruz
Barbados PUDAHUEL-SANTIAGO Roja Desamparados
Address see Telephone +56 2 7470152 SAN JOSE
USA Head Office Telefax +56 2 7470153 Telephone +506 2597904
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
importaciones@desimat.cl Telefax +506 2504558
INECO Ltda. Cuba

Avda Ejercito 16 Address see
Piso 4 USA Head Office
6510449 SANTIAGO DE CHILE Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
Telephone +56 2 4638600
Telefax +56 2 4411023
industrial@ineco.cl
Dominica Elvatron S.A. Honduras

Address see (PA Representation) Proyect Asesoria Industrial
USA Head Office 400 Metros Norte de la Agencia S.A. de C.V.
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. del Banco de Costa Rica, La Uruca (PA Distributor)
SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) 43 Calle A 5-01 Zona 12
Dominican Republic Telephone +506 2961060 Col. Monte Maria II
Garlas Controls Telefax +506 2190298 GUATEMALA
(FA Distributor) elkin.suarez@elvatron.com Telephone +502 4794120
Euclides Morillo No. 55 Aroyo Hondo Telefax +502 4791430
SANTO DOMINGO JR Controls Industrial & Automation proyect@navegante.com.sv
Telephone +1 809 5633226 (FA Representation)
Telefax +1 809 5633498 100 Metros Norte de la Cruz Cilasa
garlas.control@codetel.net.do Roja Desamparados (FA + PA Distributor)
SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) Barrio los andes entre 14 y 15
P.A.S. Technologies Telephone +506 2597904 avenida 7, calle A, contiguo a
(PA Representation) Telefax +506 2504558 PecosBill
Julio N. Matos/Industrial Park SAN PEDRO ZULA
Ed. Rona #22, Local Grenada Telephone +504 5571146
00987 CAROLINA (Puerto Rico) Address see Telefax +504 5571149
Telephone +1 787 752 2370 USA Head Office remorale@mayanet.hn
Telefax +1 787 768 3260 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
Inelsa
Ecuador Guatemala (FA + PA Distributor)
Alfatecnica S.A. Proyect Asesoria Industrial Colonia San Carlos de Sula
Cll 93 No. 19-75 S.A. de C.V. Casa #18 Bloque 33
SANTAFE DE BOGOTA D.C. (FA + PA Distributor) SAN PEDRO ZULA
Colombia 43 Calle A 5-01 Zona 12 Telephone +504 5540988
Telephone +57 1 5300808 Col. Monte Maria II mianzel@sulanet.net
Telefax +57 1 538388 GUATEMALA
sales@us.pepperl-fuchs.com Telephone +502 4794120 JR Controls Industrial & Automation
Telefax +502 4791430 (FA Representation)
Soltec guatemala@grupoproyect.com 100 Metros Norte de la Cruz
(FA + PA Distributor) Roja Desamparados
Condominios Luluncoto Prysa SAN JOSE (Costa Rica)
Bloque Illiniza A Depto 102 (FA + PA Distributor) Telephone +506 2597904
QUITO Proyect Asesoria Industrial Telefax +506 2504558
Telephone +593 22607096 S.A. de C.V.
Telefax +593 22607096 Km 16.3 Carretera El Salvador Jamaica
SANTA CATARINA PINULA Address see
Sistemas y Equipos Industriales S.A. Telephone +502 6373229 USA Head Office
(PA Representation) Telefax +502 6373228 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
Rumipamba E2-64 y Av. Repblica alvaromonzon@yahoo.com
Ed. Alex. Ofic. 202 Martinique
QUITO Esinsa Address see
Telephone +593 22459859 (PA Representation) USA Head Office
Telefax +593 22444278 20 Calle 9-63 Z. 11 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
MARISCAL
El Salvador Telephone +502 4424606 Mexiko
Proyect Asesoria Industrial Telefax +502 4424605 Pepperl+Fuchs Mxico, S.A. de C.V.
S.A. de C.V. jorge.munoz@esinsa.com (Head Quarter)
(FA + PA Distributor) Blvd. Xola 613, Ph-4
Av. Los Diplomticos 1318 JR Controls Industrial & Automation Col. Del Valle
Barrio San Jacinto (FA Representation) 03100 MEXICO D.F.
SAN SALVADOR 100 Metros Norte de la Cruz Telephone +52 55 56391951
Telephone +503 2802221 Roja Desamparados Telefax +52 55 56398865
Telefax +503 2701731 SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) pfmexico@mpsnet.com.mx
ElSalvador@GrupoProyect.com Telephone +506 2597904
Telefax +506 2504558 Montserrat

Address see
Haiti USA Head Office
Address see Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
USA Head Office
Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
Nicaragua Puerto Rico Turks & Caicos

Elvatron S.A. Hi-Tech Products Address see
(PA Representation) (FA Representation/PA Distributor) USA Head Office
400 Metros Norte de la Agencia Ave Sanchez Osorio #2 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc.
del Banco de Costa Rica La Uruca 00983 CAROLINA PR
SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) Telephone +1 787 2571707 Venezuela
Telephone +506 2961060 Telefax +1 787 2761888 Empresas Norte-Sur C. A.
Telefax +506 2190298 hi-tech@hi-techproducts.com Innovantis Technologies
elkin.suarez@elvatron.com (PA Representation)
P.A.S. Technologies Ave. Rio Caura Torre Humbolt
Proyect Asesoria Industrial (FA Representation) Of. 12-12, Prados del Este
S.A. de C.V. Julia N. Matos/Industrial Park CARACAS
(PA Distributor) Ed. Rona #22, Local Telephone +58 212 9750355
Calle 27 de mayode Montoya CAROLINA, PR 00987 Telefax +58 212 9750082
50 varas arriba Telephone +1 787 7522370 ruben.fabbro@innovantis.biz
MANAGUA Telefax +1 787 7683260
Telephone +503 2802221 GPM Instrumentacin
Telefax +503 2701731 St. Kitts & Navis (FA + PA Distributor)
proyect@navegante.com.sv Address see Urbanizacin Unare II Paseo
USA Head Office Caroni Torre INCA, Piso 2 Off 3
JR Controls Industrial & Automation Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. PUERTO ORDAZ
(FA Representation) Telephone +58 286 9524884
100 Metros Norte de la Cruz St. Lucia Telefax +58 286 9524796
Roja Desamperados Address see gpmins@telcel.net.ve
SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) USA Head Office
Telephone +506 2597904 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Suplidora Instrumatic C.A.
Telefax +506 2504558 (FA Representation)
St. Martin Urb Industrial Carabobo
Panama Address see Avenida Norte 17-18 #86-41
JR Controls Industrial & Automation USA Head Office VELENCIA
(FA Representation) Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. Telephone +58 241 8327311
100 Metros Norte de la Cruz Telefax +58 241 8329819
Roja Desamparados St. Vincent
SAN JOSE (Costa Rica) Address see Virgin Islands
Telephone +506 2597904 USA Head Office P.A.S. Technologies
Telefax +506 2504558 Pepperl+Fuchs Inc. (PA Representation)
Julia N. Matos
Peru Trinidad & Tobago Park Ed. Rona #22, Local
Desimat Peru S.A. Industrial System & Controls 00987 CAROLINA (Puerto Rico)
(FA Representation) (FA + PA Representation) Telephone +1 787 7522370
Av. Enrique Salazar Barreto 280 Isaac Street Telefax +1 787 7683260
LIMA COUVA
Telephone +51 1 2731892 Telephone +1 868 6369704
Telefax +51 1 2720054 Telefax +1 868 6360948
ventasperu1@desimat.cl
Pepperl+Fuchs Automation Co. Ltd. Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Zentrale Asien Guangzhou Office of Shanghai (Regional Sales Office - South)
Asia Pacific Head Office (PA & FA Office) (Karnataka & Andhra Pradesh)
Pepperl+Fuchs PTE Ltd. Room G 13/F, No. 1 Building C-328, 3rd Main, 1st Stage,
P+F Building No. 445 Tian He Bei Road, Peenya Industrial Estate
18 Ayer Rajah Crescent Tianhe District BANGALORE 560 058
139942 SINGAPORE 510062 GUANGZHOU Telephone +91 80 28371225
Company registration no. Telephone +86 20 38805159 Telefax +91 80 28378031
199003130E Telefax +86 20 38808505 info@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
Telephone +65 67799091 pfgzoo@public.guangzhou.gd.cn
Telefax +65 68731637 Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.
sales@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com Hong Kong (Regional Sales Office - South)
Unicorn International Trading Co. (Tamilnadu & Kerala)
(FA + PA Representation) No. 4, First Floor, X 70,
Room 1208 Shui On Centre Sindur Shopping Complex,
6-8 Harbour Road 2nd Avenue, Anna Nagar
WANCHAI, Hong Kong CHENNAI 600040
Telefax +852 2528 9371 Telefax +91 44 26190129
fooberhk@netvigator.com cro@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
India Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Regional Sales Office - East)
(Head Office) Room No. 221, II Floor "LORDS"
Plot No. 10, 3rd Main, 1st Stage 7/1, Lord Sinha Road
Peenya Industrial Estate KOLKATA 700 071
BANGALORE 560 058 Telephone +91 33 22828539
Telefax +91 80 28378031 ero@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
info@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
Australia Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Pepperl+Fuchs Australia Pty Ltd. Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Regional Sales Office - West)
Unit 7/72-74 Chifley Drive (Regional Sales Office - North) No. 401, A-Wing, Subham Ctr 1, 4th fl.
PRESTON, VICTORIA 3072 305, Ansal Chamber II Cardinal Gracias Road, Chakala
Telephone +61 3 94958600 6, Bhikaji Cama Place Andheri (East)
Telefax +61 3 94846366 NEW DELHI 110066 MUMBAI - 400 099
sales@au.pepperl-fuchs.com Telephone +91 11 26170207 Telephone +91 22 28231946
Telefax +91 11 26166291 Telefax +91 22 28231947
China nro@in.pepperl-fuchs.com wro@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
Pepperl+Fuchs Automation
Co. Ltd. Shanghai (FA Head Office) Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd. Pepperl+Fuchs India Pvt. Ltd.
No. 9, Lane 163 Tan Jia Qiao Road (Vadodara Area Sales Office) (Hyderabad Area Sales Office)
200070 SHANGHAI UG28 Upper Ground Floor Hi Tech Business Centre, 4th Floor,
Telephone +86 21 56525989 "Concorde" R.C. Dutt Road Topaz Bldg.
Telefax +86 21 56527164 Opp Alkapuri Petrol Pump, Amrutha Hills, Punjagutta
info@cn.pepperl-fuchs.com Alkapuri Vadodara HYDERABAD 500 082
GUJARAT 390 005 Telephone +91 40 23407053
Pepperl+Fuchs Beijing Rep. Office Telephone +91 265 5522516 Telefax +91 40 23407093
(PA Head Office) Telefax +91 265 5522516 hyderabad@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
Prime Tower, Room 2007 vadodara@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
No. 22 ChaoYangMenWai Street Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.
BEIJING 100020 Pepperl+Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Coimbatore Area Sales Office)
Telephone +86 10 65885143 (Pune Area Sales Office) 43A, 1st Floor
Telefax +86 10 65885144 Roof & Services, Ground Floor 7th Street, K. K. Pudur, Tamilnadu
pf-china@public3.bta.net.cn Veer Savarkar Udyog Bhavan COIMBATORE 641038
Shivaji Nagar, Maharashtra Telephone +91 42 22450727
Pepperl+Fuchs Pte. Ltd. PUNE 411005 Telefax +91 42 22450727
Shanghai Representative Office
Telephone +91 20 25538658 coimbatore@in.pepperl-fuchs.com

(PA Rep. Office) Telefax +91 20 25538757
218 Tainmu West Road, Room 2509 pune@in.pepperl-fuchs.com Pepperl + Fuchs (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Kerry Everbright City Tower 1 (Jamshedpur Resident Office)
200070 SHANGHAI FA/23, Sindhu Block, Siroman Nagar
Telephone +86 21 63542910 Binda Apartment, Dimna Road,
Telefax +86 21 63546536 Mango
pfshapa@public8.sta.net.cn Jharkhand JAMSHEDPUR 830018
Telephone +91 65 72363146
Telefax +91 65 72363146
jamshedpur@in.pepperl-fuchs.com
Indonesia Miran Engineering Sdn Bhd Taiwan

PT Himalaya Everest Jaya (PA Representation) Kawa Kami Enterprise Corp.
(FA Representation) No. 16 Jalan Astaka U8/82 (FA Representation)
Jln. Daan Mogot Km. 10, Bukit Jelutong Commercial Area 1F, No. 41, Lane 76,
No. 151 Pesing Poglar 40150 SHAH ALAM SELANGOR Jui Kuang Road, Neihu District
11710 JAKARTA Barat Telephone +60 03 78473278 114 TAIPEI
Telephone +62 21 5448956 Telefax +60 03 78475236 Telephone +886 2 27920078
Telefax +62 21 6194658 zainuddin@trisys.com.my Telefax +886 2 87917969
himalaya@indosat.net.id kawa.kami@msa.hinet.net
New Zealand
PT Binakarya Sentosaprima Unilink Automation Ltd. Globe Royal Cavalier Corporation
(PA Representation) (FA Representation) (PA Representation)
Citra Garden 1 Blok C-2/24 PO Box 300785, Albany 6th Floor, 23 Jen Ai Road, Sec. 3
11840 JAKARTA 10E Vega Place, Mairangi Bay TAIPEI
Telephone +62 21 5451136 1130 AUCKLAND Telephone +886 2 27718246
Telefax +61 21 5403647 Telephone +64 9 4760286 Telefax +886 2 27519032
ptbina@cbn.net.id Telefax +64 9 4760267 grcc@ms19.hinet.net
sales@unilink.co.nz
PT Pepperl and Fuchs Bintan Thailand
SD 56, 57 Lobam Custom Control Ltd. Industrial Electrical Co., Ltd
Bintan Industrial Estate (PA Representation) (FA Representation)
PULAU BINTAN, RIAU 16 Mahunga Drive, Mangere Bridge 85/3 Soi Sot Phin San
Telephone +62 770 696675 Private Bag 92 902 Rang Nam Road, Rajthevee
Telefax +62 770 696677 ONEHUNGA, AUCKLAND 6 BANGKOK 10400
Japan Telefax +64 9 6365976 Telefax +66 2 6424249
Pepperl+Fuchs K.K. jneville@customcontrols.co.nz iecl@ie.co.th
German Industry Center 401
18-2 Hakusan 1-Chome, Midori-Ku Philippines Delta Elmech Co., Ltd.
226 0006 YOKOHAMA Jaylan Mill Trades Inc. (PA Representation)
Telephone +81 45 9397802 (FA Representation for Visayas + 72 Soi Pattanakarn 53,
Telefax +81 45 9397804 Mindanao) (Muangthong 2/3)
sales@jp.pepperl-fuchs.com Ground Floor D&C National Highway Pattanakarn Road, Suanluang
MANDAUE CITY CEBU BANGKOK 10250
Korea Telephone +63 32 3442651 Telephone +66 2 322-5423
Pepperl+Fuchs Korea Ltd. Telefax +63 32 3460763 Telefax +66 2 322-1762
Bum-Yang Bang-Bae Bldg. jaylancbu@skyinet.net deltabkk@deltaelmech.co.th
5th Floor, #811-6, Bang Bae-dong
Seo Cho-Ku Multiplex Instrumentation & Control Vietnam
137060 SEOUL Equipment Services Provina Technology Co. Ltd.
Telephone +82 2 34819494 (PA Representation) (FA Representation)
Telefax +82 2 34819495 3378 A Lbarra Street 148B Nam Ky Khoi Nghia
info@kr.pepperl-fuchs.com PALANAN MAKATI CITY Q1 TP
Telephone +63 (2) 550 1473 HO CHI MINH CITY
Malaysia Telefax +63 (2) 550 1475 Telephone +84 8 8298901
Industrial Automation (M) SDN BHD multiplex@quickweb.com.ph Telefax +84 8 8295486
(Kuala Lumpur Office FA) provina@hcm.vnn.cn
30-3 & 30-4, Jalan Loke Yew Process Innovations, Inc.
55200 KUALA LUMPUR (FA-Representative for Luzon)
Telephone +60 0392 210511 W-11 Guadalupe Arcadia Square
Telefax +60 0392 212330 J. P. Rizal Ext.
iakl@tm.net.my Cembo Makati City
Telephone +63 2 8826411
Telefax +63 2 8826357
pi-filters@surfshop.net.ph
Notes
N otes
Notes
Notes

32 USONICsd

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

32 USONICsd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FACTORY AUTOMATION

Pepperl+Fuchs GmbH worldwide ________________________________________________________ 246

Sensors for separate

tra tte r Series -F54 2000 mm

Through beam sensors

Series VariKont 6000 mm

Detection and reflection

Switch Ultrasonic Series -FP 6000 mm

Series -D1 550 mm

Control / evaluation units

Supply voltage range

Integral skin foam

The transducer transmits a packet of sonic pulses and con- S

The ultrasonic beam has an opening angle of around 5. The

The opening angle defines the spatially dimension of the

For a simple evaluation of the sound cone diameter D, you can

0.5 Range [m] Relative humidity

Due to the physical properties of sound propagation, the de-

- Air temperature 0,8

Sonic speed [m/s] Pressure [hPa]

The substantially increased sensor range at low temperatures

As the signal echo time is evaluated in our ultrasonic sensors,

This temperature compensation is performed by an electrical

The sensor gives off a certain intrinsic heat that depends on

1. Sensor principle Ultrasonic double-sheet monitoring is deployed in all situa-

- changes to the measured distances

Direct detection Analogue distance measurement

An arbitrary measuring window can be set within the near and

receiver transducers intersect each other (reflex/direct detec-

Sensing range according to data sheet

2. Output functions Large Inclined

Reflex sensor mode is possible with each of our ul-

Unusable area A1 A2 Object distance

With our ultrasonic sensors, which support the window mode,

Reflex sensor mode

Example: Normally open,

npn/pnp output Digital, parallel

These ultrasonic sensors can be parameterised via a bi-direc-

* NDE = Near Distance of Evaluation

On these sensors an external synchronising pulse triggers the

The following evaluation units are available:

- UH3-KHD2-4I (4 analogue outputs)

With the types UH3-KHD2..., 4 sensors can be used in syn-

Power is also supplied to the connected sensors by the evalu-

3. Types/housing shapes Design: 30GM... -K-...

The D1 type was designed specifically for single-hole mount-

- Simple parameterisation via DIP switch

Cuboid shaped types

VariKont (Designation: U1 and U9) Design: F12

The VariKont housing was developed by Pepperl+Fuchs

Design: F43 Double-sheet monitoring

The ultrasonic double-sheet monitor is a measuring system

Typical applications include:

4. Electrical connections Three different connection types are used on Pepperl+Fuchs

Overview of electrical connections

Typical electrical data Type Switching output/Remarks Standard symbol (selection)

E2 PNP Nor mally open NO

Analogue IU Sensor for

Core colours in accordance with EN 60947-5-2.

External evaluation H1 Emitter*

5. Parameterisation Example 2: UB1000+FP1+E6

Coding switch in terminal compartment

OFF S1 S8 S9 S10 UC300 A2